This is a modern-English version of A new account of Guinea, and the slave-trade, originally written by Snelgrave, William.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
This book was printed in 1754 and this etext is a careful reproduction of that original text. No spelling and very few punctuation corrections have been made in order to preserve the historical value of the original work.
This book was printed in 1754, and this e-text is a careful reproduction of that original text. No spelling or many punctuation corrections have been made to maintain the historical value of the original work.
All dates in the book are prior to 1750, and so are Julian calendar dates where a new year begins on March 25th. However the book was published in the Gregorian era, so whenever a year is given for a date between January 1st and March 24th, both the Julian and Gregorian year were printed. This is shown in the book with a hyphen, for example ‘the 10th day of March 1718-19’.
All dates in the book are before 1750, including Julian calendar dates that start the new year on March 25th. However, since the book was published in the Gregorian era, whenever a year is mentioned for a date between January 1st and March 24th, both the Julian and Gregorian years are provided. This is indicated in the book with a hyphen, for example, ‘the 10th day of March 1718-19’.
The long-s ſ has been replaced by s throughout the etext.
The long s has been replaced by s throughout the etext.
There is only one footnote in this book. The anchor is denoted by (a), and the footnote itself has been placed at the bottom of that paragraph.
There is only one footnote in this book. The anchor is noted by (a), and the footnote itself has been placed at the bottom of that paragraph.
All the changes noted in the ERRATA have been applied to the etext, except for the change noted for p71, which could not be identified. All occurrences of Testesole have been changed to Testefole.
All the changes mentioned in the ERRATA have been applied to the etext, except for the change noted for p71, which couldn't be identified. All instances of Testesole have been changed to Testefole.
A few minor corrections to obvious compositor errors are noted at the end of the book. Some missing quote marks have been silently added. All other misspellings in the text, and inconsistent or archaic usage, have been left unchanged.
A few minor corrections to obvious typesetter errors are noted at the end of the book. Some missing quotation marks have been quietly added. All other misspellings in the text, and inconsistent or outdated usage, have been left unchanged.

A New Map of that part of Africa called the Coast of Guinea
A New Map of that part of Africa known as the Coast of Guinea
From the River Senegal in Latt.d 16.d N.o To Cape Lopez in 1.d 00′. S.o with the Inland Countries from the Sea so far as the Great Rivers, Senegal and Niger.
From the Senegal River at 16° N to Cape Lopez at 1° 00′ S, including the inland areas from the sea all the way to the major rivers, Senegal and Niger.
A NEW
ACCOUNT
OF
GUINE
And the Slave Trade,
CONTAINING,
CONTENTS,
I. The History of the late Conquest of the Kingdom of Whidaw by the King of Dahomè. The Author’s Journey to the Conqueror’s Camp; where he saw several Captives sacrificed, &c.
I. The History of the recent Conquest of the Kingdom of Whidaw by the King of Dahomè. The Author’s Journey to the Conqueror’s Camp; where he witnessed several Captives sacrificed, &c.
II. The Manner how the Negroes become Slaves. The Numbers of them yearly exported from Guinea to America. The Lawfulness of that Trade. The Mutinies among them on board the Ships where the Author has been, &c.
II. How Black People Become Slaves. The Number of Them Exported Each Year from Guinea to America. The Legality of That Trade. The Rebellions on Board the Ships Where the Author Has Been, &c.
III. A Relation of the Author’s being taken by Pirates, and the many Dangers he underwent.
III. A Story about the Author being Captured by Pirates and the Many Dangers He Faced.
By Captain William Snelgrave.
By Captain William Snelgrave.
With a new and correct Map of the Coast of Guinea.
With a new and accurate map of the coast of Guinea.
LONDON:
LONDON:
Printed for J. Wren, at the Bible and Crown, in
Salisbury-Court; Fleet-Street. 1754.
Printed for J. Wren, at the Bible and Crown, in
Salisbury-Court; Fleet-Street. 1754.
TO THE
Vendors
OF
LONDON
Trading to the Coast of Guinea.
Trading to the Coast of Guinea.
Gentlemen,
Guys,
SOME of you having been pleased to peruse the following Sheets in Manuscript, and been so kind, as to express your Approbation of them, it hath incouraged me to make them publick; and I take the Liberty to address them to the Merchants trading to the Coast of Guinea, as being the best Judges of the Truth of what is here related.
SOME of you have been pleased to read the following manuscript and have kindly expressed your approval of it, which has encouraged me to make it public. I take the liberty of addressing this to the merchants trading along the coast of Guinea, as they are the best judges of the truth of what is discussed here.
As it has been my good Fortune to be known for many Years to most of you, and to have received Favours from several amongst You, so I beg leave to subscribe my self, with the greatest Respect and Esteem, Gentlemen,
As I've been fortunate to be known by most of you for many years and have received favors from several of you, I ask for permission to sign off with the greatest respect and admiration, gentlemen,
Your most obliged
humble Servant,
W. SNELGRAVE.
Your most obliged
humble Servant,
W. SNELGRAVE.
PREFACEE.
THE best part of the following Sheets were writ several Years ago, more particularly the Account of my being taken by Pirates, in the Year 1719: And being now induced to publish the History of the Conquest of the Kingdom of Dahomè, I have added the other, which is as remarkable in its kind.
THE best part of the following sheets was written several years ago, specifically the account of my being captured by pirates in the year 1719. Now, having been motivated to publish the history of the conquest of the kingdom of Dahomè, I have added the other, which is equally notable in its own way.
I am sensible that Objections may be made to the Account I have given of the Dahomes, by such of my Readers as are not acquainted, either by Travelling or Reading, with the Manners and Customs of several barbarous brutish Nations, that have been and are still on the Globe.
I realize that some of my readers who aren't familiar with the customs and habits of various wild and uncivilized nations, whether through travel or reading, may have objections to the account I've provided of the Dahomes.
As to human Sacrifices, they are no new thing in the World; for it is recorded of the Mexicans in particular, that they annually sacrificed to their Gods, a great number of their Enemies taken in War.
Human sacrifices aren't a new concept; it's noted that the Mexicans specifically sacrificed a significant number of their enemies captured in battle to their gods every year.
Mens eating of their own Species, seems to be the most incredible and shocking; but this is practised by others at present (besides the Dahomes) on the Coast of Guinea; especially by a People called Acquas, on the River of old Callabar, and amongst the Camarones adjoining, where I have formerly been, and of which there are some Witnesses now in London: Captain Arthur Lone and others, having seen the same as well as my self.
Humans eating their own kind seems to be the most unbelievable and shocking thing; however, this is currently practiced by others (besides the Dahomeans) on the Coast of Guinea; especially by a group called Acquas, near the old Callabar River, and among the Camarones nearby, where I have been before, and there are some witnesses now in London: Captain Arthur Lone and others have seen it just like I have.
As to the Story in general of the King of Dahomè, there are some Gentlemen now in Town, that know a great part of it; namely, Jeremiah Tinker Esq; Governor Wilson, and others, who have formerly resided at Whidaw, for the Royal African Company: Besides several that have been there in the Service of private Merchants: As also Charles Dunbar Esq; of Antegoa, who bought the Negroe-Woman of me there, whose Story is so remarkable, on account of her being thrown as a Sacrifice into the Sea, and her wonderful Preservation afterwards, the Truth of which she has often confirmed.
As for the overall story of the King of Dahomey, there are some gentlemen in town who know a lot about it, including Jeremiah Tinker Esq; Governor Wilson, and others who previously lived in Whidaw, for the Royal African Company: as well as several who have been there in the service of private merchants: Also Charles Dunbar Esq; of Antigua, who bought the African woman from me there, whose story is quite remarkable, due to her being sacrificed by being thrown into the sea, and her incredible survival afterwards, a truth she has often confirmed.
As to the Relation of my being taken by Pirates, there are several in and about Town, that suffered by them, at the same time and place with my self. And Mr. James Bleau, who was then my Surgeon, lives now at Woodford, in good Repute and Esteem with the Gentlemen of that Village and Neighbourhood.
Regarding my capture by pirates, there are several people in and around town who were affected by them at the same time and place as I was. And Mr. James Bleau, who was my surgeon at that time, now lives in Woodford, enjoying a good reputation and respect from the gentlemen of that village and the surrounding area.
I shall say nothing with relation to the short Account I have given of the manner how the Negroes become Slaves, and of the Management of them when on Shipboard, it being designed at first only for a Friend’s Satisfaction, who had objected against the lawfulness of that Trade.
I won’t say anything about the brief Account I’ve provided on how the Negroes become Slaves and how they are managed on ships, as it was initially intended only for a friend’s satisfaction, who had questioned the legality of that trade.
As I love Freedom my self, so I readily leave the Reader to judge and believe as he pleases, concerning what is here related: My principal motive for publishing these Sheets, being the Persuasion of some Friends, who had perused them in Manuscript, and thought they might prove acceptable to the Publick.
Since I love freedom myself, I willingly let the reader judge and believe as they wish about what’s written here. My main reason for publishing these pages is the encouragement of some friends who read them in manuscript and thought they might be enjoyable to the public.
INTRODUCTIONN.
THAT Part of Africa commonly called Guinea, is of a large Extent, beginning at Cape Verd, in 14 Degrees 30 Minutes North Latitude, and extending to the South and East, as far as the Coast of Angola; the River Congo, in 6 Degrees South Latitude, being the farthest place where the English carry on their Trade.
THAT part of Africa commonly known as Guinea is quite vast, starting at Cape Verd in 14 degrees 30 minutes north latitude and stretching south and east all the way to the coast of Angola; the Congo River, located at 6 degrees south latitude, marks the southernmost point where the English conduct their trade.
In this Country of Guinea, the English have trafficked a great many Years: But especially, since the Conclusion of the last French War, it has been so improved, that whereas in the Year 1712, there went only 33 Ships from England to that Coast, in 1726, it was proved before the Commissioners of Trade, that there had been there the Year before above 200 Sail, to the great increase of Navigation, and the advantage of our Plantations in America.
In this country of Guinea, the English have been trading for many years. However, especially since the end of the last French War, it has improved significantly. In 1712, only 33 ships from England traveled to that coast, but by 1726, it was demonstrated before the Commissioners of Trade that the year before, there had been over 200 ships there, greatly boosting navigation and benefiting our plantations in America.
Such as are unacquainted with this Country, may reasonably suppose we should have gained by this time a perfect account of the Inland-Parts; yet perhaps we know the least of it of any Country the English have so long traded to, for reasons I shall give hereafter. But as I design only to inform the Reader, (for his better understanding the following Sheets) in a cursory manner, of those parts of the Coast of Guinea, that I have been personally acquainted with: So, as I go along, I shall intermix my Reasons with the Account.
People who are unfamiliar with this country might reasonably think that by now we would have a complete understanding of the interior regions. However, we probably know less about it than any other country the English have traded with for a long time, for reasons I’ll explain later. But since my goal is simply to inform the reader (to help them better understand the following sections) about the parts of the coast of Guinea that I have personally experienced, I will share my observations along with my reasoning as I proceed.
I have traded along this Coast for near 700 Leagues, from a River called Sherberow, in the Latitude of 7 Degrees 30 Minutes North, to Cape Lopez Gonsalvez, in 1 Degree South, near the Coast of Angola: Now in so large an Extent, we meet with very different People and Trade.
I have traded along this coast for about 700 leagues, from a river called Sherberow, at a latitude of 7 degrees 30 minutes north, to Cape Lopez Gonsalvez, at 1 degree south, near the coast of Angola: Now, in such a vast area, we encounter very different people and trade.
The first part I shall mention, is about 250 Leagues in length, from the above-mentioned River of Sherberow, round Cape Palmas, to the River Ancober near Axim. This is commonly called the Windward Coast, on which there is no Settlement or Factory of any European Nation; but the Trade is carried on in this manner.
The first part I want to highlight is about 250 leagues long, starting from the aforementioned River of Sherberow, around Cape Palmas, to the River Ancober near Axim. This area is generally known as the Windward Coast, where there are no settlements or factories belonging to any European nation; instead, trade is conducted in this way.
As soon as the Natives perceive a Ship on their Coast, they make a smoke on the Sea-Shore, as a Signal for the Ship to come to an Anchor, that they may come and trade with the People on board. As soon as we are at an Anchor, they come to us in small Boats, called Cannoes, being made of a single Tree, and bring their Commodities with them.
As soon as the Natives see a ship on their coast, they make a smoke signal on the shore for the ship to anchor so they can come and trade with the people on board. Once we are anchored, they come to us in small boats called Canoes, which are made from a single tree, and bring their goods with them.
Along the greatest part of this Coast, the Europeans have been cautious of venturing on Shore amongst the Natives, they being very barbarous and uncivilized, as several have experienced to their cost. In those few places where I have been on Shore my self, I could never obtain a satisfactory account from the Natives of the Inland Parts. Nor did I ever meet with a white Man that had been, or durst venture himself, up in the Country; and believe, if any had attempted it, the Natives would have destroyed them, out of a Jealousy that they designed to make discoveries to their prejudice.
Along most of this coast, the Europeans have been hesitant to go ashore among the locals, as they are quite brutal and uncivilized, as many have learned the hard way. In the few places I've been on land myself, I could never get a clear account from the locals about the inland areas. I also never met a white person who had been or dared to venture further into the country; I believe that if anyone had tried, the locals would have killed them out of fear that they intended to exploit their land.
However, the Trade on this part of the Coast, has been exceedingly improved within these 20 years past. It consists in Negroes, Elephants Teeth, and other Commodities; which the Natives freely bring on board our Ships, except when any Affront has been offered them; which, to the great Scandal both of English and French, has too often been done, namely by their forcibly carrying away the Traders, under some slight pretence of having received an Injury from them. And this has put a stop to the Trade of the particular place where it has happened for a long time; and innocent People, who have come there to trade in small Vessels, have suffered for their Countrymens Villany: Several in my time having been surprized by the Natives, and the People destroyed out of revenge.
However, trade in this part of the coast has improved significantly over the past 20 years. It includes items like enslaved people, elephant ivory, and other goods that the locals willingly bring on board our ships, except when they've been insulted. Sadly, both the English and the French have frequently caused this, particularly by forcibly capturing traders under flimsy excuses of having been wronged. This has halted trade in specific areas for a long time, and innocent individuals coming to trade in small boats have suffered because of their countrymen's wrongdoing. Several people in my time have been ambushed by the locals, and many have lost their lives out of revenge.
From the aforementioned River of Ancober to Acra, is about 50 Leagues. This part is commonly called the Gold-Coast, and thereon are many English and Dutch Factories, under each of which is a Negroe Town, protected by them. The Reader may reasonably suppose, that here we might have a perfect account of the Inland parts; but we can have no such thing. For the Policy of the Natives does not suffer white Men to go up any great way into the Country. Moreover, the Inland People are very jealous of those Negroes, who are under the Protection of the Factories; so that the account I have received from both when at peace (which has brought some of the former to the Sea side) has seemed so fabulous and contradictory, that it could not be depended upon; for the Negroes are very apt to impose on us. However, in this part called the Gold Coast, the Natives near the Sea side are much civilized, by their conversing with the Europeans, at their Settlements; and by going on board so many Ships to trade, as frequent this part of the Coast. Here we can venture on Shore amongst the Natives, without any hazard; for ’tis to be noted, a large part of the Gold Coast is not in Subjection to them.
From the River of Ancober to Acra, it's about 50 leagues. This area is commonly referred to as the Gold Coast, where many English and Dutch trading posts exist, each with a Negroe Town that they protect. You might expect to find a complete account of the inland regions here, but that's not the case. The local policy prevents white people from venturing too far into the country. Additionally, the inland populations are very protective of the Negroes under the protection of the trading posts, so the information I've gotten from both groups during peaceful times (which has led some of the former to the coast) has seemed so unbelievable and inconsistent that it can't be relied upon; the Negroes tend to deceive us. However, along this part known as the Gold Coast, the locals near the coast have become quite civilized through their interactions with Europeans at their settlements and by visiting many ships that come to trade in this area. Here, we can safely go ashore among the locals without risk, as a significant portion of the Gold Coast is not under their control.
From Acra (where stands the last of the European Settlements, on this part of the Coast,) to Jaqueen, is about 60 Leagues. In this Tract there are no Factories but at two places, namely at Whidaw, and Jaqueen. And tho’ they have been so long settled by the Europeans, yet till the late Conquest of them by the King of Dahomè, we could learn but little of the Inland parts; no white Men having been permitted to go beyond the Kingdom of Ardra, which is about 50 Miles from the Sea side. But, as I have related in the following Sheets what I saw and heard when I was there; so I omit farther mention of it here.
From Acra (where the last of the European Settlements stands along this part of the coast) to Jaqueen is about 60 leagues. In this area, there are factories only in two places: Whidaw and Jaqueen. Even though they have been established by the Europeans for a long time, we couldn't learn much about the inland regions until the recent conquest by the King of Dahomè, as no white people were allowed to go beyond the Kingdom of Ardra, which is about 50 miles from the coast. However, as I have described in the following sheets what I saw and heard during my time there, I won't go into further detail here.
From Jaqueen to the Bay of Bennin, and so round to the Callabars, Camerones, and Cape Lopez, is above 300 Leagues, in which long Tract there is no Settlement of any European Nation; so of course the Natives are for the most part barbarous and uncivilized. I have, in my younger years, traded to many places in this Tract, especially at Old Callabar, where, in the year 1704, I saw a sad Instance of Barbarity. The King of the place, called Jabrue, being fallen sick, he caused, by the advice of his Priests, a young Child about ten Months old, to be sacrificed to his God, for his recovery. I saw the Child after it was killed, hung up on the Bough of a Tree, with a live Cock tied near it, as an addition to the Ceremony.
From Jaqueen to the Bay of Bennin, and then around to the Callabars, Camerones, and Cape Lopez, there are over 300 leagues, and in that entire stretch, there is no settlement from any European nation. As a result, the locals are mostly uncivilized and primitive. In my younger years, I traded in many places in this area, especially at Old Callabar, where in 1704, I witnessed a tragic act of brutality. The local king, named Jabrue, fell ill and, upon the advice of his priests, ordered the sacrifice of a young child about ten months old to his god in hopes of recovery. I saw the child after it was killed, hanging from the branch of a tree, with a live rooster tied next to it as part of the ceremony.
The last Voyage I went to this place, was in the year 1713, when I commanded the Ship Anne, belonging to Messieurs Bradley, Virginia Merchants; where I had the good fortune to save a Child from being Sacrificed, as the other poor Infant had been. And tho’ ’tis a long story, and therefore may not so well suit an Introduction, yet on account of the singular Circumstances wherewith it was attended, I believe the Reader may be pleased with it.
The last trip I took to this place was in 1713, when I was in charge of the ship Anne, owned by Messieurs Bradley, Virginia merchants. I had the good fortune to save a child from being sacrificed, just like the other poor infant had been. And even though it's a long story and may not fit well in an introduction, I think the reader will find it interesting because of the unique circumstances surrounding it.
The chief King, or Lord of the Country (for there are several petty Princes on that River) called Acqua, came on board, sometime after my arrival, to see the Ship, and hear our Musick. Being highly pleased with his Entertainment, he kindly invited me on Shore; so I promised to wait on him in a few days. Accordingly I went; but as I knew his People to be fierce brutish Cannibals, I took, by way of precaution, ten of my Sailors as a Guard, with my Gunner to command them. They were all well armed with Musquets and Pistols, which those savage People I knew were much afraid of.
The main king, or lord of the country (since there are several smaller princes along that river) named Acqua, came on board sometime after I arrived to check out the ship and listen to our music. He was really impressed with the entertainment and graciously invited me ashore. I promised to visit him in a few days. So, I went, but knowing his people were fierce and brutish cannibals, I took ten of my sailors as a guard, led by my gunner. They were all well-armed with muskets and pistols, which I knew those savage people were quite afraid of.
Upon my landing at the Water side, I was received by some persons, whom the King had appointed to conduct me about a quarter of a mile up, where I found him sitting on a Stool, under some shady Trees; another being placed by his side, which I was desired to sit on. The King did not speak one word, or moved in the least, till I was sat down; but then he bid me welcome, enquiring after my health; as I did after his, having first paid my respects to him, by bowing and taking off my Hat. There were many of his Courtiers present, and I observed above 50 of his Guard, stood at a little distance. They were armed with Bows and Arrows, a Sword by their side, and a barbed Lance in their Hands. My people ranged themselves opposite to them, at the distance of about twenty paces.
Upon my arrival at the waterfront, I was met by some people the King had designated to guide me about a quarter of a mile up, where I found him sitting on a stool beneath some shady trees. Another stool was placed next to him, which I was asked to sit on. The King didn’t say a word or move at all until I was seated; then he welcomed me and asked about my health, just as I inquired about his after first paying my respects by bowing and removing my hat. Many of his courtiers were present, and I noticed over 50 of his guards standing a little distance away. They were armed with bows and arrows, a sword at their side, and a barbed lance in their hands. My people positioned themselves opposite to them, about twenty paces away.
After having presented the King with some things, which, tho’ trifling to us, he seemed highly delighted with; accidentally turning my Head about, I saw a little Negroe-Child tied by the Leg to a Stake driven in the Ground, the flies and other vermin crawling on him, and two Priests standing by. Being surprized at this sight, I asked the King, “What was the reason of the Child’s being tied in that manner?” He replied, “It was to be sacrificed that night to his God Egbo, for his prosperity.” Moved at the hearing of this, I called (too hastily I must own) to one of my People, to take the Child from the Ground, in order to preserve him. He had no sooner done it, but one of the King’s Guard advanced towards him, in a threatning posture with his Lance; and fearing he would run him through, I immediately took out of my Pocket a small Pistol; at the sight of which, the King rose from his Stool in a fright. But I bid the Linguist tell him, “I would offer no Injury to him or his, provided he ordered his Guard not to attack mine:” Which he readily doing, and all things being quiet, I expostulated with him, “for his breaking the Laws of Hospitality, in permitting one of his Guard to threaten my Man with his Lance.” To this the King replied, “I had not done well in ordering him to seize the Child, it being his Property.” This I acknowledged, “excusing it on the account of my Religion, which, tho’ it does not allow of forcibly taking away what belongs to another, yet expresly forbids so horrid a Thing, as the putting a poor innocent Child to death. And that this would, instead of Blessings, certainly bring on him the Wrath of the most high God, whom we white Men adored.” I also observed to him, “That the grand Law of human Nature was, To do to others as we desir’d to be done unto;” and many other Arguments I used, too long to repeat here. At the same time I offered to pay him for the Child, which the King readily accepted: And on my asking, what he desired for it? to my surprize he only asked a bunch of sky coloured Beads, worth about half a Crown Sterling. I expected he would have demanded at least ten times that Value; for the Negroes, from the King to the Trader, are generally very ready, on any extraordinary occasion, to make their Advantage of us.
After presenting the King with a few items that seemed trivial to us but delighted him, I turned my head and noticed a little Black child tied by the leg to a stake in the ground, with flies and other bugs crawling on him, while two priests stood nearby. Surprised by this sight, I asked the King, “Why is the child tied like that?” He replied, “It’s to be sacrificed tonight to his God Egbo, for his prosperity.” Hearing this moved me, and I quickly called to one of my people to lift the child off the ground to save him. No sooner had he done it than one of the King’s guards approached him, threateningly brandishing his lance. Fearing he would stab him, I pulled out a small pistol from my pocket, which made the King jump up in shock. I told the interpreter to let him know, “I don’t want to harm him or his people, as long as he tells his guard not to attack mine.” He agreed to this, and with everything calming down, I confronted the King, “You are breaking the laws of hospitality by allowing one of your guards to threaten my man with his lance.” The King responded, “You shouldn’t have ordered him to take the child; it belongs to him.” I admitted this, explaining, “I did it because of my religion, which, although it doesn’t allow taking what belongs to someone else, explicitly forbids such a horrible act as putting an innocent child to death. This will surely bring the wrath of the Almighty God, whom we white men worship.” I also pointed out to him, “The fundamental law of human nature is to treat others as we wish to be treated,” and used many other arguments that are too lengthy to repeat here. At the same time, I offered to pay him for the child, which the King readily accepted. When I asked what he wanted for it, to my surprise, he only asked for a bunch of sky-colored beads worth about half a crown. I expected him to demand at least ten times that amount, as people in his position usually take advantage of us in extraordinary situations.
After this was over, I staid about an hour with the King, treating him with European Liquors and Victuals, which I had carried on Shore for that purpose; but I took care not to drink any of his Palm Wine, (which is a Liquor drawn from a Tree, and which they can artfully poison) under pretence, it did not agree with me. But my People did not spare it, drinking plentifully of it with his Guards; and eating likewise heartily of their Victuals.
After this was over, I stayed for about an hour with the King, serving him some European drinks and food that I had brought ashore for that purpose; but I made sure not to drink any of his palm wine (which is a drink made from a tree, and can be secretly poisoned) under the excuse that it didn’t sit well with me. However, my people didn’t hold back, drinking plenty of it with his guards and also enjoying their food.
After this I took my leave, and the King expressed himself well pleased with my Visit; promising to come on board again, before I went out of the River.
After that, I said my goodbyes, and the King expressed that he was very happy with my visit; he promised to come on board again before I left the River.
As we were returning in our Boat, I told the Gunner, “That when we came on board, he should pitch on some motherly Woman, to take care of this poor Child.” To which he answered, “He had already one in his Eye.”
As we were heading back in our boat, I told the gunner, “When we get onboard, you should find a caring woman to look after this poor child.” He replied, “I already have someone in mind.”
It happened, the day before I went on Shore to see the King, I had purchased the Mother of the Child (tho’ I knew it not then) from one of his People; and at that time my Surgeon observing to me, she had much Milk in her Breasts, I enquired of the Person that brought her on board, whether she had a Child when he bought her from the Inland Trader? To which he answered in the negative.
It happened that the day before I went ashore to see the King, I had bought the mother of the child (though I didn't know it at the time) from one of his people. At that moment, my surgeon pointed out to me that she had a lot of milk in her breasts. I asked the person who brought her on board if she had a child when he purchased her from the inland trader. He answered no.
But now on my coming on board, no sooner was the Child handed into the Ship, but this poor Woman espying it, run with great eagerness, and snatched him out of the white Man’s Arms that held him. I think there never was a more moving sight than on this occasion, between the Mother and her little Son, (who was a fine Boy about 18 Months old; for ’tis to be noted, the Negroe-Women generally suckle their Children till they are above two years old) especially when the Linguist told her, “I had saved her Child from being sacrificed.” Having at that time above 300 Negroes on board my Ship, no sooner was the Story known amongst them, but they expressed their Thankfulness to me, by clapping their Hands, and singing a Song in my praise. This affair proved of great service to us, for it gave them a good Notion of white Men; so that we had no Mutiny in our Ship, during the whole Voyage.
But now that I was back on board, as soon as the Child was handed onto the Ship, this poor Woman, noticing him, rushed over eagerly and snatched him out of the white Man’s arms that held him. I don’t think there’s ever been a more touching sight than this moment between the Mother and her little Son (who was a fine Boy about 18 months old; it’s worth noting that Black women generally nurse their Children until they are over two years old), especially when the Linguist told her, “I had saved her Child from being sacrificed.” At that time, with over 300 Black people on board my Ship, as soon as the news spread among them, they expressed their gratitude towards me by clapping their hands and singing a Song in my honor. This incident turned out to be very beneficial for us, as it gave them a positive impression of white Men, ensuring we experienced no Mutiny on our Ship during the entire Voyage.
I went from the River of Old Callebar, to the Island of Antegoa, where our Cargoe was sold; and upon my telling one Mr. Studeley this remarkable story, he bought the Mother and her Son, and was a kind Master to them.
I traveled from the River of Old Callebar to the Island of Antegoa, where our cargo was sold. When I shared this incredible story with a Mr. Studeley, he purchased the Mother and her Son and treated them well.
I could give a farther account of some more extraordinary things, that have happened in the many Voyages I have made to this Coast; but am afraid of being tedious to the Reader: So I shall conclude with observing, that Mynheer Bosman’s Account of the Coast of Guinea, is the most perfect History we have of that Country; and do readily confess, that whatever he mentions, as far as my Observations have reach’d, I have found to be true. To this Book therefore I refer the Reader, who is curious to know, the Manners, Customs, Trade, &c. of the Negroes along the Sea-Coast.
I could share a more detailed account of some of the more extraordinary things that have happened during my many voyages to this coast, but I worry about being tedious for the reader. So, I'll wrap up by noting that Mynheer Bosman’s Account of the Coast of Guinea is the best history we have of that country; and I readily admit that everything he mentions, as far as my observations go, I've found to be accurate. Therefore, I recommend this book to the reader who wants to learn about the manners, customs, trade, and so on of the Negroes along the sea coast.

ERRATA.
Page 67. Line 1. for eight read eighty. p. 71. l. 6. Jaqueens r. Dahomes. p. 123. l. 14. and in other places, Testesole r. Testefole. p. 190. l. 4. to r. from. p. 221. l. 23. at r. in. Ibid. l. 24. in r. at. 230. l. 15. just on Cocklyn’s Anchor, r. just heaving up their Anchor.
Page 67. Line 1. for eight read eighty. p. 71. l. 6. Jaqueens r. Dahomes. p. 123. l. 14. and in other places, Testesole r. Testefole. p. 190. l. 4. to r. from. p. 221. l. 23. at r. in. Ibid. l. 24. in r. at. 230. l. 15. just on Cocklyn’s Anchor, r. just heaving up their Anchor.
A NEW
ACCOUNT
OF
GUINEA,
And the Slave-Trade.
A NEW
ACCOUNT
OF
GUINEA,
And the Slave Trade.

BOOKI.
Containing an Account of the Destruction of the Kingdom of Whidaw, or Fida; the Author’s Journey to the King of Dahomè’s Camp; with several other remarkable Particulars.
Containing an Account of the Destruction of the Kingdom of Whidaw, or Fida; the Author’s Journey to the King of Dahomè’s Camp; with several other remarkable Particulars.
The Reader then is to observe, That the Sea-coast of this Kingdom lies in 6 Degrees 40 Minutes North Latitude. Sabee, the chief Town of the Country, is situate about seven Miles from the Sea side. In this Town the King allowed the Europeans convenient Houses for their Factories; and by him we were protected in our Persons and Goods, and, when our Business was finish’d, were permitted to go away in Safety. The Road where Ships anchored, was a free Port for all European Nations trading to those Parts for Negroes. And this Trade was so very considerable, that it is computed, while it was in a flourishing State, there were above twenty thousand Negroes yearly exported from thence, and the neighbouring Places, by the English, French, Dutch, and Portuguese. As this was the principal Part of all the Guinea Coast for the Slave Trade, the frequent Intercourse that Nation had for many Years carried on with[3] the white People (a) had rendered them so civilized, that it was a Pleasure to deal with them.
The reader should note that the coastline of this kingdom is located at 6 degrees 40 minutes north latitude. Sabee, the main town of the area, is situated about seven miles from the seaside. In this town, the king provided the Europeans with suitable houses for their trading posts and protected us in our persons and property. When our business was complete, we were allowed to leave safely. The area where ships anchored was a free port for all European nations trading in those parts for slaves. This trade was significant; it’s estimated that at its peak, over twenty thousand slaves were exported annually from there and neighboring areas by the English, French, Dutch, and Portuguese. Since this was the key area of the Guinea Coast for the slave trade, the frequent interaction that this nation had maintained with the Europeans had made them so civilized that it was a pleasure to do business with them.
The greatest Inconvenience we were exposed to, was the Thievery of the common People, which it was hardly possible to guard intirely against; so bold and dextrous were they at it: Tho’ if taken in the Fact, they became our Slaves.
The biggest inconvenience we faced was the theft by ordinary people, which was nearly impossible to completely guard against; they were so bold and skilled at it. However, if they were caught in the act, they became our slaves.
The Custom of the Country allows Polygamy to an excessive degree; it being usual for a great Man to have some hundreds of Wives and Concubines, and meaner Men in proportion; whereby the Land was become so stock’d with People, that the whole Country appeared full of Towns and Villages: And being a very rich Soil, and well cultivated by the Inhabitants, it looked like an intire Garden. Trade having likewise flourished for a long time, had greatly enriched the People; which, with the Fertility of their Country, had unhappily made them so proud, effeminate, and luxurious, that[4] tho’ they could have brought at least one hundred thousand Men into the Field, yet so great were their Fears, that they were driven out of their principal City, by two hundred of their Enemies; and at last lost their whole Country, to a Nation they formerly had contemned. And tho’ this may appear to the Reader very incredible, yet it will sufficiently be illustrated by the following Account.
The Custom of the Country allows for excessive polygamy; it's common for a wealthy man to have hundreds of wives and concubines, and poorer men have a proportionate number as well. Because of this, the land became so populated that it was filled with towns and villages. The soil is very rich and well-cultivated by the inhabitants, making it look like a complete garden. Trade has also thrived for a long time, greatly enriching the people; this, combined with the fertility of the land, unfortunately made them so proud, soft, and extravagant that[4] even though they could have mustered at least one hundred thousand men for battle, their immense fears led them to be driven out of their main city by just two hundred of their enemies, ultimately causing them to lose their entire country to a nation they once looked down upon. While this may seem unbelievable to the reader, it will be clearly illustrated by the following account.
The King of Whidaw came to the Crown when about fourteen Years old, so that the Government was for many Years in the hands of the great Men of the Country; who liked it so well, that tho’ he was past thirty Years of Age when this Calamity happened, yet they had to this time sought all ways to keep him from a Knowledge of governing. This suited indeed with his Temper, for he was indolent and lascivious, having in his Court several thousands of Women, by whom he was served in all capacities; for no Men-servants were allowed to be there. Being thus soften’d by his Pleasures, he grew intirely negligent of his Affairs,[5] which at last produced such a Weakness in the Government, that it ended in its Ruin. For the great Men played the petty Tyrants, often falling out, and pursuing their particular Interests, without regarding the Good of their King or Country. By this means the common People were divided, and such Parties arose among them, as, added to their Fears, rendered them a Prey to their Neighbours; so that tho’ they were able to have repelled any Force which could have been brought against them by the neighbouring Countries, they rather chose to abandon the Land, than join heartily against the common Enemy; who brought at this time on them such a terrible Desolation by the Sword, Fire and Famine, as hardly ever befel any Country.
The King of Whidaw ascended to the throne when he was around fourteen years old, meaning that for many years, the government was run by the prominent figures of the country. They were so pleased with this arrangement that even though he was over thirty when this disaster struck, they had made every effort to keep him oblivious to the responsibilities of leadership. This suited his personality well, as he was lazy and indulgent, surrounded by thousands of women who catered to all his needs since no male servants were allowed. Becoming soft from his pleasures, he became entirely neglectful of his duties, which eventually led to such weakness in the government that it fell into ruin. The influential men acted like petty tyrants, frequently squabbling and pursuing their own interests, disregarding the welfare of their king or country. As a result, the common people were divided, and factions emerged among them. This, combined with their fears, left them vulnerable to their neighbors. Although they had the strength to fend off any invading force from nearby countries, they preferred to abandon their land rather than unite against a common enemy, who brought upon them such devastating destruction through sword, fire, and famine as hardly any country has ever faced. [5]
This common Enemy was the King of Dahomè, a far inland Prince, who for some Years past had rendered himself famous, by many Victories gained over his Neighbours. He sent an Ambassador to the King of Whidaw, requesting to have an open Traffick to the Sea side, and offering[6] to pay him his usual Customs on Negroes exported: which being refused, he from that time resolved to resent it, when Opportunity offered. This the King of Whidaw was so far from apprehending, that in an Audience I had of him, soon after the Ambassador’s Departure, he told me; if the King of Dahomè should offer to invade him, he would not use him when taken according to their Custom, that is, cut off his Head, but would keep him for a Slave to do the vilest Offices.
This common enemy was the King of Dahomè, an inland prince who had recently made a name for himself with many victories over his neighbors. He sent an ambassador to the King of Whidaw, asking for permission to trade openly on the coast and offering to pay the usual customs on Negroes exported. When this request was denied, he decided to take revenge when the opportunity arose. The King of Whidaw was so unaware of this threat that, in a meeting I had with him shortly after the ambassador's departure, he said that if the King of Dahomè tried to invade him, he wouldn't kill him as was customary; instead, he would keep him as a slave to perform the most degrading tasks.
And here ’tis necessary to make a short Digression concerning the King of Dahomè’s Conquests. Being a politick and couragious Prince, he had such Success against his Neighbours, in a few Years, that he conquered towards the Sea Coast, as far as the Kingdom of Ardra, which is the next inland Country adjoining to Whidaw; and then resolved to remain quiet for some time, in order to settle his Conquests. But an Accident soon called him again to Arms, for the King of Ardra having much injured his own Brother,[7] named Hussar; the latter sent privately to the King of Dahomè, and offered him a large Sum of Money to revenge him for the many Affronts he had receiv’d from the King his Brother. This the politick Prince soon listen’d to; and the King of Ardra having discovered the Matter, sent to the Whidaws, representing to them, it was their common Interest to oppose this Conqueror; but they most imprudently refused to lend him their Assistance. So being obliged to encounter alone the King of Dahomè, he met him with all the Forces he could raise, which was about fifty thousand Men of his own People, and after a three Days Engagement, his Army was totally defeated, and himself taken Prisoner. Soon after which he was beheaded in the Conqueror’s Presence according to the barbarous Custom of these black Princes.
And here it’s necessary to take a short break to discuss the King of Dahomè’s conquests. As a savvy and brave ruler, he had such success against his neighbors in just a few years that he expanded all the way to the coast, reaching the Kingdom of Ardra, which is the next inland country next to Whidaw. He then decided to take a break for a while to secure his gains. However, an incident soon brought him back to battle, as the King of Ardra had seriously wronged his own brother,[7] named Hussar. The brother secretly reached out to the King of Dahomè and offered him a large sum of money to take revenge for the many insults he had received from his brother. The shrewd prince quickly agreed. When the King of Ardra discovered this, he reached out to the Whidaws, arguing that it was in their best interest to oppose this conqueror. Unfortunately, they foolishly refused to help him. So, having to face the King of Dahomè alone, he confronted him with all the forces he could muster, which amounted to about fifty thousand of his own people. After three days of fighting, his army was completely defeated, and he was captured. Shortly after, he was executed in front of the conqueror, following the brutal customs of these African leaders.
There was at that time in the Country of Ardra a white Gentleman, named Bullfinch Lambe, who was detained Prisoner by the King on this occasion: Having been sent by the Governour of the[8] African Company’s Settlement at Jaqueen, on some Business to the King of Ardra, this Prince detained him, under pretence the Company owed him for one hundred Slaves, formerly sent down to their Factory; and he sent word to the Governour, if he did not forthwith pay him this Debt, he would make Mr. Lambe a Slave. Which the Governour refusing to do, he remained a Prisoner about two Years, being used very hardly ’till he was taken in this War by the King of Dahomè: Being brought into the King’s Presence (who had never before seen a white Man) he was treated very kindly by his Majesty, and had, in a short time after, a Houshold appointed for him with many Servants, and the King bestowed on him some of his near Relations for Wives. Having remained with this Prince near three Years, he was at his own earnest Desire, dismiss’d with a noble Present of Gold and Slaves, in order to go for Europe: And his Majesty by a Messenger, to the Towns and Villages he passed through, in his way to Jaqueen on the Sea side, ordered the[9] Inhabitants to shew him all possible Respect, and provide nobly for his Entertainment.
At that time in the country of Ardra, there was a white gentleman named Bullfinch Lambe, who was held as a prisoner by the King for this reason: He had been sent by the governor of the [8] African Company’s settlement at Jaqueen on some business with the King of Ardra. This king detained him, claiming that the company owed him for one hundred slaves that had previously been sent to their factory. He sent word to the governor that if he didn’t pay this debt immediately, he would make Mr. Lambe a slave. The governor refused to pay, so Lambe remained a prisoner for about two years, enduring harsh treatment until he was captured in a war by the King of Dahomè. When he was brought into the presence of the king, who had never seen a white man before, he was treated very kindly by the king and soon had a household set up for him with many servants, and the king even gave him some of his close relatives as wives. After spending nearly three years with this prince, he was eventually released at his own strong request, being given a generous gift of gold and slaves to return to Europe. Additionally, the king sent a messenger to the towns and villages he passed through on his way to Jaqueen by the sea, ordering the inhabitants to show him the utmost respect and provide him with great hospitality.
After this Gentleman’s Departure, the King of Dahomè resolved to invade the Country of Whidaw; which, as I have been told, Mr. Lambe had dissuaded him from; representing the great number of the Inhabitants, who were much used to Fire-Arms. Moreover, that the white People resident and trading there, would no doubt assist them for their own Interest: So that there was no probability of Success. But this politick Prince finding by his Spies, how much the great Men and People were divided, and that the King was only a Cypher in the Government; he marched against them. The first part of the Country he invaded was the northernmost, of which a great Lord named Appragah was hereditary Governour, who forthwith sent to his King for Assistance: But through the Interest of his Enemies at Court, who wished his Destruction, he was refused: So having made a little Resistance, he submitted to[10] the King of Dahomè, who received him very kindly.
After this gentleman left, the King of Dahomè decided to invade the country of Whidaw; I’ve heard that Mr. Lambe tried to convince him not to by pointing out the large population, who were skilled with firearms. He also noted that the white residents and traders there would likely support them to protect their own interests, making success unlikely. However, this shrewd prince learned through his spies that the prominent leaders and people were deeply divided, and that the king held no real power in the government; so, he marched against them. The first part of the country he invaded was the northernmost area, ruled by a great lord named Appragah, who immediately sent for help from his king. But due to the influence of his enemies at court, who wanted him gone, he was denied assistance. After putting up a little resistance, he surrendered to the King of Dahomè, who treated him very kindly.
The Conquest of Appragah gave the King an easy Entrance into the Heart of the Country; but he was obliged to halt there by a river, which runs about half a Mile to the northward of the principal Town of the Whidaws, called Sabee, the Residence of their King. Here the King of Dahomè encamped for some time, not imagining he could have found so easy a Passage and Conquest as he met with afterwards. For the Pass of the River was of that Nature, it might have been defended against his whole Army, by five hundred resolute Men; but instead of guarding it, these cowardly luxurious People, thinking the fame of their numbers sufficient to deter the Dahomes from attempting it, kept no set Guard. They only went every Morning and Evening to the River side, to make Fetiche as they call it, that is, to offer Sacrifice to their principal God, which was a particular harmless Snake they adored, and prayed to on this occasion, to keep their Enemies from coming over the River.
The conquest of Appragah gave the King easy access to the heart of the country, but he had to pause at a river that runs about half a mile north of the main town of the Whidaws, called Sabee, which is the residence of their King. Here, the King of Dahomè camped for a while, not expecting to find such an easy route and conquest as he did later. The river crossing could have been defended by five hundred determined men against his entire army, but instead of guarding it, these cowardly, indulgent people, assuming their large numbers would discourage the Dahomes from trying, kept no regular watch. They only went to the riverbank each morning and evening to make Fetiche, which means to offer sacrifices to their main god, a harmless snake they worshiped, praying on this occasion for protection from their enemies crossing the river.
And, as worshiping a Snake may seem very extravagant to such as are unacquainted with the Religion of the Negroes, I shall inform the Reader of the Reasons given for it by the People of Whidaw. This sort of Snake is peculiar to their Country, being of a very singular Make; for they are very big in the middle, rounding on the Back like a Hog, but very small at the Head and Tail, which renders their Motion very slow. Their Colour is yellow and white, with brown Streaks; and so harmless, that if they are accidentally trode on (for it is a capital Crime to do it wilfully) and they bite, no bad Effect ensues; which is one Reason they give for their worshipping of them. Moreover, there is a constant Tradition amongst them, that whenever any Calamity threatens their Country, by imploring the Snake’s Assistance, they are always delivered from it. However this fell out formerly, it now stood them in no stead; neither were the Snakes themselves spared after the Conquest. For they being in great Numbers, and a kind of domestick[12] Animals, the Conquerors found many of them in the Houses, which they treated in this manner: They held them up by the middle, and spoke to them in this manner: If you are Gods, speak and save your selves: Which the poor Snakes not being able to do, the Dahomes cut their Heads off, ripped them open, broiled them on the Coals, and eat them. It is very strange, the Conquerors should so far contemn the Gods of this Country, since they are so barbarous and savage themselves, as to offer human Sacrifices whenever they gain a Victory over their Enemies; an Eye-Witness to which I was, as hereafter shall be related.
And while worshiping a Snake might seem really extravagant to those unfamiliar with the religion of the Negroes, I’ll explain the reasons given for it by the people of Whidaw. This type of Snake is unique to their country, having a very unusual shape; they’re quite large in the middle, rounded on the back like a hog, but very small at both the head and tail, which makes them move very slowly. Their color is yellow and white, with brown stripes; they are so harmless that if someone accidentally steps on them (since it’s a serious crime to do it on purpose) and they bite, there are no bad effects. That’s one reason they say they worship them. Additionally, there’s a long-standing tradition among them that whenever a disaster threatens their country, by calling on the Snake’s help, they are always rescued from it. However, no matter how it happened in the past, it now doesn’t help them; nor were the Snakes themselves spared after the conquest. Since they were quite numerous and a sort of domestic[12] animals, the conquerors found many of them in the houses and treated them this way: They held them up by the middle and said, If you are Gods, speak and save yourselves: But the poor Snakes couldn’t do that, so the Dahomes cut off their heads, ripped them open, grilled them over the coals, and ate them. It’s very strange that the conquerors would so contemptuously dismiss the gods of this country when they are so barbaric and savage themselves as to offer human sacrifices whenever they defeat their enemies; I witnessed this myself, as I will relate later.
But to return to the King of Dahomè. He was so politick as to send to the Europeans, then residing at Whidaw, to assure them, if they stood neuter, and were not found in Arms they should receive no Damage in their Persons or Goods, in case he proved Conqueror; and that he would ease their Trade, and remove divers Impositions laid on it by the King of Whidaw: On the contrary, if they[13] appeared against him, they must expect his Resentment. But they were in a Dilemma; for tho’ the King of Whidaw did not desire otherwise, yet they would gladly have retired from Sabee to two mud-walled Forts, belonging to the English and French African Companies, which are within three Miles of the Sea side. However, finding it would have been resented by the King as a Discouragement to his People, they were obliged to remain in the Town, never suspecting the Inhabitants would have run away in the cowardly manner they did; or that they should share the Fate of War with them.
But let's get back to the King of Dahomè. He was clever enough to send a message to the Europeans living in Whidaw, assuring them that if they stayed neutral and didn’t take up arms, they wouldn’t suffer any harm to their persons or property if he won. He also promised to improve their trade and remove several taxes imposed by the King of Whidaw. However, if they decided to oppose him, they could expect his anger. The Europeans found themselves in a tough spot; although the King of Whidaw didn’t mean any harm, they would have preferred to move from Sabee to two mud-walled forts owned by the English and French African Companies, which were just three miles from the coast. Nevertheless, realizing it would be seen as disheartening to the King and his people, they felt they had to stay in the town, never expecting that the locals would flee in such a cowardly way or that they would have to face the consequences of war alongside them.
The Pass of the River being, as I have related above, wholly left to the Care of the Snakes, whom the Enemy little feared; and they having observed for several Days, that the Whidaws kept no set Guard there, it encouraged the King of Dahomè’s General to send two hundred of his Soldiers to ford the River: Which having done without Opposition, and being bold Fellows, they marched towards[14] the Town of Sabee, sounding their musical Instruments. This was about three a Clock in the Afternoon, and the Outguards of the Town were almost all asleep; but being roused by the Noise of the Enemy’s Musick and Shouts, they fled into the Town, reporting, that all the Dahomè Army was got over the River: Which soon reaching the King’s Ear, he immediately fled, with all his People, making no Resistance. I was informed by the white People, then in the English and French Forts, that about five a Clock the same Afternoon, they saw such Numbers of People flying from all Parts of the Country towards the Sea side, that it was very surprizing: For the Fields were covered with them many Miles round, and their black Colour made them the more conspicuous in a clear sunshiny Day, on a fine flat champaign Country. The King, with a great number of his Subjects fled to an Island on the Sea Coast, which was parted from the main Land by a River, having ferried over in Canoes; but a great many that could not have the same[15] Benefit, being hurried on by their Fears, were drowned in the Rivers, in attempting to swim to the Islands lying near Popoe; which was the next neighbouring Country to their own, on the Sea Coast to the Westward; and where they might have been secure from their Enemies, had they escaped. Moreover, many thousands of these poor People that sheltered themselves up and down the Country among the Bushes, perished afterwards by Sword and Famine.
The River Pass was, as I mentioned earlier, completely under the control of the Snakes, who weren’t taken seriously by the enemy. They noticed after several days that the Whidaws weren't keeping a steady watch there, which emboldened the King of Dahomè’s General to send two hundred of his soldiers to cross the river. They did so without any opposition, and being quite daring, they marched towards[14] the Town of Sabee, playing their musical instruments. This was around three in the afternoon, and most of the town’s guards were almost asleep. But when they were startled awake by the enemy’s music and shouting, they fled into the town, claiming that the entire Dahomè army had crossed the river. Once this news reached the King, he immediately fled with all his people, offering no resistance. The white individuals in the English and French forts informed me that around five that same afternoon, they witnessed thousands of people fleeing from all parts of the country towards the seaside, which was astonishing. The fields were filled with them for miles around, and their dark skin made them stand out even more on a bright, sunny day in the beautiful flat countryside. The King, along with many of his subjects, escaped to an island along the coast, separated from the mainland by a river, using canoes to cross. However, many others who couldn’t access the same[15] safety, driven by fear, drowned in the rivers while trying to swim to the nearby islands close to Popoe; this was the nearest country to their own on the western seaside where they might have found safety from their enemies if they had managed to escape. Furthermore, many thousands of these unfortunate people who sought refuge scattered throughout the countryside in the bushes later perished from swords and starvation.
But now to return to the Dahomè Soldiers: When they first came to Sabee, it seems they marched directly to the King’s Court, where not finding him, they set it on Fire; and then sent their General word of what had happened, who brought the whole Army over the River that Evening. He was in such a Surprize at his good Fortune, that he could hardly believe what he saw; and the white Gentlemen were as much amazed, to see the great Cowardice of these People, who had vapoured so highly, and as ignominiously quitted, the Town without opposing[16] their Enemies in the least, leaving them intirely in the Power of the Conquerors, with all their own Riches. Mr. Duport, who was then the African Company’s Governour, told me, that when the Dahomè Soldiers, who had never seen white Men before, came to his House, they stood in amaze, and would not venture near him, till he beckon’d and held out his Hand to them. Whereupon they laid hold on him, and finding him a Man like themselves in all Respects, except Colour, soon laid aside their Reverence; and taking from him what he had valuable in his Pockets, made him Prisoner, with about forty other white Men, English, French, Dutch and Portuguese, who were served in the same manner. Amongst them was Jeremiah Tinker Esq; who had just before resigned the African Company’s Affairs to Mr. Duport, and designed, if this Accident had not prevented him, to have embarked in a few Days for England. But Segnor Pereira the Portuguese Governour, had the good Fortune to escape from Sabee, to the French Fort. He told me,[17] he was in great fear of being smothered in the Press of the flying People, whom he could hardly keep off with his Dagger, from the Hammock he was carried in on Mens Shoulders. The Day after the taking of the Town of Sabee, the white Men taken Prisoners, were sent into the Country to the King of Dahomè, who lay then encamped with another Army, about forty Miles off in the Kingdom of Ardra; some Hammocks being provided for the principal white People amongst them, which is the usual way of travelling in this Country for Gentlemen either white or black.
But now, back to the Dahomè Soldiers: When they first arrived in Sabee, they marched straight to the King’s Court. Not finding him there, they set it on fire and then informed their General of what happened. He brought the whole Army across the river that evening. He was so surprised by his good fortune that he could hardly believe what he was seeing. The white gentlemen were equally shocked to witness the cowardice of these people, who had boasted so much but had run away from the town without even putting up a fight, leaving their enemies completely in control with all their wealth. Mr. Duport, who was then the African Company’s Governor, told me that when the Dahomè Soldiers, who had never seen white men before, came to his house, they were amazed and wouldn’t approach him until he beckoned and extended his hand. Then they took hold of him, and realizing he was just like them in every way except for his color, they quickly dropped their reverence. They took everything valuable from his pockets and made him a prisoner, along with about forty other white men—English, French, Dutch, and Portuguese—who were treated the same way. Among them was Jeremiah Tinker, Esq., who had just handed over the African Company’s affairs to Mr. Duport and was planning to leave for England in a few days if this incident hadn’t happened. However, Segnor Pereira, the Portuguese Governor, managed to escape from Sabee to the French Fort. He told me he was very afraid of being overwhelmed in the chaos of the fleeing crowd, which he could hardly keep off with his dagger while being carried on a hammock by men. The day after the town of Sabee was captured, the white men taken prisoner were sent into the countryside to the King of Dahomè, who was then camped with another army about forty miles away in the Kingdom of Ardra. Some hammocks were provided for the main white people among them, which is the usual way for gentlemen to travel in this country, whether white or black.[a id="Page_16">
Mr. Duport further told me, that as soon as they came into the Camp, they were separated according to their Nations, being delivered to, and put under the Care of, several principal black Gentlemen. At first they were badly accommodated; for it was some Days before he could obtain an Audience of the King; which when he did, he greatly complained of the Usage he had met with in all Respects. On this his Majesty said,[18] “He was very sorry for what had happen’d, for he had given Orders to his Captains, in case they met with Success, to use the white Men well; but he hoped they would excuse what had befallen them, which was to be attributed to the Fate of War: Confessing, he was much surprized when he was first informed, so many white People were made Prisoners, and soon after brought to his Camp. That in the Confusion of Things he had not regarded them so much as he ought; but for the future, they should have better Treatment.” Which accordingly they found; but could never recover any thing taken from them, that being put on the score of the Fate of War. However, a few Days after, they were set at Liberty without any Ransom, and sent down to the English and French Forts. The principal Gentlemen amongst them were presented with Slaves, and his Majesty assured them, as soon as he had settled his Conquest, he would make Trade flourish, and have a particular Regard to their Interests.
Mr. Duport further told me that as soon as they arrived at the camp, they were separated by their nations and assigned to various principal black gentlemen for care. At first, their accommodations were poor; it took him several days before he could see the king. When he finally did, he complained a lot about how they had been treated. In response, His Majesty said, [18] “He was very sorry for what had happened because he had instructed his captains to treat the white men well if they were successful. But he hoped they would understand that what had happened was a result of the fate of war. He admitted he was surprised when he first heard that so many white people had been captured and soon brought to his camp. In the chaos, he hadn’t paid them as much attention as he should have, but moving forward, they would be treated better.” And indeed, their treatment improved, but they could never get back anything taken from them, as that was considered part of the fate of war. However, a few days later, they were released without any ransom and sent to the English and French forts. The leading gentlemen among them were given slaves, and His Majesty assured them that once he secured his conquest, he would promote trade and pay special attention to their interests.
The latter end of March, in the Year 1726-7, I arrived with the Katharine Galley in the Road of Whidaw, where I landed, and went to the English Fort, which is about three Miles from the Sea side, and likewise to the French Fort near adjoining. The white People that had been taken Prisoners, being returned to those Places but a few Days before, gave me a full account of the great Calamity fallen on the Country, about three Weeks before my Arrival; which gave me much Concern, I having traded there several Voyages. It was a lamentable Story to hear, and a dismal Sight to see, the Desolation of so fine a Country, lately exceeding populous, now destroyed in such a manner by Fire and Sword. The Carnage of the Inhabitants was, above all, a most moving Spectacle, the Fields being strewed with their Bones. Moreover the Concern for the Interest of my Voyage affected me not a little. But knowing it highly necessary to keep up my Spirits in so hot a Country, I resolved (humbly relying on Providence) not to be wanting[20] in my Endeavours, for the Interest I had under my Care; and I met with far greater Success than any way I could have reasonably expected, considering the melancholy Prospect I had then of Affairs, which shall be related hereafter.
At the end of March in the year 1726-7, I arrived with the Katharine Galley in the harbor of Whidaw, where I disembarked and went to the English Fort, located about three miles from the coast, as well as to the nearby French Fort. The white people who had been taken prisoner and returned to these places just a few days before provided me with a detailed account of the great disaster that had struck the country about three weeks before my arrival, which deeply troubled me, as I had traded there several times. It was a heartbreaking tale to hear and a grim sight to see the devastation of what had once been such a thriving land, now devastated by fire and warfare. The slaughter of the inhabitants was particularly shocking, with the fields scattered with their bones. Additionally, I felt a strong concern for the success of my voyage. However, recognizing that it was crucial to maintain my spirits in such a harsh environment, I resolved, humbly trusting in Providence, to not neglect my efforts for the interests I was responsible for; and I experienced far greater success than I could have reasonably anticipated, given the bleak situation I was facing at that time, which I will recount later.
Having stayed three Days on Shore with the English and French, who, I found, were in as great a Doubt as my self how to act in their Affairs; I came to a Resolution to go for the Port or Road of Jaqueen, which lies about seven Leagues to the Eastward of Whidaw; and has about thirty Miles of Sea-Coast. This Place has always been the Sea Port to the Kingdom of Ardra, and tributary to it; having a hereditary Governour, who paid his Tribute in Loaves of Salt, there being great Quantities made here.
After spending three days on land with the English and French, who I found were just as uncertain as I was about how to handle their situation, I decided to head to the port or road of Jaqueen, which is located about seven leagues east of Whidaw and has around thirty miles of coastline. This place has always served as the seaport for the Kingdom of Ardra and is subject to its rule, having a hereditary governor who pays his tribute in loaves of salt, as there are large quantities produced here.
As soon as the King of Dahomè had conquered Ardra, the Lord of this Place sent his Submission, offering the usual Tribute he used to pay the conquered King; which was readily accepted. This shews the Policy of the King of Dahomè; for tho’ he had made a terrible Destruction[21] of the Inhabitants of the inland Countries he had conquered from Time to Time; yet he knew his Interest too well, to destroy the People of this Country in the same manner; for having now obtained his Desires, in gaining a free Passage to the Sea-Side, he judged the Jaqueens would be very useful to him, because they understood Trade, and now by their means, he should never want a supply of Arms and Gunpowder, to carry on his designed Conquests. Moreover these People had ever been Rivals to the Whidaws in Trade, and had an inveterate Hatred against them, because they had drawn almost the whole trade from the Jaqueens, to their own Country. For, the Pleasantness thereof, with the good Government in former Times, had induced the Europeans to carry on the far greater part of the Trade, at their principal Town of Sabee.
As soon as the King of Dahomè conquered Ardra, the local Lord submitted, offering the usual tribute he used to pay the defeated King, which was quickly accepted. This shows the strategy of the King of Dahomè; even though he had caused immense destruction among the inhabitants of the inland areas he had conquered over time, he understood his interests too well to treat the people of this region the same way. Now that he had achieved his goal of gaining access to the coast, he believed the Jaqueens would be very beneficial to him since they were knowledgeable about trade. With their help, he would always have a steady supply of arms and gunpowder to continue his planned conquests. Additionally, these people had long been rivals to the Whidaws in trade and harbored a deep-seated hatred toward them because the Whidaws had taken nearly all the trade from the Jaqueens to their own land. The attractiveness of the region, along with good governance in earlier times, had encouraged the Europeans to conduct the majority of the trade in their main town of Sabee.
It was on the third of April 1727, we anchored in the Road of Jaqueen; and soon after I sent on Shore my Surgeon, to the Lord of that Place, to settle an[22] Agreement with him, before I landed my self; for I had never been at this Place, and had a Hint given me not to trust him, before all the Particulars I demanded were agreed to by him; for he had formerly plaid base Tricks with some Europeans, who had not taken such a Precaution. In the Evening my Surgeon sent me a Letter, informing me, he had obtained all I desired; For the Performance of which the Lord of the Place had taken his Fetiche or Oath, in presence of a French and Dutch Gentleman: On this Assurance I landed the next Day, and went up to the Town of Jaqueen, which lies about three Miles from the Sea side, where I was received very kindly, the Promises and Agreement made with my Surgeon being renewed, and a House appointed me to keep Factory in.
It was on the third of April 1727 that we anchored in the harbor of Jaqueen; and shortly after, I sent my surgeon ashore to meet with the local lord to finalize an[22] agreement before I went ashore myself; as I had never been to this place, and I had been warned not to trust him until all the terms I asked for were agreed upon; he had previously played deceitful tricks on some Europeans who hadn’t taken such precautions. In the evening, my surgeon sent me a letter informing me that he had secured everything I wanted. For this, the local lord had taken his Fetiche or oath in front of a French and Dutch gentleman. Based on this assurance, I landed the next day and went to the town of Jaqueen, which is about three miles from the seaside. I was received very warmly, and the promises and agreement made with my surgeon were reaffirmed, with a house designated for me to establish a factory.
The next Day a Messenger came from the King of Dahomè, whose Name was Buttenoe. He spoke very good English, and told me, “His Majesty having heard there was an English Ship arrived in the Road of Whidaw, he had ordered him[23] to go there and invite the Captain to come up to his Camp; (which was about forty Miles directly within the Land in the Country of Ardra) but being told there I was gone for Jaqueen, he had followed me to make the King’s Desire known to me: Assuring me in his Majesty’s Name, I should be intirely safe in all Respects, and kindly used.”
The next day, a messenger arrived from the King of Dahomè, named Buttenoe. He spoke very good English and told me, “His Majesty has heard that an English ship has arrived in the harbor of Whidaw, and he has sent me[23] to invite the Captain to come to his camp, which is about forty miles inland in the country of Ardra. However, since I was told that I had gone to Jaqueen, I followed you to convey the King’s request: assuring you in his Majesty’s name that you would be completely safe and treated kindly.”
To this I answered, “I would consider his Majesty’s kind Invitation, and he should know my Resolution next Day.” But perceiving I had some Distrust in my Mind, he represented to me, “That if I did not go, it would highly offend the King; that he feared I should not be permitted to trade, besides other bad Consequences might follow.” This black Messenger, as mentioned above, spoke very good English, having learnt it when a Boy in the English Factory at Whidaw: He belonged to Mr. Lambe, and was with him at the time he was taken Prisoner by the King of Ardra. They both fell into the King of Dahomè’s Power, as related above,[24] where he learnt the Country Language; and in this respect I had as capable an Interpreter as I could desire. So, upon considering the matter, finding the Interest of my Voyage depended on my going to the Camp to wait on the King, I resolved to undertake it, tho’ the many Barbarities I had been told his People had been guilty of, gave me some Concern. However, soon after, I had further Encouragement, by others offering to accompany me. For a Dutch Captain’s Curiosity prompted him to it, whose Ship had been destroyed just before by the Portuguese: Moreover the Dutch chief Factor proposed to send one of his Writers with large Presents to the Conqueror; likewise the Lord of Jaqueen offered to send his own Brother, to pay his Duty, with great Presents to the King; not having done it before. So having prepared all Things for our Journey, which took us up three Days, we set out in the following manner.
To this I replied, “I will think about His Majesty’s kind invitation, and I will let him know my decision tomorrow.” But noticing my hesitation, he explained, “If you don’t go, it will greatly offend the King; I’m worried you won’t be allowed to trade, and other negative consequences might follow.” This messenger, as mentioned earlier, spoke very good English, having learned it as a boy at the English factory in Whidaw. He was with Mr. Lambe when he was captured by the King of Ardra. They both ended up in the hands of the King of Dahomè, as mentioned above,[24] where he picked up the local language; in this regard, I had as skilled an interpreter as I could wish for. So, after considering the situation and realizing that the success of my journey depended on my going to the camp to meet the King, I decided to go, even though the many brutalities I had heard about his people concerned me. However, shortly after, I received more encouragement when others offered to join me. A curious Dutch captain, whose ship had just been destroyed by the Portuguese, was among them. Additionally, the Dutch chief factor suggested sending one of his clerks with valuable gifts for the conqueror; furthermore, the Lord of Jaqueen offered to send his own brother to pay his respects, along with great gifts for the King, since he hadn’t done so before. So, after preparing everything for our journey, which took us three days, we set out in the following way.
The eighth of April, at nine a Clock in the Morning, being accompanied with the aforesaid Persons, we went to the Side[25] of the River that runs on the Back part of the Town of Jaqueen, having in our Retinue One hundred black Servants. We ferried over the River in Canoes, which are a sort of Boats, made of large Trees hollowed. The People of the Town attended us in great numbers to the water side, praying for our success: For they were under terrible apprehensions for our safety, amongst such barbarous People as we were going to: Especially they were highly concerned for the Duke, their Lord’s Brother, who was a Person endowed with the most amiable qualities I ever met with amongst Persons of his Colour.
On the eighth of April, at nine o'clock in the morning, I joined the mentioned people to head to the riverbank behind the town of Jaqueen, accompanied by a hundred black servants. We crossed the river in canoes, which are boats made from large, hollowed-out trees. A large crowd from the town gathered at the water’s edge, wishing us well, as they were very worried about our safety among the savage people we were about to encounter. They were especially anxious for the Duke, the Lord’s brother, who had the most charming qualities I've ever seen in someone of his background.
Being landed on the other side of the River, we set out on our Journey, the proper servants of each person attending in their several places. I had six Hammock-men, who relieved one another by turns; two at a time being only required to carry the Pole which it is fastened to. I had likewise a small Horse to ride on, when I was weary with lying in the Hammock. The other Gentlemen were[26] accommodated in the same manner. Our travelling was at the rate of about four miles an hour; for we made frequent Stops for our Baggage-carriers, there being no Carts nor good Horses at Jaqueen; the few Horses that are there being but little bigger than our Asses. The Country, as we travelled along, appeared beautiful and pleasant, and the Roads good; but desolated by the War, for we saw the remains of abundance of Towns and Villages, with a great quantity of the late Inhabitants bones strewed about the Fields.
After arriving on the other side of the river, we set off on our journey, with the appropriate servants for each person attending to their respective duties. I had six hammock carriers who took turns; only two at a time were needed to carry the pole that the hammock is attached to. I also had a small horse to ride on when I got tired of lying in the hammock. The other gentlemen were[26] accommodated in the same way. We traveled at about four miles per hour, making frequent stops for our baggage carriers since there were no carts or good horses at Jaqueen; the few horses there were only slightly larger than our donkeys. The country we passed through looked beautiful and pleasant, and the roads were good; however, they were devastated by the war, as we saw the remains of many towns and villages, with a large number of the recent inhabitants' bones scattered across the fields.
Noon time being past, we dined under some Cocoe-trees, on the cold Provision we carried with us; and in the Evening being come to a few sorry Hovels, we put up there for the night, and lay on the ground on mats, (the huts not being big enough to hang our hammocks up in) and the greatest part of our Attendants were obliged to lye in the open Air.
Noon had passed, so we had lunch under some coconut trees, eating the cold food we had brought with us. In the evening, we reached a few rundown huts, where we stayed for the night and slept on the ground on mats, since the huts weren’t big enough to hang our hammocks. Most of our crew had to sleep outside in the open air.
The next day about seven a clock in the morning, we set out again, and by nine came within half a mile of the King’s Camp. Here we halted, and[27] judge we had then travelled about forty miles from Jaqueen. Soon after a Messenger came from his Majesty to compliment and welcome us; and being told it was proper to prepare our selves, we took our best apparel out of our trunks, and dress’d our selves under the covert of an old wall; and soon after we advanced within a little way of the Camp, where we were desired to wait for a great Man who was to receive us. The King, it seems, to do us the more honour, sent the principal person of his Court (whom the Negroes distinguish’d to us by the Title of the Great Captain) to receive us; which he did in a very extraordinary manner. For he came in the midst of five hundred Soldiers, who had Fire-arms, drawn Swords, Shields, and Banners in their hands, using so many odd and ridiculous Ceremonies, (as they appeared to us) that at first we could not judge, whether they meant us well or ill: For the Great Captain, with some of his Officers, approached us, with their Swords drawn, flourishing them over our heads, then[28] pointing them to our Breasts, and skipping and jumping about us, like so many monkies, showing as many tricks and postures, as that animal generally does. At last, after some time spent in this manner, the Great Man settled into a sedate temper; Then he gave us his hand, welcoming us in the King’s Name, and drank to us in Palm Wine, which is a Juice drawn from the Palm-tree, which is very common in that Country. We returned the Compliment, drinking the King’s health both in Wine and Beer we had brought with us, which he seemed to be well pleased with: and all Ceremonies being ended, he desired us to go with him towards the Camp; and accordingly we proceeded, the Soldiers guarding us, and the musical Instruments making a dismal noise.
The next day, around seven in the morning, we set out again and by nine got within half a mile of the King’s Camp. We stopped here and estimate we had traveled about forty miles from Jaqueen. Soon after, a messenger came from his Majesty to greet and welcome us. When we were told it was appropriate to get ready, we took our best clothes out of our trunks and changed under the shelter of an old wall. Shortly after, we moved a little closer to the Camp, where we were asked to wait for an important person who was coming to meet us. The King, to honor us more, sent the top official of his Court (whom the Negroes identified to us as the Great Captain) to greet us, and he did so in a very unique way. He arrived in the middle of five hundred soldiers, armed with guns, drawn swords, shields, and banners, performing so many strange and silly ceremonies (as they seemed to us) that at first we couldn’t tell whether they meant us harm or well. The Great Captain, along with some of his officers, approached us with their swords drawn, swinging them over our heads, then pointing them at our chests, jumping around us like monkeys, showing as many tricks and poses as that animal usually does. After a while, the Great Man finally calmed down; then he extended his hand, welcomed us in the King’s name, and toasted us with Palm Wine, which is a juice from the palm tree that's very common in that country. We returned the gesture, toasting the King’s health with both the wine and beer we had brought, which he seemed to appreciate. Once all the ceremonies were over, he invited us to follow him toward the Camp; and so we proceeded, guarded by the soldiers, with the musical instruments making a loud racket.
In about half an hour’s time we arrived at the Camp, which was near a very great ruin’d Town, late the principal place of the Kingdom of Ardra. Here the Army lay in tents, which, according to the Negroe-Custom, were made of small Boughs[29] of Trees, and covered with Thatch, very much resembling Bee-hives, but each big enough to hold ten or twelve Soldiers, who crept in at a hole on one side, and lay heads and points together. Upon our entring the Camp, we were conducted to some large Trees, where Chairs, (taken from the Whidaws,) were brought for us to sit on, under the Shade of the Trees. Immediately such Numbers of People flock’d about us, that if the Officers had not ordered the Soldiers to keep the Multitude off, we should have been in danger of being smothered. For tho’ there had been forty white men taken at Whidaw, who were all brought up prisoners to this Camp, and afterwards released, as related above, yet thousands of people, who came since out of the far inland Countries, had never seen a white man before us.
In about half an hour, we arrived at the Camp, which was located near a very large ruined town that used to be the main city of the Kingdom of Ardra. The Army was set up in tents made of small branches from trees, following the local custom, and covered with thatch, resembling beehives. Each tent was big enough to hold ten or twelve soldiers, who entered through a hole on one side and lay down with their heads and feet together. When we entered the Camp, we were taken to some large trees, where chairs (borrowed from the Whidaws) were brought for us to sit in the shade. Immediately, so many people gathered around us that if the officers hadn’t ordered the soldiers to keep the multitude back, we might have been overwhelmed. Although there had been forty white men captured at Whidaw, who were brought here as prisoners and later released, countless people who had come from the distant inland regions had never seen a white person before us.
Having rested our selves about two hours, under the Shade of the Trees, and beheld divers Feats of Activity, performed by the Soldiers to divert us, we were conducted to a thatch’d House, that had[30] been prepared for us; and tho’ we were obliged to stoop at our going in at the Door, yet there was height enough within to hang our Hammocks up to sleep in, which was no little Satisfaction to us, for our Bones were hardly recovered, from the former night’s Lodging on the Ground. After we had stowed our Baggage in the Tent, the great Man took his leave of us, but left a Guard to prevent any of the People from disturbing us, and he went to the King to give his Majesty an Account of our Arrival.
After resting for about two hours in the shade of the trees and watching various activities performed by the soldiers to entertain us, we were taken to a thatched house that had been prepared for us; and although we had to bend down to get through the door, there was enough height inside for us to hang our hammocks to sleep in, which was quite satisfying since our bodies were barely recovered from the previous night's sleep on the ground. Once we had put away our baggage in the tent, the important man said goodbye to us but left a guard to keep anyone from disturbing us, and he went to inform the king about our arrival.
By this time Noon was come, so we set down to dinner on cold Ham and Fowls, which we had brought with us. Our Tent stood in the middle of a large Court palisadoed round. We were surprized, that no People came into the place to see us, they having crouded so much at first, on our coming into the Camp: But I was told the King having been inform’d how we were incommoded, had given strict Orders, no one, on pain of Death, should, without leave of the Captain of our Guard, come to see[31] us. This was pleasing news; for by this we found his Majesty was duly obeyed, and also had our safety at heart. But we were plagued with a Vermin that greatly annoyed us; and that was such an infinite number of Flies, that tho’ we had several Servants with Flappers, to keep them off our Victuals, yet it was hardly possible to put a bit of Meat into our Mouths, without some of those Vermin with it. These Flies, it seems, were bred by a great number of dead Mens Heads, which were piled on Stages, not far from our Tent, tho’ we did not know so much at that time.
By this time, it was noon, so we sat down for dinner with cold ham and chicken that we had brought with us. Our tent was set up in the middle of a large enclosed courtyard. We were surprised that no one came into the area to see us, as so many had crowded around when we first arrived at the camp. But I was informed that the King had been told about how we were being bothered and had given strict orders that no one, under threat of death, should come to see us without the permission of our guard captain. This was good news for us; it showed that His Majesty was being obeyed and that he cared about our safety. However, we were troubled by vermin that greatly annoyed us—an overwhelming number of flies. Even though we had several servants with fans to keep them off our food, it was almost impossible to eat without getting some of those pests on our plates. Apparently, these flies were coming from a large pile of dead men's heads that were stacked on platforms not far from our tent, though we didn't know this at the time.
After we had dined, a Messenger came to us, about three o’ clock in the afternoon, from the Great Captain, desiring us to go to the King’s Gate; accordingly we went, and in our way saw two large Stages, on which were heaped a great number of dead Men’s Heads, that afforded no pleasing sight or smell. Our Interpreter told us, they were the Heads of four thousand of the Whidaws, who had been sacrificed by the Dahomes to their[32] God, about three weeks before, as an Acknowledgment of the great Conquest they had obtain’d.
After we had eaten, a messenger came to us around three o'clock in the afternoon from the Great Captain, asking us to go to the King's Gate. So, we went, and on the way, we saw two large platforms piled high with a lot of dead men's heads, which was not a pleasant sight or smell. Our interpreter told us they were the heads of four thousand Whidaws, sacrificed by the Dahomes to their[32] god about three weeks earlier as a way to acknowledge the significant conquest they had achieved.
When we came to the King’s Gate, as they call’d it, we found it only an Entrance into a large Court, which was palisadoed round; there being several mud-wall’d Houses in it. Here we were desired to sit down on Stools brought to us; and an Officer presented us, in the King’s name, with Cows, Sheep, Goats, and other Provision; with this Compliment, that as his Majesty was then in a Camp, it was not in his power to provide for us better at this time. Having returned thanks for this unexpected favour, we went out of the Court, and were surprized with a sight, at the Gate, of forty stout Men ranked in file, with Fusees on their Shoulders, and broad Swords in their Hands; who had about their necks strings of dead Mens Teeth, reaching as low as their middle, both behind and before, in such Quantities, as might furnish all the Barber-Surgeons Shops in Europe. Being surprized at this extraordinary appearance,[33] I asked the Linguist, Why they were drest in this manner? To which he replied, They were the King’s Heroes, or Worthies, who had killed a great many People with their own hands, and were allowed, as a mark of their great Valour, to string and wear their Enemies Teeth about their Necks; and, I might observe, some of them had been more successful than others, by the different quantities they had on: For that it was made death by their Law, for any of those Gentlemen to string a Tooth, without first making due Proof, before the proper Officers, that it belonged to an Enemy slain with their own hand in Battle. Having viewed this strange Sight, I bid the Linguist tell them, “They appeared to be a Company of brave Gentlemen, and that I was their humble Servant.” This Compliment pleased them, and they returned it, saying, “They had a great Esteem for white Men.”
When we reached the King’s Gate, as they called it, we found it was just an entrance to a large courtyard, which was surrounded by wooden fencing. There were several mud-walled houses inside. We were asked to sit on stools that were brought to us, and an officer presented us, in the King’s name, with cows, sheep, goats, and other supplies, explaining that since His Majesty was currently in a camp, he couldn’t provide us with better at this time. After thanking them for this unexpected kindness, we left the courtyard and were surprised by a sight at the gate: forty strong men lined up, with guns on their shoulders and broad swords in their hands. They wore strings of dead men’s teeth around their necks, hanging down to their midsections, in such quantities that it could fill all the barber-surgeons' shops in Europe. Amazed by this unusual sight, [33] I asked the translator why they were dressed like that. He replied that they were the King’s Heroes or Worthies, who had killed many people with their own hands and were allowed, as a sign of their great bravery, to wear their enemies’ teeth around their necks; I noticed that some had been more successful than others, as indicated by the different amounts they wore. Their law stated that it was punishable by death for any of those men to wear a tooth without first proving to the proper authorities that it belonged to an enemy whom they had personally killed in battle. After taking in this strange sight, I told the translator to inform them, “You seem like a group of brave gentlemen, and I am your humble servant.” This compliment pleased them, and they replied, saying, “They had a great respect for white men.”
After this was pass’d, we returned to our Tent, and supped; then hung up our Hammocks, and lay in them till[34] Morning. I took notice, that the Lord of Jaqueen’s Brother, who came from thence with us, was entertained at the Tent of the Great Captain; and on my inquiring the reason, I was answered, It was in respect to us, that we might not be crouded in our Tent.
After this was over, we went back to our tent and had dinner; then we hung up our hammocks and rested in them until[34] morning. I noticed that the Lord of Jaqueen’s brother, who had come with us, was being entertained at the tent of the Great Captain; when I asked why, I was told it was to make sure we wouldn’t be crowded in our tent.
Next Morning, at nine a Clock, an Officer came from the King to acquaint us, we should have an Audience forthwith. Accordingly we prepared our selves; and then going to the King’s Gate, were soon after introduced into his Presence. His Majesty was in a large Court palisadoed round, sitting (contrary to the Custom of the Country) on a fine gilt Chair, which he had taken from the King of Whidaw. There were held over his Head, by Women, three large Umbrellas, to shade him from the Sun: And four other Women stood behind the Chair of State, with Fusils on their Shoulders. I observed, the Women were finely dress’d from the middle downward, (the Custom of the Country being not to cover the Body upward, of either Sex) moreover[35] they had on their Arms, many large Manelloes, or Rings of Gold of great Value, and round their Necks, and in their Hair, abundance of their Country Jewels, which are a sort of Beads of divers Colours, brought from a far inland Country, where they are dug out of the Earth, and in the same Esteem with the Negroes, as Diamonds amongst the Europeans.
Next morning, at nine o'clock, an officer came from the king to inform us that we would have an audience right away. So, we got ready and then went to the king's gate, where we were soon introduced to him. His Majesty was in a large courtyard surrounded by a fence, sitting (unlike the custom of the country) on a beautiful gilded chair, which he had taken from the king of Whidaw. Above his head, three large umbrellas were held by women to shade him from the sun, while four other women stood behind the throne with rifles on their shoulders. I noticed that the women were elegantly dressed from the waist down (since the custom of the country is not to cover the upper body for either sex). Additionally, they wore many large gold bangles and rings on their arms and had various country jewels, which are colorful beads sourced from a distant inland area where they are mined, highly valued by the Negroes, much like diamonds are prized among Europeans.
The King had a Gown on, flowered with Gold, which reached as low as his Ancles; an European embroidered Hat on his Head; with Sandals on his Feet. We being brought within ten Yards of the Chair of State, were desired to stand still: The King then ordered the Linguist to bid us welcome; on which we paid his Majesty the respect of our Hats, bowing our Heads at the same time very low, as the Interpreter directed us. Then I ordered the Linguist to acquaint the King, “That on his Majesty’s sending, to desire me to come up to his Camp, I forthwith resolved on the Journey; that I might have the pleasure of seeing[36] so great and good a King, as I heard he was; relying intirely on the Promises his Messenger had made me in his Majesty’s Name.” The King seemed well pleased with what I said, and assured us of his Protection and kind usage. Then Chairs being brought, we were desired to sit down, and the King drank our Healths; and then Liquor being brought us by his Order, we drank his Majesty’s. After this the Interpreter told us, “It was the King’s Desire we should stay some time with him, to see the Method of paying the Soldiers for Captives taken in War, and the Heads of the slain.”
The King was wearing a gold-embroidered gown that reached down to his ankles, along with a European-style hat on his head and sandals on his feet. We were brought within ten yards of the throne and asked to stand still. The King then instructed the translator to welcome us, after which we showed our respect by tipping our hats and bowing our heads low, as the interpreter directed. I then asked the translator to inform the King, “That when his Majesty sent for me to come to his camp, I immediately decided to make the journey; so I could have the pleasure of meeting such a great and good King, as I heard he was, fully trusting the promises his messenger made to me in his Majesty’s name.” The King seemed pleased with what I said and assured us of his protection and kindness. Soon after, chairs were brought in, and we were invited to sit down, while the King toasted to our health. After that, drinks were brought to us at his order, and we toasted to his Majesty's health. The interpreter then informed us, “It was the King’s wish that we stay for some time to observe the process of paying the soldiers for captives taken in battle and for the heads of the slain.”
It so happen’d, that in the Evening of the Day we came into the Camp, there were brought above eighteen hundred Captives, from a Country called Tuffoe, at the distance of six days Journey. The occasion of warring on them, the Linguist thus related, “That at the time his King was wholly employed in contriving the Destruction of the Whidaws, these People had presumed[37] to attack five hundred of his Soldiers, sent by his Majesty as a Guard to twelve of his Wives, who were going with a large quantity of Goods and fine things, carried by Slaves, to the Country of Dahomè. The Guard being routed, and the Women slain, the Tuffoes possess’d themselves of the Goods; for which Outrage, as soon as the Conquest of Whidaw was compleated, the King sent part of his Army against them, to revenge him for their Villany; in which they had all desirable Success.” It was necessary to mention this Affair, for the better understanding of what follows, it being so very remarkable.
It so happened that on the evening of the day we arrived at the camp, over eighteen hundred captives from a place called Tuffoe, located six days away, were brought in. The reason for the war against them, as explained by the linguist, was that while his king was heavily involved in planning the destruction of the Whidaws, these people had dared to attack five hundred of his soldiers, who had been sent by his Majesty to guard twelve of his wives. They were traveling with a large amount of goods and valuable items carried by slaves to the country of Dahomè. The guard was defeated, and the women were killed, allowing the Tuffoes to take the goods. For this outrage, as soon as the conquest of Whidaw was completed, the king sent part of his army against them to avenge the wrongdoing, which resulted in a desirable success for them. It’s important to mention this matter for a better understanding of what comes next, as it is quite remarkable.
The King, at the time we were present, ordered the Captives of Tuffoe to be brought into the Court: Which being accordingly done, he chose himself a great number out of them, to be sacrificed to his Fetiche or Guardian Angel; the others being kept for Slaves for his own use; or to be sold to the Europeans. There were proper Officers, who received the[38] Captives from the Soldiers hands, and paid them the Value of twenty Shillings Sterling for every Man, in Cowries, (which is a Shell brought from the East Indies, and carried in large quantities to Whidaw by the Europeans, being the current Money of all the neighbouring Countries far and near) and ten Shillings for a Woman, Boy, or Girl. There were likewise brought by the Soldiers some thousands of dead Peoples Heads into the Court; every Soldier, as he had Success, bringing in his hand one, two, three, or more Heads hanging in a String; and as the proper Officers received them, they paid the Soldiers five Shillings for each Head: Then several People carried them away, in order to be thrown on a great Heap of other Heads, that lay near the Camp; the Linguist telling us his Majesty designs to build a Monument with them, and the Heads of other Enemies formerly conquered and killed.
The King, while we were present, ordered the captives from Tuffoe to be brought into the court. Once they arrived, he selected a large number of them to be sacrificed to his Fetiche or Guardian Angel; the rest would be kept as slaves for his own use or sold to the Europeans. There were designated officials who received the captives from the soldiers and paid them twenty shillings sterling for each man in Cowries, which is a shell from the East Indies and traded in large quantities to Whidaw by the Europeans; this is the currency used in all neighboring countries far and near. They paid ten shillings for a woman, boy, or girl. The soldiers also brought in thousands of dead people's heads to the court; each soldier, as he succeeded in battle, brought in one, two, three, or more heads hanging from a string. As the officials received them, they paid the soldiers five shillings for each head. Then several people took them away to be thrown onto a huge pile of other heads nearby the camp; the linguist informed us that his Majesty plans to build a monument with these heads as well as those of other enemies previously conquered and killed.
I observed, there were a great many of the principal Men of the Court and Army present, all prostrated on the Ground;[39] none being permitted to go nearer, than within twenty foot of the King’s Chair; and whatsoever they had to say to his Majesty, first kissing the Ground, they whispered into the Ear of an old Woman, who went to the King; and having received his answer, she returned with it to them. His Majesty likewise showed his Liberality to his Courtiers and Officers, in presenting them with at least two hundred Captives. As soon as any person had a Slave presented to them, a proper Officer made Proclamation of it, which was immediately echoed by the Populace, who were waiting in great numbers at the King’s Gate for the Sacrifices.
I noticed that many of the top officials from the Court and Army were there, all lying flat on the ground; none were allowed to come closer than twenty feet from the King’s Chair. If they had something to say to his Majesty, they first kissed the ground and whispered it into the ear of an old woman, who then went to the King. After receiving his response, she returned to them. His Majesty also showed his generosity to his Courtiers and Officers by giving them at least two hundred captives. As soon as someone was given a slave, an official announced it, and the crowd, which had gathered in large numbers at the King’s Gate for the sacrifices, immediately echoed the proclamation.
After the Business of the Captives was dispatch’d, there came into the Court two Fellows, with a large Tub, that had in it at least six Gallons of Frumenty, or such like stuff, which they set on the Ground; and then falling on their Knees, they took with their Hands the Victuals out of the Tub, and threw it so fast into their Mouths, that tho’ there was such a[40] quantity of it, they dispatch’d it in a few Minutes. The Linguist told us, this was their daily Practice; but that these Gormandizers lived not many Years, and then others took up their Trade; which is only in order to divert the King.
After the business with the captives was taken care of, two guys came into the court with a large tub that held at least six gallons of frumenty, or something similar, which they set on the ground. Then, falling to their knees, they used their hands to scoop the food out of the tub and stuffed it into their mouths so quickly that even though there was a huge amount of it, they finished it in just a few minutes. The linguist told us this was their daily routine; however, these gluttons didn’t live long, and then others would take over their role, which was just to entertain the king.
After this we saw several other things, full as ridiculous as this, which would be tedious for me to relate, as well as to the Reader to peruse; so having been near three Hours in the Court, exposed to the great heat of the Sun, from which we had nothing but Umbrellas to defend us, we desired his Majesty’s Leave, to retire to our Tent, which was readily granted; accordingly we paid our Duty in a compliment to the King, and went away.
After this, we saw several other things just as ridiculous, which would be boring for me to explain and for the Reader to read; so, after being in the Court for almost three hours, exposed to the intense heat of the sun, with nothing but umbrellas to protect us, we asked the King for permission to go back to our tent, which was quickly granted. Consequently, we showed our respect with a compliment to the King and left.
Sometime after this, we sat down to Dinner in our Tent, being accompanied with a great number of Flies, as formerly mentioned. Just as we had dined, the Duke, Brother to the Lord of Jaqueen, came to us in so great a fright, that after he had sat down, he could not speak for some time: And tho’ he was at other[41] times, of a comely black colour, yet now his Countenance was changed to tawny: For as he was coming to our Tent, he saw a great number of poor People going to be sacrificed; whose Lamentations had made such an Impression, that it had occasioned this great disorder in him. For the People of the Sea-Coast abhor such things; especially the eating their Bodies afterwards, as the Dahomes do. And ’tis not to be imagined, what service the report of this did them, when they first invaded the Countries bordering on the Sea-Coast: On which I shall make a short Digression, to inform the Reader.
Sometime after this, we sat down for dinner in our tent, accompanied by a lot of flies, as mentioned earlier. Just as we finished eating, the Duke, brother of the Lord of Jaqueen, came to us in such a panic that after he sat down, he couldn't speak for a while. Although he usually had a nice dark complexion, now his face had turned a shade of brown. As he was approaching our tent, he saw a large number of poor people going to be sacrificed; their cries had made such an impression on him that it caused this great disturbance. The people from the coast detest such things, especially the act of eating their bodies afterwards, like the Dahomes do. It's hard to imagine how much the news of this affected them when they first invaded the coastal regions. I'll take a brief detour to explain this to the reader.
Discoursing afterwards with some of the principal People of Ardra and Whidaw, who had escaped the Conqueror’s Sword, and telling them, what a Reproach and Disgrace it was to the latter Nation to quit their Country to the Dahomes in so cowardly a manner as they had done; they answered, It was not possible to resist such Cannibals, the very Report of which had extremely intimidated their whole Nation. Whereupon[42] I observed to them, It was all one to a dead Carcase, whether it was eaten by their own kind, or by the Vultures, (of which there are great numbers in the Country) on which they shrugged up their Shoulders, saying, “The thoughts of being eaten by their own Species, were far more terrible to them, than the Apprehensions of being killed.”
Afterwards, I talked to some of the leading people of Ardra and Whidaw who had escaped the conqueror’s sword, and told them how shameful it was for their nation to abandon their land to the Dahomes in such a cowardly way. They replied that it was impossible to fight against such Cannibals; the very mention of them had deeply frightened their entire nation. Then, I remarked to them that it didn’t matter to a dead body whether it was eaten by its own kind or by vultures (of which there are many in the country). They shrugged their shoulders and said, “The thought of being eaten by our own kind is far more terrifying to us than the fear of being killed.”
But to return again to the Duke, I endeavoured to allay his Fears, by representing to him, we had the King’s Promise for our Safety; and that sacrificing their Enemies being the usual custom of the Country on any Conquest, he ought not to be so much surprized at it. But he replied, As to his own Safety he was very doubtful of it, the King not having yet admitted him to an Audience; so he requested he might remain in our Tent, as thinking himself safer with us, and accordingly we granted his request. Then sending for our Linguist, we desired to know, Whether the Dutch Captain and my self might be admitted to see the manner of the Sacrifices: (As for the Dutch Writer, he[43] chose to remain in the Tent with the Duke). The Interpreter answered, He would go to the chief Feticheer, or Priest, and know, whether he would be pleased to give us leave. Soon after he returned, and informed us, Leave was granted: So we went with him, about a quarter of a mile from the Camp. There we found great numbers of People gathered together; and our Guard made way for us through the Croud, till we came near four small Stages, which were erected about five foot from the ground. We stood close to them, and observed the Ceremony, which was performed in the following manner.
But to go back to the Duke, I tried to ease his fears by telling him we had the King’s promise for our safety and that sacrificing enemies was a common practice in the country after any conquest, so he shouldn’t be so surprised by it. He replied that he was very uncertain about his own safety since the King hadn’t given him an audience yet, so he asked if he could stay in our tent, thinking he would be safer with us. We agreed to his request. Then, we called for our linguist and asked if the Dutch captain and I could be allowed to witness the sacrifices (the Dutch writer chose to stay in the tent with the Duke). The interpreter said he would go to the chief feticheer or priest to see if we could get permission. Soon after, he returned and informed us that permission was granted. So we followed him about a quarter of a mile from the camp. There, we found a large crowd gathered, and our guard helped us through the throng until we reached four small stages raised about five feet off the ground. We stood close and watched the ceremony, which was performed as follows.
The first Victim we saw, was brought to the side of the Stage. It was a comely old Man, between fifty and sixty Years of Age. His hands were tied behind him; and in his behaviour, he showed a brave and undaunted Mind, nothing like Fear appearing in him. As he stood upright by the Stage, a Feticheer, or Priest, laid his Hand on his Head, saying some words of Consecration, which lasted[44] about two Minutes. Then he gave the sign of Execution, to a Man that stood behind the Victim with a broad Sword, who immediately struck him on the nape of the Neck, with such force, that the Head was severed at one Blow, from the Body; whereupon the Rabble gave a great Shout. The Head was cast on the Stage, and the Body, after having lain a little while on the Ground, that the Blood might drain from it, was carried away by Slaves, and thrown in a place adjoining to the Camp. The Linguist told us, the Head of the Victim was for the King; the Blood for the Fetiche, or God; and the Body for the common People. We saw many other Persons sacrificed in this lamentable manner, and observed, That the Men went to the side of the Stages, bold and unconcerned; but the Cries of the poor Women and Children were very moving, and much affected the Dutch Captain and My self, tho’ in a different manner: For he expressed his Fears to me, That the Priests might take it into their Heads, to serve us in the same manner,[45] if they should fancy white People would be more acceptable to their God, than persons of their own colour. This notion raised some fear in me, but recollecting my self, I told him, “As the King was so greatly reverenced and feared, I was in good hopes nothing would be attempted on us; and that we ought to put a good face on the matter, and withdraw from so terrible a Sight, the first opportunity.” Soon after, a principal Man of the Court came and stood by us, and bid the Interpreter ask us, “How we liked the Sight?” To which we replied, “Not at all: For our God had expressly forbid us using Mankind in so cruel a manner: That our Curiosity had drawn us to come and see it; which if we had not done, we could never have believed it.” Then I asked the Linguist, Whether this Gentleman was accounted a generous good humoured Man? To which the Linguist replying in the affirmative, I ventured to put this Question to him, “That if his Fate had brought him into the same[46] Misfortune, as these poor Captives were now in, how he should like it? He readily answered, Not at all. On this I observed to him, that the grand Law both of Whites and Blacks, with all their Fellow Creatures was: To do to others no otherwise, than as they desired to be done unto: And that our God had enjoined this to us on pain of very severe Punishments.” To which he answered, This was the Custom of his Country; and so he left us.
The first victim we saw was brought to the side of the stage. He was an attractive old man, probably between fifty and sixty years old. His hands were tied behind him, and he showed a brave and fearless attitude, with no sign of fear on his face. As he stood upright by the stage, a priest, referred to as a Feticheer, placed his hand on the man's head and said some words of consecration that lasted about two minutes. Then he signaled to a man standing behind the victim with a broad sword, who immediately struck him on the back of the neck with such power that the head was severed from the body in one blow, prompting the crowd to shout loudly. The head was thrown on the stage, and after the body had laid on the ground for a bit to let the blood drain out, it was taken away by slaves and tossed into a place near the camp. The interpreter informed us that the head was for the king, the blood for the Fetiche, or God, and the body for the common people. We witnessed many others sacrificed in this tragic way and noted that the men approached the side of the stage boldly and carelessly; however, the cries of the women and children were heartbreaking and deeply affected the Dutch captain and me, though in different ways. He expressed his fears to me that the priests might decide to treat us the same way if they thought white people would be more pleasing to their God than those of their own color. This idea frightened me a bit, but after gathering my thoughts, I told him, “Since the king is so greatly revered and feared, I’m hopeful nothing will be attempted against us; we should keep a brave face and leave this terrible sight as soon as we can.” Shortly after, an important man from the court came over and stood by us, asking the interpreter to inquire how we felt about the spectacle. We replied, “Not at all: Our God has expressly forbidden us from treating people so cruelly. Our curiosity brought us here to see it, and we could never have believed it if we hadn’t.” Then I asked the interpreter if this gentleman was seen as a generous and good-humored man. When the interpreter confirmed this, I took the chance to ask him, “If fate had put you in the same misfortune as these poor captives, how would you feel about it?” He quickly answered, “Not at all.” I pointed out to him that the fundamental law for both whites and blacks, along with all their fellow creatures, was: To do to others as they wish to be done unto: and that our God had commanded this under severe penalties. He responded that this was the custom of his country, and then he left us.
Presently after this Gentleman’s departure, there came to us a Colonel of the Army, whom we had seen at Jaqueen, the day before we set out on our Journey. This person seemed very friendly and glad to see us, and ready to resolve any Questions we put to him. Amongst the rest, I told him, “That I wondered they should sacrifice so many People, of whom they might otherwise make good advantage, by selling them.” He replied, “It had ever been the Custom of their Nation, after any Conquest, to offer to their God a certain number of[47] Captives, which were always chose out from among the Prisoners, by the King himself: For they firmly believed, should this be omitted, no more Success would attend them. And he argued for the Necessity and Usefulness of their doing it, from the large Conquests they had made within a few Years, without any Defeat.” Then I asked him, “Why so many old Men were sacrificed in particular? He answered, It was best to put them to death; for being grown wise by their Age and long Experience, if they were preserved, they would be ever plotting against their Masters, and so disturb the Country; for they never would be easy under Slavery, having been the chief Men in their own Land. Moreover, if they should be spared, no European would buy them, on account of their Age.” I then observed to him, That I had seen several and some young People sacrificed, whom was sure the Europeans would gladly have bought. He replied, “They were designed to attend in the other World the[48] King’s Wives, whom the Tuffoes their Countrymen had slain.” By which Answer I found they have a Notion of a future State, tho’ a very rude one. And this put me upon asking him, What Opinions they held concerning their God? To which he gave a very confused and imperfect Answer; so that all I could gather from his Discourse was, That they esteemed him as an invisible Guardian Angel, subordinate to another God; adding, “Perhaps that God might be ours, who had communicated so many extraordinary Things to white Men; as he had been informed by Mr. Lambe: But as that God had not been pleased to make himself known to them, they must be satisfied with this they worshipped.”
Right after this gentleman left, a Colonel from the Army came to see us. We had seen him at Jaqueen the day before we started our journey. He seemed very friendly and happy to see us, eager to answer any questions we had. I asked him why they sacrificed so many people, whom they could otherwise profit from by selling. He responded that it had always been their nation's custom to offer a certain number of captives to their God after any conquest. The King himself selected these captives because they firmly believed that if this ritual was skipped, they would not achieve further success. He argued for the necessity and benefit of this practice based on the significant conquests they had made in recent years without any defeats. I then asked him why so many old men were specifically sacrificed. He replied that it was better to put them to death because, having become wise from their age and experience, if they were allowed to live, they would always be plotting against their masters and disturb the country. They would never accept slavery, having been the leaders in their own land. Moreover, if they were spared, no European would buy them due to their age. I then noted that I had seen several young people sacrificed as well, who I was sure the Europeans would have gladly purchased. He replied that those young people were meant to serve in the afterlife the[48] King’s wives, who had been killed by the Tuffoes, their countrymen. From this answer, I realized they had a belief in a future state, although a very basic one. This led me to ask him what their beliefs were about their God. He gave a rather confused and incomplete answer, so all I could gather from his remarks was that they viewed Him as an invisible guardian angel, subordinate to another God. He added, “Maybe that God is ours, who has revealed so many extraordinary things to white men, as he learned from Mr. Lambe. But since that God has not chosen to reveal Himself to them, they must be satisfied with the one they worship.”
By this time the Mob being grown thin, on the side where we stood, I told the Linguist, we would return to our Tent; and I invited the Colonel to go along with us, which he readily promised. Accordingly our Guard having made way for us, we left this horrible Place and Sight,[49] not having received the least Affront, tho’ we were near two Hours by the Stages.
By this time, the crowd had thinned out on our side. I told the Linguist that we would head back to our tent, and I invited the Colonel to join us, which he quickly agreed to. So, our guard cleared a path for us, and we left that terrible place and scene, having not faced any disrespect, even though we had been there for almost two hours. [49]
At our return we understood, the King had sent the Duke word, he should have an Audience that Evening; whereupon I endeavoured to cheer him up by telling him, “That we had been civilly used at the Sacrifices, and that nothing could more conduce to his Reputation, than his appearing before the King, in his usual sprightly Carriage and Behaviour,” which was indeed natural to him. On this he went from us to the Great Captain’s Tent, in order to prepare himself to go to the Audience. But the Colonel remained with us, drinking merrily of European Liquors, and in the Evening he asked us, “Whether we would take a walk, and see that Quarter of the Camp where his Tent stood?” This we readily agreed to, and in our way past by the place where the sacrificed Bodies were thrown. There were two great heaps of them, consisting, as they said, of four hundred Persons, and who had been chose out by the King that very Morning.
Upon our return, we learned that the King had informed the Duke he would have an audience that evening. I tried to lift his spirits by saying, “We were treated courteously during the sacrifices, and nothing would enhance your reputation more than appearing before the King in your usual lively manner,” which was indeed his natural way. With that, he left us to head to the Great Captain’s tent to prepare for the audience. The Colonel stayed with us, cheerfully drinking European spirits, and in the evening he asked us, “Would you like to take a walk and see that part of the camp where my tent is?” We eagerly agreed, and on our way, we passed the spot where the sacrificed bodies had been thrown. There were two large piles of them, said to consist of four hundred people, chosen by the King that very morning.
After we had been at the Colonel’s Tent, where we were treated with Palm Wine, we returned to our own, being accompanied by him, and we desired him to stay to Supper. While we were eating, several Servants came with Dishes of Flesh and Fish, dress’d after the Country manner, and the Interpreter told us, they were sent by a Mulatto Portuguese Gentleman, who had been taken in the Ardra War. The King had ever since detained him Prisoner, allowing him a handsome Maintenance, and had given him a Wife much whiter than himself, who was born in the inland Country. Soon after the Victuals were brought, the Gentleman came himself, with his Wife, to see us; and after passing a handsome Compliment, they sat down to Supper with us. We were very glad of this new Acquaintance, the Dutch Writer speaking good Portuguese, and my self understanding a little; so that now we judged, we should not be obliged to trust intirely to our Linguist, this Person talking the Language of the Country fluently. I was[51] much surprized to see his Wife so white, equal to our English Women, only of not so lively a Colour. She had woolly Hair, like the blackest of the Natives, with the same Features. Her Husband told us, she was born in a far inland Country, of black Parents, who had never seen a white Man, nor she before Mr. Lambe; whom he enquired affectionately after, saying, “That when he returned, according to his Promise to the King, his Majesty had promised to grant him his Liberty.” Then, on his Importunity, we promised him a Visit at his House; and soon after, he and his Wife, with the Colonel, took their leaves, wishing us a good Night.
After we had been at the Colonel’s Tent, where we enjoyed some Palm Wine, we returned to our place, accompanied by him, and invited him to stay for dinner. While we were eating, several servants came in with dishes of meat and fish, prepared in the local style, and the Interpreter told us they were sent by a mixed-race Portuguese gentleman who had been captured in the Ardra War. The King had kept him as a prisoner since then, providing him with a decent living, and had given him a wife who was much lighter-skinned than he was, born in the interior of the country. Shortly after the food arrived, the gentleman himself came by with his wife to see us. After exchanging some polite greetings, they sat down to dinner with us. We were quite pleased to meet this new acquaintance, as the Dutch writer spoke good Portuguese, and I understood a bit, so we figured we wouldn’t have to rely completely on our interpreter, since this person was fluent in the local language. I was surprised to see that his wife was so white, comparable to our English women, though her complexion was not as vibrant. She had woolly hair, like the darkest of the locals, with similar features. Her husband told us she was born in a distant inland area to black parents, who had never seen a white man, nor had she before meeting Mr. Lambe; he asked affectionately about him, saying, “When I return, according to my promise to the King, his Majesty has promised to grant me my freedom.” Then, upon his insistence, we promised to visit him at his home, and shortly after, he and his wife, along with the Colonel, bid us farewell, wishing us a good night.
The next day, early in the morning, the Duke came to our Tent, and told us, he had, in the night past, a long Audience of the King, who treated him in a kind manner; so that his Apprehensions of being kill’d and eaten were quite vanished: but he told us with the utmost Horrour, that the sacrificed Bodies had been taken away in the night by the common People, who[52] had boiled and feasted on them, as holy Food. This Story induced us to send for our Linguist, and take a walk to the place where we had seen the Carcases the evening before; and, to our great Surprize, we found they were all gone. Thereupon asking the Interpreter, what was become of them? he replied smiling, the Vultures had eaten them up. I told him, “That was very extraordinary indeed, to swallow Bones and all;” there being nothing remaining on the Place, but a great quantity of Blood. So he confessed, the Feticheers, or Priests, had divided the Carcases amongst the People, who had eat them in the manner the Duke had told us. And tho’ no doubt this will appear incredible to many Persons, yet I desire they will only make this one Reflection, That those who could be so cruel as to sacrifice their fellow-Creatures, might probably carry their Barbarity a Degree further.
The next day, early in the morning, the Duke came to our tent and told us that he had a long meeting with the King the night before, who treated him kindly. So, his fears of being killed and eaten had completely disappeared. However, he told us with great horror that the bodies of those sacrificed had been taken away during the night by the common people, who had boiled and feasted on them as holy food. This story led us to call for our translator and walk to the spot where we had seen the carcasses the evening before, and to our surprise, we found they were all gone. When we asked the interpreter what had happened to them, he replied with a smile that the vultures had eaten them all. I told him, “That’s quite extraordinary to swallow bones and all,” since there was nothing left at the site except a large amount of blood. He then admitted that the priests had divided the carcasses among the people, who had eaten them as the Duke had explained. And although many might find this hard to believe, I just ask that they consider this one thought: those who could be so cruel as to sacrifice their fellow beings might very well take their barbarity a step further.
However, as I relate nothing for matter of Fact, but what I was an Eye-witness to, so I shall leave the Reader to give[53] what credit he pleases thereto. But as a further confirmation of their being Cannibals, I shall relate what I afterwards learn’d from one Mr. Robert More, who was a person of great Integrity, and at that time Surgeon of the Italian Galley. This Ship came to Whidaw whilst I was at Jaqueen, and Captain John Dagge, the Commander, being indisposed, sent More to the King of Dahomè’s Camp, with Presents for his Majesty. There he saw many strange things, especially human Flesh sold publickly in the great Market-place. As I was not in the Market during the time I was in the Camp, I saw no such thing: But I don’t doubt but that I should have seen the same, had I gone into that place, for there were many old and maimed Captives brought from Tuffoe, (besides those sacrificed) which no Europeans would have bought.
However, since I only share what I personally witnessed, I’ll let the reader decide how much credibility to give to it. To further confirm that they were cannibals, I’ll recount what I later learned from Mr. Robert More, who was a man of great integrity and, at that time, the surgeon of the Italian Galley. This ship arrived at Whidaw while I was at Jaqueen, and Captain John Dagge, the commander, being unwell, sent More to the camp of the King of Dahomè with gifts for His Majesty. There, he witnessed many bizarre things, especially human flesh being openly sold in the large marketplace. Since I wasn’t in the market while I was in the camp, I didn’t see such things myself; however, I have no doubt that I would have seen the same if I had gone there, as many old and mutilated captives were brought from Tuffoe (besides those who were sacrificed), which no Europeans would have bought.
But to return from this Digression: On our return to the Tent, we sent our Linguist to the great Captain, to desire he would procure us an Audience from the King, to treat of Business: But he sent[54] us word, That as his Majesty was very much engaged, we could not be heard that day; there being some Embassadors come from the inland Countries, who were to have an Audience forthwith. On this I sent again to the Great Captain, desiring he would please to be mindful of us, on the first Opportunity; and he was unexpectedly so that Afternoon.
But to get back to the main point: When we returned to the tent, we sent our translator to the great captain to ask him to arrange an audience with the king to discuss important matters. However, he replied that since the king was very busy, we couldn't be seen that day because some ambassadors had arrived from the inland countries and were to have an audience immediately. Following this, I sent another message to the great captain, asking him to keep us in mind for the first opportunity, and surprisingly, he did that afternoon.
Having then nothing to do but sit in our Tent, and make Memorandums of what we heard and saw; we asked the Linguist, “Whether we might, without Offence, go to see the Mulatto Portuguese Gentleman?” Thereupon he consulted with a principal Person belonging to the Court, who often came by the King’s Order to us, to enquire if we wanted any thing; And he approving of it, we prepared to go, but first had this Caution given us; that there being two Embassadors in the Camp from the King of Whidaw, to offer his Subjection, if we should meet with any of their People in the Street, we should not hold any Conference with them. Which having promised,[55] we went to the Portuguese Gentleman’s House, who received us very kindly, thinking he could not make us welcome enough; and as we could understand him, we sent our Interpreter away, under pretence of an Errand to the Duke. After he was gone, the first thing we desired of this Gentleman, was, to give us some hints, how we should behave, when we came to treat of Business with the King; which he readily did, speaking so highly of the King’s Policy and Generosity, that we were much surprized, tho’ afterwards we experienced the full of what he told us. This Person had in the Court of his House two pretty Horses, each about thirteen hands high, which were every way much better than those we had seen at Jaqueen. Upon our asking him, from whence he had them, he replied, “They came from the Kingdom of J-oe; which lies towards the North-East, many days Journey off, beyond a great and famous Lake, which is the Fountain of several large Rivers, that empty themselves into the Bay of Guinea.[56] And he further added, that several fugitive Princes, whose Fathers the King of Dahomè had conquered and beheaded, fled to the King of this Country for Protection, and at last prevailed with him to make War on the King of Dahomè, which he did soon after the latter had conquered Ardra. The King of J-oe sent, under the Command of a General, a great Army of Horse, consisting of many Thousands, (for they never use Infantry) wherewith he invaded the Dahomes in their own Country: On this sudden and unexpected Invasion, the King of Dahomè marched immediately from Ardra into his own Kingdom, and made Head against the J-oes. But as he had none but Infantry, whose Arms were Guns and Swords, he was hard put to it: For the Country being open and without Inclosures, the Horsemen, who were armed with Bows and Arrows, Javelins and cutting Swords, had certainly conquer’d, if the unusual noise of the Dahomè’s Fire-Arms had not so frightned the Horses,[57] that their Riders could never make a home-Charge on the Enemies Foot. However, the Dispute having lasted, at times, four days, and the King of Dahomè finding his Soldiers so fatigued, that they could hold out but a little longer, he contrived this Stratagem: he had great quantities of Brandy by him, formerly bought at Whidaw, which is a principal Commodity the French Ships bring there, to exchange for Negroes. So the King resolved to retreat in the Night with his Army, and leave the Liquor as a Bait for the Enemy, with great quantities of valuable Goods, which were in store, in a large Town near the Camp. When Day came, the J-oes thinking the Dahomes were fled, fell to plundering and destroying the Town, and drinking greedily of the Brandy: And as they seldom had tasted of that Liquor before, it so intoxicated them, that they fell asleep in great numbers on the Ground. The King of Dahomè being informed of this by his Spies, returned[58] with the utmost speed, and attacking them while they were in this Disorder, routed them; but the greater part of the J-oes escaped with the help of their Horses, and fled out of the Country: However, their Loss was so great, that the others esteemed it a compleat Victory. The Portuguese Gentleman added, that at the time of this Rout, he took the two Horses we had seen in his Yard, and a great many more were seized at the same time by the Dahomè Soldiers. He said further, (but enjoined us Secrecy) That tho’ the Dahomes were exceeding proud of this Victory, they were still much afraid of a second Invasion, an Army of Horses being very terrible to them: And that the King had lately sent great Presents to the King of J-oe, to prevent his attacking him a second time. However, in case he did it, and they should not be able to withstand them, they comforted themselves with this Thought, that they might save their Persons, by flying to the Sea Coast, to which the J-oes[59] durst not follow them. For as their national Fetiche was the Sea, they were prohibited by their Priests from ever seeing it, under no less a Penalty than Death; which they made the People believe, would by their God, if they were so presumptuous, be inflicted on them.” This last Story seemed nothing strange to us, who had conversed with the Coast Negroes; for they have all their particular Fetiches after the same manner; some being prohibited eating Fowls that have white Feathers; others, on the contrary, are to eat none that have black: Some are to eat no Sheep, others no Goats. And abundance of such other superstitious Observances they have, which are most religiously kept, being assigned them by the Priest, the Day they have their name given them.
Having nothing to do but sit in our tent and jot down what we heard and saw, we asked the linguist, “Is it okay for us to visit the mulatto Portuguese gentleman?” He then spoke with an important person from the court who often came by with the King’s orders to check if we needed anything. With his approval, we got ready to go, but first, we were warned that since there were two ambassadors from the King of Whidaw offering their allegiance, we shouldn't engage in any conversation with their people if we encountered them on the street. After promising to follow this caution,[55] we headed to the Portuguese gentleman’s house, where he welcomed us warmly, eager to make us feel at home. Understanding each other well enough, we dismissed our interpreter under the pretext of needing him for an errand to the duke. Once he left, the first thing we requested from this gentleman was some tips on how to act when discussing business with the King. He gladly helped us, praising the King’s policies and generosity so much that we were surprised, although we later realized he was right about everything he said. This man had two nice horses in the courtyard of his house, each about thirteen hands high, which were far better than any we had seen at Jaqueen. When we asked him where he got them, he replied, “They came from the Kingdom of J-oe, which is located to the northeast, many days’ journey away, beyond a large famous lake that is the source of several major rivers that flow into the Bay of Guinea.”[56] He added that several fugitive princes, whose fathers the King of Dahomè had conquered and executed, sought protection from the King of this country and eventually persuaded him to go to war against the King of Dahomè, which he did shortly after the latter had conquered Ardra. The King of J-oe sent a huge army of cavalry, numbering in the thousands (since they never used infantry), led by a general, to invade the Dahomes in their own territory. When the Dahomè army was suddenly invaded, the King promptly marched from Ardra back into his kingdom to confront the J-oes. However, since he was relying only on infantry armed with guns and swords, he was at a disadvantage. The open terrain, with no fences or barriers, favored the horsemen, who were equipped with bows, arrows, javelins, and swords. They would have certainly won if it weren't for the disorienting noise of the Dahomè’s firearms, which frightened their horses,[57] making it impossible for their riders to charge at the enemy’s foot soldiers effectively. After four days of contention, as the King of Dahomè noticed his troops were exhausted and could hold out only a little longer, he devised a strategy: he had stockpiled a large amount of brandy, which he had bought at Whidaw, a major trading commodity brought by French ships in exchange for slaves. So, the King planned to retreat at night with his army while leaving the liquor as bait for the enemy, along with a large amount of valuable goods stored in a nearby town. When morning arrived, believing the Dahomes had fled, the J-oes began looting and destroying the town, quickly gulping down the brandy. Since they had rarely tasted such liquor before, it intoxicated them, causing many to fall asleep on the ground. The King of Dahomè learned of this through his spies, quickly returned,[58] and attacked them while they were disorganized, routing them. However, most of the J-oes managed to escape with the help of their horses and fled the country. Still, their losses were so significant that the Dahomes considered it a complete victory. The Portuguese gentleman added that during this rout, he captured the two horses we had seen in his yard, and many more were seized at that time by the Dahomè soldiers. He further mentioned (but sworn us to secrecy) that although the Dahomes were very proud of this victory, they remained afraid of a second invasion, as a horse army was quite terrifying to them. Recently, the King had sent large presents to the King of J-oe to deter him from attacking again. However, in case he did, and they were unable to withstand them, they comforted themselves with the thought that they could save themselves by fleeing to the coast, where the J-oes would not dare to follow. According to their national fetiche, the sea was sacred, and their priests forbade them from ever seeing it, under the penalty of death, which they claimed would be inflicted by their God if they were so bold. This last story didn't seem strange to us, as we had interacted with the coastal Negroes, who have various fetiches. Some are prohibited from eating fowls with white feathers, while others cannot eat any with black; some must not eat sheep, while others cannot eat goats. They observe numerous such superstitions, which are strictly followed as instructed by the priest on the day they receive their name.
By this time it was past Noon, so we took our leave of the Portuguese, and went to our Tent to Dinner.
By this time, it was after noon, so we said goodbye to the Portuguese and went to our tent for dinner.
About three a Clock that Afternoon, a Messenger came from the great Captain,[60] to inform us, the King had appointed immediately to give us an Audience. This was an agreeable Surprize to us, for now we had hopes of being quickly dispatch’d, so we prepared our selves, and went to the King’s Gate, our Presents for his Majesty being carried before us.
About three o'clock that afternoon, a messenger arrived from the great captain to let us know that the king wanted to meet with us right away. This was a pleasant surprise for us, as it made us hopeful that we would be seen quickly. So, we got ready and went to the king's gate, with our gifts for His Majesty being carried in front of us.
On our coming into the Court, where we had seen the King at our former Audience, we were desired to stay a little, till the Presents were carried into the House, that his Majesty might view them. Soon after we were introduced into a small Court, at the further end of which the King was sitting cross-legg’d on a Carpet of Silk, spread on the Ground: He was himself richly dress’d, and had but few Attendants. When we approached him, his Majesty enquired in a very kind manner, How we did? ordering we should be placed near him; and accordingly fine Mats were spread on the Ground for us to sit on. Tho’ sitting in that Posture was not very easy to us, yet we put a good Face on the matter, understanding by the Linguist, that it was their Custom.
Upon entering the Court, where we had previously seen the King during our last audience, we were asked to wait a moment while the gifts were taken into the House for his Majesty to see. Shortly after, we were led into a small Court, at the far end of which the King was sitting cross-legged on a silk carpet placed on the ground. He was dressed lavishly and had only a few attendants. When we approached him, his Majesty kindly asked how we were doing and instructed that we should sit near him. Consequently, fine mats were laid out on the ground for us to sit on. Although sitting in that position wasn't very comfortable for us, we maintained a good attitude, understanding from the interpreter that it was their custom.
As soon as we were placed, the King ordered the Interpreter to ask me, What I had to desire of him? To which I answered, “That as my Business was to trade, so I relied on his Majesty’s Goodness, to give me a quick dispatch, and fill my Ship with Negroes; by which means I should return into my own Country in a short time; where I should make known how great and powerful a King I had seen.” To this the King replied by the Linguist, “That my desire should be fulfilled: But the first Business to be settled was his Customs.” Thereupon I desired his Majesty to let me know what he expected? There was a Person then present (I believe on purpose) whose name was Zunglar, a cunning Fellow, who had formerly been the King’s Agent for several Years at Whidaw; where I had seen him in my former Voyages. To him I was referred to talk about the Affair. So Zunglar told me, “his Master being resolved to encourage Trade, tho’ he was a Conqueror, yet he would not impose[62] a greater Custom than used to be paid to the King of Whidaw.” I answered, “As his Majesty was a far greater Prince, so I hoped he would not take so much.” This Zunglar not replying readily to, and the King observing it, (for the Linguist told him every word that pass’d between us) His Majesty himself replied, “That as he was the greater Prince, he might reasonably expect the more Custom; but as I was the first English Captain he had seen, he would treat me as a young Wife or Bride, who must be denied nothing at first.” Being surprized at this turn of Expression, I told the Linguist, “I was afraid he imposed on me, and interpreted the King’s words in too favourable a manner.” His Majesty observing I spoke with some Sharpness, asked him what I said? Which the Linguist having told him, his Majesty smiled, and expressed himself again to the same purpose: Adding, “I should find his Actions answerable to his Words.” Being greatly encouraged by the King’s gracious Expressions towards me, I took[63] the Liberty to represent to his Majesty, “That the best way to make Trade flourish, was to impose easy Customs, and to protect us from the Thievery of the Natives, and the Impositions of great Men; which the King of Whidaw not doing, had greatly hurt the Trade. For the ill usage the Europeans had met with of late from him and his People, had caused them to send fewer Ships than formerly they did. And tho’ a large Custom might seem at first for his Majesty’s Advantage, yet it would soon be found, that a great number of Ships would thereby be hindred from coming to trade; so that in this respect he would lose far more in General, than he would gain by that Particular.”
As soon as we arrived, the King instructed the Interpreter to ask me what I wanted from him. I replied, “Since I'm here to trade, I trust in your Majesty’s kindness to quickly process my request and fill my ship with Negroes; this way, I can return to my own country in no time and share how great and powerful a King I've encountered.” The King responded through the Linguist, saying that my request would be granted, but first, we needed to settle his customs. I then asked his Majesty what he was expecting in terms of customs. There was someone present, a man named Zunglar, a clever guy who had previously been the King’s agent for several years in Whidaw; I had seen him during my earlier voyages. He was appointed to discuss the matter with me. Zunglar told me, “Although his Master is determined to promote trade and is a conqueror, he wouldn’t impose a higher custom than what was paid to the King of Whidaw.” I responded, “Since his Majesty is a far greater ruler, I hope he won’t require as much.” Zunglar didn’t answer right away, and the King noticed this (the Linguist relayed every word exchanged between us). His Majesty himself replied, “Being a greater Prince, I may justifiably expect a higher custom; but since you are the first English captain I have seen, I will treat you like a young wife or bride who should receive everything she desires at the beginning.” Surprised by this expression, I told the Linguist, “I worry he’s putting me at a disadvantage, interpreting the King’s words too favorably.” When the King noticed my sharp tone, he asked the Linguist what I said. After hearing this, he smiled and reiterated his point, adding that I would find his actions to match his words. Encouraged by the King’s friendly comments, I took the liberty to suggest to his Majesty that the best way to promote trade was to set reasonable customs and protect us from the native thieves and the demands of powerful individuals; the King of Whidaw had failed to do so, which significantly harmed trade. The mistreatment that Europeans had faced from him and his people recently had caused them to send fewer ships than before. Although a high custom might seem beneficial at first for his Majesty, it would soon be evident that many ships would be deterred from coming to trade, resulting in a greater overall loss than any gain from that specific custom.
The King took what I said in good part, telling me, “I should name my own Custom,” which I at first declined: But being prest to do it a second time, I told the Linguist to ask his Majesty, “Whether he would be pleased to take one half of what we used to pay at Whidaw?” To this the King readily[64] agreed; adding, “He designed to make Trade flourish; and I might depend upon it, he would prevent all Impositions, and Thievery, and protect the Europeans that came to his Country, saying, that his God had made him the Instrument to punish the King of Whidaw, and his People, for the many Villanies they had been guilty of towards both Whites and Blacks: That the Embassadors now in his Camp from the said King, had informed him of me and my Character, and that by the account they had given him of my former dealings in their Country, he could put much Confidence in me.” Then his Majesty having asked me divers Questions concerning our former ill usage in the Country of Whidaw, to which I answered as I thought proper; I took this Opportunity of pleading for the common People of that Kingdom; representing, “It was the great Men amongst them that had encouraged their thieving, in which they shared: But if his Majesty would be pleased to receive[65] them to Mercy, and restore them to their Country, on paying a certain Tribute, they would be of great advantage to him; because they were very industrious in cultivating the Land, and many of them understood Trade exceeding well, which his own People were little versed in. Moreover it was a Maxim amongst the white Princes, that the number of useful Subjects was their greatest Glory and Strength; and if his Majesty thought the same, he had an opportunity of adding many hundreds of thousands to his former Vassals.” To this the King replied, “He was sensible of the truth of what I alledged, but that the Conquest of Whidaw could not be secured, till he had the King’s Head; and he had already offered the People to restore them to their Country, as soon as they should send him alive or dead to his Camp.” I did not think proper, on hearing this, to say any thing more on the matter, or observe to his Majesty, how wrong a Policy it was, to oblige[66] Subjects to act so villanous a part towards their Sovereign. For as the Custom of these black Princes was little known to us, I was afraid of giving offence: So I only answered, “That as the King of Whidaw was on an Island by Popoe, with many thousands of his People, the rest that were dispersed up and down the Country in the Bushes, could not possibly perform what his Majesty required of them: For if they were ever so ready to do it, yet having no Cannoes to ferry over to the Island, it was not in their Power to take the King from thence; and that I believed if he did not receive them to Mercy quickly, the far greater part of them would perish by Famine.”
The King took what I said well, telling me, “I should name my own Custom,” which I initially declined. But when pressed to do it again, I told the Linguist to ask his Majesty, “Would you be willing to accept half of what we used to pay at Whidaw?” The King quickly agreed, adding, “I plan to make Trade thrive; you can count on me to stop all Impositions and Thievery, and to protect the Europeans who come to my Country. My God has made me the Instrument to punish the King of Whidaw and his People for the many wrongs they’ve committed against both Whites and Blacks. The Embassadors currently in my Camp from that King have informed me about you and your Character, and from what they’ve told me about your past dealings in their Country, I can trust you.” Then his Majesty asked me several Questions about our previous mistreatment in the Country of Whidaw, to which I responded as I thought appropriate. I took this chance to plead for the common People of that Kingdom, explaining, “It’s the powerful individuals among them who have encouraged their thieving, and they benefit from it. If his Majesty could show them Mercy and allow them to return to their Country after paying a certain Tribute, they would be a great asset to him. They are very hardworking in farming the land, and many of them are quite knowledgeable about Trade, which his own People are not well-versed in. Furthermore, it's a principle among white Princes that having many useful Subjects is their greatest Glory and Strength; if his Majesty agrees, he has the chance to add many hundreds of thousands to his existing Vassals.” The King replied, “I understand the truth of what you say, but I cannot secure the Conquest of Whidaw until I have the King’s Head. I have already offered the People to restore them to their Country as soon as they send me his head, alive or dead.” I didn’t think it appropriate to say anything else or point out to his Majesty how misguided it was to force Subjects to act in such a villainous way towards their Sovereign. Since the customs of these black Princes were little known to us, I was afraid of offending him, so I merely replied, “Since the King of Whidaw is on an Island near Popoe, with many thousands of his People, those who are scattered throughout the Country in the bushes cannot possibly fulfill what his Majesty asks. Even if they wanted to, they have no Canoes to transport them to the Island, so they can't capture the King. I believe that if you don't show them Mercy soon, the vast majority of them will die from starvation.”
After this his Majesty fell into a variety of Discourse, and amongst other things complained of Mr. Lambe, (who, as I have related in the beginning of this Book, had been taken Prisoner in the Ardra War,) saying, “That tho’ he had given him, at his leaving the Court, three hundred and twenty ounces of[67] Gold, with eighty Slaves, and made him promise with a solemn Oath to return again in a reasonable time, yet twelve Moons had now pass’d, and he had heard nothing from him: Adding, He had sent a black Person with him, whose name was Tom, one who had been made a Prisoner at the same time, being a Jaqueen-man, who spoke good English; and this Man he had ordered to return again with Mr. Lambe, that he might be informed, whether what that Gentleman had reported concerning our King, Customs, and manner of Living was true.” To this I replied, “That I had no personal Knowledge of Mr. Lambe, but had been informed, before I left England, that he went from Whidaw to Barbadoes, which is a Plantation where the English employ their Slaves in making Sugar, and which is at a great distance from our own Country; But I hoped he would prove an honest Man, and return again to his Majesty, according to his Promise and Oath.”
After this, His Majesty engaged in various discussions and, among other topics, expressed his complaints about Mr. Lambe, (who, as I mentioned at the beginning of this Book, had been taken prisoner in the Ardra War). He said, “Though I gave him, when he left the Court, three hundred and twenty ounces of[67] gold, along with eighty slaves, and made him swear a solemn oath to return in a reasonable time, twelve moons have now passed, and I’ve heard nothing from him. I also sent a black man with him named Tom, who was captured around the same time and is a Jaqueen-man who speaks good English. I instructed this man to come back with Mr. Lambe so I could find out if what that gentleman said about our King, customs, and way of life was true.” In response, I said, “I don’t personally know Mr. Lambe, but I was informed before I left England that he went from Whidaw to Barbadoes, which is a plantation where the English use their slaves to produce sugar, and which is quite far from our country. However, I hope he proves to be an honest man and returns to His Majesty as promised and sworn.”
To this the King replied, “Tho’ he proved not as good as his Word, other white Men should not fare the worse on that account; for as to what he had given Lambe, he valued it not a Rush; but if he returned quickly, and came with never so large a Ship, she should be instantly filled with Slaves, with which he might do what he thought proper.”
To this, the King replied, “Even if he didn't keep his promise, that shouldn't affect how other white men are treated; as for what he had given Lambe, it wasn't worth anything to him. But if he came back soon and brought a big ship, it would immediately be filled with slaves, and he could do whatever he wanted with them.”
It may not be improper here to give a short account of the black Man the King mentioned to me, because he was in England last year, and the Affair was brought before the Lords of Trade, by whom I was examined about him.
It might not be inappropriate to provide a brief overview of the black Man the King told me about, since he was in England last year, and the matter was brought up before the Lords of Trade, who questioned me about him.
Mr. Lambe carried this Person to Barbadoes, and several other Places, but at last left him with a Gentleman in Maryland. Afterwards Mr. Lambe trafficked for some Years, from one place to another in the Plantations; and coming to the Island of Antegoa, where I had been in the year 1728, and told the foregoing story to some Gentlemen, and how kindly the King of Dahomè had express’d himself[69] with regard to the said Mr. Lambe, being by them informed of it, this induced him to return to Maryland; and the Gentleman who had Tom in his Custody was so good, as to deliver him again to Mr. Lambe, who came with him to London, the beginning of the year 1731.
Mr. Lambe took this person to Barbados and several other places, but eventually left him with a gentleman in Maryland. After that, Mr. Lambe engaged in trade for several years, moving from one place to another in the Plantations. When he arrived at the island of Antigua, where I had been in 1728, I shared this story with some gentlemen and mentioned how kindly the King of Dahomey had spoken about Mr. Lambe. This information encouraged him to return to Maryland; the gentleman who was holding Tom was kind enough to return him to Mr. Lambe, who then brought him to London at the beginning of 1731.
Mr. Lambe, soon after his arrival, came to see me at my house, enquiring particularly about what I had related at Antegoa; which I confirmed to him. Then he desired my Advice about his going back to the King of Dahomè. To this I frankly answered, “It was my opinion, he had miss’d the opportunity, by not returning in a reasonable time, according to his promise; several years being now pass’d since he came from thence, and the State of Affairs much altered for the worse: Besides, he might justly fear the King’s resentment, as Mr. Testefole had experienced lately to his cost, for abusing his Goodness; for tho’ he was Governour for the African Company at Whidaw, yet he had been put to death in a cruel manner.”
Mr. Lambe, shortly after he arrived, came to visit me at my house, asking specifically about what I had shared at Antegoa; which I confirmed. Then he sought my advice about returning to the King of Dahomè. I candidly replied, “I believe you’ve missed the opportunity by not going back in a timely manner, as you promised; several years have now passed since you left, and the situation has changed for the worse: Additionally, you might justifiably worry about the King’s anger, as Mr. Testefole recently learned the hard way for taking advantage of his kindness; for although he was the Governor for the African Company at Whidaw, he was executed in a brutal way.”
On this he left me; and the next news I heard, was, That Mr. Lambe had delivered a Letter to his Majesty King George as from the King of Dahomè, which being referred to the Lords of Trade, the Merchants trading to the Coast of Guinea were sent for; and I being ordered to attend, informed their Lordships of what I knew of the matter.
On this, he left me; and the next thing I heard was that Mr. Lambe had delivered a letter to His Majesty King George from the King of Dahomè. This was passed on to the Lords of Trade, and the merchants trading to the Coast of Guinea were called in. I was ordered to attend and informed their Lordships about what I knew regarding the situation.
The report from the Lords of Trade was to this Purpose, “That the Letter in their opinion was not genuine, but that the black Man ought to be taken care of, and returned to his King:” Accordingly he was put into the hands of the African Company, who took care of him for many Months; but he growing impatient, applied to their Graces the Dukes of Richmond and Montague, who procured him a Passage on board his Majesty’s Ship the Tiger Captain Berkeley, then bound to the Coast of Guinea.
The report from the Lords of Trade stated, “In their opinion, the letter was not genuine, but the black man should be taken care of and returned to his King.” As a result, he was handed over to the African Company, who looked after him for several months. However, he became impatient and reached out to the Dukes of Richmond and Montague, who arranged for him to board His Majesty’s Ship, the Tiger, Captain Berkeley, which was headed to the Coast of Guinea.
Moreover, their Lordships having shewed him great Kindness, most generously sent by him several rare Presents to his King, which, no doubt, will make a good[71] impression on him in favour of our Nation; and I have lately heard, that on his being put on Shore at Whidaw, he was forthwith sent to the King, who was then in his own Country of Dahomè, and was received graciously by him: That his Majesty sent down handsome Presents for Captain Berkeley, but before the Messengers got to Whidaw, he was sailed, not having patience to wait so many days, as the return from so far inland a place required.
Moreover, their Lordships showed him great kindness and generously sent several rare gifts to his King, which will no doubt make a good[71] impression on him in favor of our nation; and I've recently heard that when he was put on shore at Whidaw, he was immediately sent to the King, who was then in his own country of Dahomè, and he was graciously received by him. His Majesty sent down attractive gifts for Captain Berkeley, but before the messengers reached Whidaw, he had already set sail, not having the patience to wait so many days, as the return from such a distant place required.
I had not made this Digression, but only to set this Affair in a true light; and undeceive those that may read this Book, and were so far imposed upon, as to suppose the Black Man to have been an Embassador from the King of Dahomè, to his Majesty King George. I met with several that believed so, till I satisfied them of the contrary; for the jest was carried on so far, that several Plays were acted on his Account, and it was advertised in the News-Papers, that they were for the Entertainment of Prince Adomo Oroonoko Tomo, &c. these jingling Names being invented to carry on the Fraud the better.
I didn't go off on this tangent just for the sake of it, but to clarify this situation and set the record straight for anyone reading this book who might have been fooled into thinking the Black Man was an ambassador from the king of Dahomè to his Majesty King George. I encountered several people who believed that until I explained the truth to them; the joke went so far that there were several plays acted in his honor, and it was announced in the newspapers that they were for the entertainment of Prince Adomo Oroonoko Tomo, & c. These catchy names were created to further the deception.
This black Person was born at Jaqueen, and being from a Boy conversant with the English trading there, learned so well our Language, that he was employed by them, when grown up, as an Interpreter.
This Black person was born at Jaqueen and, since childhood, interacted with the English traders there. He learned our language so well that, when he got older, he was hired by them as an interpreter.
He happen’d to be at Ardra on some business, at the time that Country was conquered, and so became Prisoner to the King of Dahomè. But ’tis time to have done with this Story, and go on where I left off.
He happened to be at Ardra for some business when that country was conquered, and so he became a prisoner to the King of Dahomè. But it’s time to move on from this story and continue where I left off.
After this Discourse concerning Mr. Lambe was over, I acquainted the King, that I daily expected another Ship belonging to my Owner, (who had five large Ships that used the Whidaw Trade in particular) and I hoped his Majesty would not take more Custom from the Commanders of them, than he had been pleased to take of me. To which he answered with a Smile, “That it was a particular Grace to my self. However when any of them came, they should be used kindly in that matter, and the Captains might stay at Jaqueen and[73] Whidaw as they thought fit, for that he now was Lord of both places.” And then his Majesty asked me, “Whether I would chuse the Slaves that were now in the Camp, or have them first sent down to Jaqueen?” To which I answered, “I chose the latter; desiring the King would now please to fix the Price, with other matters.” Accordingly Zunglar was called again, to inform his Majesty, what were the last Prices the Europeans had paid for Negroes at Whidaw, before the Conquest: But on my representing, That the Price had been raised there, much above what had been customary, on account of the War; the King moderated it himself, and I writ down with my Pencil, in his presence, every thing agreed on: Amongst which one was, That I should have three Males to one Female, and take none but what I liked. The reason of my mentioning this, is to explain more fully what happened to me afterwards, on account of these two Articles.
After this discussion about Mr. Lambe was finished, I informed the King that I was expecting another ship from my owner, who had five large ships specifically involved in the Whidaw trade, and I hoped his Majesty wouldn’t impose more customs fees on them than he had on me. He smiled and replied that it was a special privilege for me. However, when any of those ships arrived, they would be treated kindly in that regard, and the captains could stay at Jaqueen and Whidaw as they saw fit, since he was now the lord of both places. Then the King asked me whether I wanted to choose the slaves currently in the camp or have them sent down to Jaqueen first. I replied that I preferred the latter and asked the King to please set the price along with other details. Thus, Zunglar was summoned again to inform his Majesty of the last prices the Europeans had paid for slaves at Whidaw before the conquest. However, when I pointed out that the price had risen there significantly due to the war, the King adjusted it himself, and I noted down everything we agreed upon in his presence, including that I would receive three males for every female and could choose only those I liked. I mention this to explain more clearly what happened to me later regarding these two agreements.
After this was done, the Duke, Brother to the Lord of Jaqueen, was sent for, and the King recommended me to the care of them both, declaring, “If I suffered by their People, either in Person or Goods, he and his Brother should answer for it: Moreover, if any Person stole my Goods, and could be taken, his Majesty ordered, they should be impaled alive on the Sea side, for an Example to the Porters, and others that bring our Merchandise from thence to the Town.”
After this was done, the Duke, brother of the Lord of Jaqueen, was called in, and the King entrusted me to their care, declaring, “If I suffer losses due to their people, either personally or for my belongings, he and his brother will be held responsible. Furthermore, if anyone steals my goods and can be caught, his Majesty ordered that they should be impaled alive by the seaside as a warning to the porters and others who bring our merchandise from there to town.”
By this time it was near nine a clock at night, and the Linguist was ordered by the King to tell us, his time of washing was come; so we rose up in order to take our leaves, humbly thanking his Majesty for all his Favours, and for his great Goodness towards us, in giving us so long an Audience; desiring he would be pleased to permit us to return next day to Jaqueen: adding, I hoped God would give him many Days, for the good of his own People, and of the Europeans that should come to his Country. The King thanked us for our good Wishes,[75] saying, he would dispatch us the next day, and then we paid our Respects, and so parted.
By this time, it was nearly nine o'clock at night, and the Linguist was told by the King that it was time for him to wash up; so we stood up to say our goodbyes, humbly thanking His Majesty for all his kindness and for his great generosity towards us in granting such a long audience. We asked if he would allow us to return the next day to Jaqueen, adding that I hoped God would grant him many more days for the benefit of his own people and the Europeans who would come to his country. The King thanked us for our good wishes,[75] saying he would send us off the next day, and then we paid our respects and parted ways.
As we were almost five hours so near the King, I had a good opportunity of taking an exact View of him. He was middle-sized, and full bodied; and, as near as I could judge, about forty five years old: His Face was pitted with the Small Pox; nevertheless, there was something in his Countenance very taking, and withal majestick. Upon the whole, I found him the most extraordinary Man of his Colour, that I had ever conversed with, having seen nothing in him that appeared barbarous, except the sacrificing of his Enemies; which the Portuguese Gentleman told me, he believed was done out of Policy; neither did he eat human Flesh himself.
As we spent almost five hours so close to the King, I had a great chance to really observe him. He was of average height and had a solid build; and, as far as I could tell, he was about forty-five years old. His face had scars from smallpox; however, there was something very captivating and majestic about his expression. Overall, I found him to be the most remarkable man of his race that I had ever spoken with, having seen nothing in him that seemed barbaric, except for the sacrificing of his enemies—which the Portuguese gentleman told me he believed was done for strategic reasons; he also didn’t eat human flesh himself.
Being made easy in all respects by this Audience, we returned to our Tent, and spent the evening cheerfully, the Mulatto Portuguese, with several Courtiers supping with us. The next morning we were sent for again to the King’s Gate, and the[76] Officers told us, “It being the King’s Fetiche-day, his Majesty could not see us; but that he had ordered them to present us with something in his name; adding, I might depend on what had been promised me, and that we were at Liberty to go for Jaqueen when we pleased:” Our black Servants had likewise handsom Clothes given them to wear about their middle; (according to the custom of the Negroes, who never cover more than that part) with a small sum of Money to each of them, which made them very jocund, and almost forget the fear they had been put in at the sight of the Sacrifices.
Being made comfortable in every way by this Audience, we went back to our Tent and spent the evening happily, the Mulatto Portuguese along with some Courtiers dining with us. The next morning, we were summoned again to the King’s Gate, and the[76] Officers informed us, “Since it is the King’s Fetiche-day, his Majesty could not meet with us; however, he has instructed us to present you with something in his name; adding that you can count on what was promised to you, and that we are free to go for Jaqueen whenever we wish.” Our black Servants were also given fine clothes to wear around their waists (according to the custom of the Negroes, who only cover that part) along with a small amount of Money each, making them very cheerful and almost forget the fear they felt when witnessing the Sacrifices.
This being over, our servants carried the Presents to our Tent, which consisted of Slaves, Cows, Goats and Sheep, with other Provisions: And then we went to the great Captain’s Tent, to take our leave of him. There we found the Duke, who told us, he could not have his Audience of leave from the King till the Evening; and earnestly desired us not to go without him; for that he would certainly[77] accompany us the next Morning to Jaqueen. Tho’ the Dutch Gentlemen and my self were very desirous of going before, yet we could not in honour leave the Duke; so we consented to stay for him, and went to our Tent to Dinner.
Once that was done, our servants brought the gifts to our tent, which included slaves, cows, goats, and sheep, along with other supplies. Afterward, we went to the great captain’s tent to say our goodbyes. There, we found the duke, who informed us that he couldn’t have his farewell audience with the king until the evening and urged us not to leave without him, as he would definitely join us the following morning to Jaqueen. Although the Dutch gentlemen and I were eager to leave sooner, we couldn’t honorably depart without the duke, so we agreed to wait for him and headed back to our tent for dinner.
In the Afternoon, the Linguist came and told us, that the remainder of the Army, who had been plundering the Country of Tuffoe, were returning; and asked us, whether we would go and see them pass by the King’s Gate? We went accordingly to that place, and soon after they appeared, marching in a much more regular Order than I had ever seen before, even amongst the Gold Coast Negroes; who were always esteemed amongst the Europeans that used the Coast of Guinea, the best Soldiers of all the Blacks. I observed, this Army consisted of about three thousand regular Troops, attended by a Rabble of ten thousand at least, who carried Baggage, Provisions, dead Peoples Heads, &c. The several Companies of Soldiers had their proper Colours, and Officers, being armed with Musquets and[78] cutting Swords; and with Shields. As they passed by the King’s Gate, every Soldier prostrated himself, and kissed the Ground; then rose with such agility, as was very surprizing. The place before the King’s Gate was four times as large as Tower Hill; there they performed their Exercises, in the sight of innumerable Spectators, and fired at least twenty rounds with their small Arms, in less than two hours time: Then, by the General’s Order, the Soldiers retired to the part of the Camp they belonged to. This sight was well worth seeing even by us Europeans.
In the afternoon, the linguist arrived and informed us that the rest of the army, who had been raiding the land of Tuffoe, was on their way back. He asked if we wanted to go and watch them pass by the King’s Gate. So, we went to that spot, and shortly after, they showed up, marching in a much more organized manner than I had ever seen before, even among the Gold Coast Negroes, who had always been regarded by Europeans visiting the Coast of Guinea as the best soldiers among all the Blacks. I noticed that this army consisted of about three thousand regular troops, accompanied by a mob of at least ten thousand who carried baggage, provisions, and the heads of dead people, etc. The various companies of soldiers had their own colors and officers, armed with muskets and cutting swords, along with shields. As they passed by the King’s Gate, every soldier prostrated himself and kissed the ground, then sprang up with surprising agility. The area in front of the King’s Gate was four times larger than Tower Hill; there, they performed their drills in front of countless spectators and fired at least twenty rounds with their small arms in less than two hours. Then, by the general’s order, the soldiers returned to their respective parts of the camp. This spectacle was definitely worth seeing, even for us Europeans.
I took notice, that abundance of Boys followed the Soldiers, and carried their Shields; and asked the Linguist, “What was the occasion of it?” He told me, “That the King allowed every common Soldier a Boy at the publick charge, in order to be trained up in Hardships from their Youth; and that the greatest part of the present Army consisted of Soldiers, bred up in this manner, and under this Establishment.” By which I judged, it was no wonder the King had made so large Conquests,[79] with such regular Troops, and his Policy together.
I noticed that a lot of boys were following the soldiers and carrying their shields, so I asked the translator, “What’s the reason for that?” He told me, “The king allows every common soldier to have a boy funded by the government so they can be trained in hardships from a young age. Most of the current army is made up of soldiers raised this way and under this system.” That made me think it was no surprise the king had achieved such large conquests, especially with such organized troops and his strategic planning.[79]
After this Sight was over, we went again to the great Captain’s, whose eldest Son had been General in the Expedition against the Tuffoes. The Mulatto Portuguese Gentleman being then present, advised us to go and pay our Compliments to this Commander. Accordingly we went, and were received by him with great Civility; and having presented him with some Trifles, wherewith he was highly delighted, we returned to his Father’s Tent. After a short stay, telling him we were afraid we should not set out for Jaqueen the next day, he assured us we should certainly go the next morning early; and that he would accompany us part of the way: which Promise was highly pleasing to us, for we were quite tired of the Camp: Moreover my Business very much required my presence at Jaqueen, in order to begin trading. I observed in the Great Captain’s Tent two black Gentlemen, who had long Gowns on, with a Cloth wreathed about their[80] Heads, like a Turkish Turbant, and Sandals on their Feet. This being a Dress I had never seen before amongst the Negroes, I inquired of the Linguist, who they were? He replied, “They were Malayes, which is a Nation far inland, bordering on the Moors; and that these People were equal to the white Men in one thing, namely in writing: That at this time there was about forty of them in the Camp, who had been taken at several times in war, as they traded from one Country to another: and that the King treated them kindly, for they had the Art of dying Goat and Sheep-skins with divers Colours, which they made into Cartouch-boxes for the Soldiers; and also into Bags to hold loose powder, and for many other uses.” I was desirous of discoursing with these People, but the Linguist declined it, saying, “It would give offence to the Great Captain:” So we went from hence to take our leave of the Mulatto Portuguese Gentleman, and afterwards to our Tent to supper, and slept all night in our Hammocks.
After the sight was over, we went back to the great Captain’s place, whose eldest son had been a General in the expedition against the Tuffoes. The Mulatto Portuguese gentleman was there and suggested we should go pay our respects to this commander. So we did, and he welcomed us with great politeness. After presenting him with some small gifts that he really appreciated, we returned to his father's tent. After a short stay, we mentioned that we were worried we wouldn’t be able to leave for Jaqueen the next day. He assured us that we would definitely leave early the next morning, and that he would accompany us part of the way, which pleased us greatly since we were quite tired of the camp. Besides, my business required me to be in Jaqueen to start trading. In the great Captain's tent, I noticed two black gentlemen wearing long gowns, with cloth wrapped around their heads like a Turkish turban, and sandals on their feet. This was a dress I hadn't seen before among the Negroes, so I asked the linguist who they were. He replied, “They are Malayes, a nation far inland, bordering on the Moors. These people are equal to white men in one thing, which is writing. Currently, there are around forty of them in the camp, taken at various times in war as they traveled between countries. The king treats them kindly because they have the skill of dying goat and sheep skins in various colors, which they make into cartridge boxes for the soldiers and into bags for holding loose powder, among other uses.” I wanted to talk to these people, but the linguist declined, saying it would offend the great Captain. So we left to say goodbye to the Mulatto Portuguese gentleman, and afterwards returned to our tent for supper and slept all night in our hammocks.
Next Morning we rose early, and prepared for our Journey. As soon as all our things were in order, we sent the Duke word, that we waited for him. The Messenger returned forthwith, and desired us to go to the great Captain’s Tent, where we should find the Duke and his People all ready for going. Accordingly we went, but the Ceremony of taking leave of several great Men, who came to wish us a good Journey, detained us till nine a clock in the Morning: And then we set out; the musical Instruments of the Negroes making a great noise at our Departure. The great Captain, according to his Promise, accompanied us for an hour on the Road, and then took his leave under a Salute of Fire-Arms from his Soldiers, and our Servants. Our Hammock-men had no need of being press’d to make haste, and travel fast: For the Impression made on their Minds by the sacrificing the poor People of Tuffoe, still so much affected them, that they ran full speed with us, even beyond their Strength; so that by five a clock in the[82] Evening, they brought us into Jaqueen Town, where the People received us with much Joy, having been under great apprehensions for our Safety, because we stayed longer than was expected.
Next morning, we got up early and got ready for our journey. Once everything was in order, we sent word to the Duke that we were waiting for him. The messenger came back right away and asked us to go to the great captain's tent, where we would find the Duke and his team all set to go. So we headed over, but the farewells from several important people who came to wish us a safe journey held us up until nine o'clock in the morning. Then we set off, the musical instruments of the Negroes making quite a racket as we departed. The great captain, as promised, accompanied us for an hour on the road, then said his goodbyes with a salute of gunfire from his soldiers and our servants. Our hammock bearers didn't need any encouragement to hurry and travel fast. The memory of the poor people of Tuffoe still weighed heavily on their minds, pushing them to run as fast as they could, even beyond their limits. By five o'clock in the [82] evening, they brought us into Jaqueen Town, where the locals welcomed us with great joy, having been very worried about our safety since we had stayed longer than expected.
The next day, being the 15th of April 1727, I paid the King of Dahomè’s Officers the Custom agreed on; and in two days after, a great many Slaves came to Town, being sent by his Majesty for me to chuse such as I liked of them: Which having done, I offered to pay the Lord of Jaqueen his usual Duties, but he insisted on a larger Custom than my Surgeon had agreed for with him at our first coming: So I refused to pay it, and put him in mind of the Injunction the King of Dahomè had sent him by his Brother. This put him in a Passion, and he asked me sternly, Whether I designed to bring War on him, by informing the Conqueror of what he demanded? This being a tender Point, and hoping Time and Patience might bring him to do me Justice, I took my leave of him: For I had been told, it was not possible, no more than prudent,[83] to engage any one to go with a Complaint to the King of Dahomè; for the Messenger would certainly be murdered on the Road by the Jaqueens. Moreover, I was informed, they and their Lord had sent their beloved Wives and best Effects to an Island, which is about thirty Miles to the Eastward of Jaqueen on the Sea-Coast, and under the Protection of the King of Appah, whose Country extends as far as the Bay of Bennin. And as they durst not trust intirely to the Conqueror’s Faith and Promises, so the Men were always ready to fly there themselves, on the least appearance of Hostility: There they could be in safety, the Dahomes not having Cannoes to follow them, or if they had, none amongst them understanding the Management of them.
The next day, on April 15, 1727, I paid the King of Dahomè’s officers the agreed-upon customs. Two days later, many slaves arrived in town, sent by his Majesty for me to choose from. After selecting the ones I liked, I offered to pay the Lord of Jaqueen his usual fees, but he insisted on a higher payment than what my surgeon had originally agreed upon when we arrived. So, I refused to pay and reminded him of the instruction the King of Dahomè had sent through his brother. This made him angry, and he sternly asked if I intended to bring war upon him by informing the conqueror of his demands. This was a sensitive issue, and hoping that time and patience would lead him to treat me fairly, I took my leave. I had been warned that it was neither possible nor wise to send anyone with a complaint to the King of Dahomè, as the messenger would likely be killed on the way by the Jaqueens. Additionally, I learned that they and their lord had sent their cherished wives and valuable belongings to an island about thirty miles east of Jaqueen along the coast, under the protection of the King of Appah, whose territory extends to the Bay of Bennin. Since they couldn’t fully trust the conqueror’s faith and promises, the men were always ready to flee there at the slightest sign of hostility; it was a safe haven because the Dahomes did not have canoes to chase them down, and even if they did, none of them knew how to operate them.
A few days after the Lord of Jaqueen had refused to take his usual Customs, another difficulty arose; for the Porters refused to bring up my Goods from the Sea side, except I would pay them double the price I did at my first coming. Thereupon I sent my Complaint to their Lord,[84] who acknowledged it was a great Imposition, but he sent me word, “It was not in his Power to oblige those sort of People to do me Justice; for by the stranding of the Dutch Ship, they had got so many Goods, that it had made them rich and proud; and should he go about to force them to bring up my Goods at the usual rates, they would forthwith quit the Country, and fly to Appah.” Being in these melancholy Circumstances, imposed on by all hands, and without hopes of redress, an accident relieved me very unexpectedly. For a few days after this, the Lord of the place sent for me; and going to him, he told me, “He had just then received Advice, that an English Ship was arrived in the Road of Whidaw; and he desired I would send my Boat there, to persuade the Captain to come to Jaqueen.” I answered, “I did not doubt but that Ship was the Italian Galley, Captain Dagge, who was known to him; for I had expected him some time, his Ship belonging to the same Gentleman as[85] mine did: But since I had received such bad usage from him and his People, he could not expect I would be so imprudent as to advise the Captain, who was in the same Interest with me, to come and receive the like Treatment: Adding, If I sent my Boat, it should be to desire Captain Dagge to stay at Whidaw, and send a Messenger to the King of Dahomè, to represent the usage I had met with from him; tho’, to let him see how loth I was to give any Offence that way, I should intirely forget what was past, if he would make me easy.” This immediately brought him to do me Justice: He took his usual Custom that very day, and the following went himself to the Sea side, to the Towns where the Porters lived, and persuaded them to carry my Goods at the usual rates.
A few days after the Lord of Jaqueen had refused to collect his usual fees, another problem came up; the Porters wouldn’t bring my Goods from the seaside unless I paid them double what I had paid when I first arrived. So, I sent my complaint to their Lord,[84] who acknowledged it was a significant burden, but he sent word back saying, “It’s not in my power to make those people treat you fairly; ever since the wreck of the Dutch Ship, they’ve gotten so many Goods that they’ve become wealthy and arrogant. If I try to force them to bring up your Goods at the usual prices, they’ll just leave the country and escape to Appah.” Being in this depressing situation, taken advantage of by everyone, and with no hope for a solution, I was unexpectedly relieved by an accident. A few days later, the Lord of the place called for me; when I met him, he said, “I just received word that an English Ship has arrived in the Road of Whidaw, and I’d like you to send your Boat there to convince the Captain to come to Jaqueen.” I replied, “I have no doubt that Ship is the Italian Galley, Captain Dagge, who is known to you; I’ve been expecting him for some time since his Ship is owned by the same gentleman as[85] mine. However, given how poorly I’ve been treated by him and his crew, you can’t expect me to be so reckless as to advise the Captain, who shares my interests, to come and face the same treatment. Instead, if I send my Boat, it will be to ask Captain Dagge to stay at Whidaw and send a Messenger to the King of Dahomè to report how I’ve been treated by him; although, to show that I’m reluctant to cause any offense, I would completely overlook the past if he would make things right for me.” This immediately prompted him to take action on my behalf: he collected his usual fee that very day, and the next day he went to the seaside to the towns where the Porters lived and persuaded them to bring my Goods at the usual rates.
Soon after this I received a Letter from Captain Dagge, desiring I would let him know how Affairs flood at Jaqueen. Having informed him of all matters, he concluded, it would be for our Owner’s Interest[86] if he stayed at Whidaw, where he had great Success; for that People being in a starving Condition, and obliged to sell their Servants and Children for Money and Goods, to buy Food from their Neighbours of Popoe; his Ship was soon filled with Negroes, and he had the good fortune to sail from the Coast three days before me. Not long after the Arrival of Captain Dagge, I was taken ill of a Fever; my Surgeon, a very eminent Man for Trade as well as his Profession, died in a few days after my being taken ill; and the rainy Season coming on, my white People both on board and on Shore grew sickly; and to add to my Misfortunes, the King of Dahomè’s Traders began to grow troublesome and imposing. Indeed I had one Comfort in this Distress; namely, that tho’ I was two days together without a white Man in the Factory with me, (occasioned by the Sickness) yet I had nothing stole from me, which I believe was owing to the severe Charge given by the King to the Lord of Jaqueen and his Brother, to take care of me and my Goods.[87] But as to the King of Dahomè’s Traders, when I objected to them my Agreement with their Master, producing the Writing I had made in his Presence, and calling the Linguist to witness, that I was not to take any Slaves but such as I liked; yet it signified nothing: For tho’ the Interpreter was so honest as to own it, yet he was as imposing as any other, pretending the King’s Orders for what they did. Nay, I began at last not to think my self safe, one of the Traders being so insolent as to present his Fusil at me, for refusing to take his bad Slaves. For tho’ they came to trade, yet they were always armed with Sword and Dagger, and a Boy carried their Gun for them. These People were far different from the Traders we used to deal with at Whidaw: For these came always in a modest manner to deal with us, and tho’ sometimes I owed them Goods on my Notes for ten days together, because the badness of the Sea prevented our landing them; yet they shewed no Uneasiness about it: Whereas, on the contrary, these Dahomè Traders would[88] come ten times a day with their Notes; tho’ they were sensible the Sea was so great on the Shore, that we could land no Goods. And when I expostulated with them, about the needless trouble they gave me and themselves, in coming so often to me to read their Notes; it not being in my Power to pay them, ’till I could get goods landed; they angrily replied, “They did not like a bit of Paper for their Slaves, because the writing might vanish from it; or else the Notes might be lost, and then they should lose their Payment.” Upon that I used to shew them my Book, telling them their Notes were entered therein, and should they lose them by any Accident, yet I would pay them by my Book: And as to the writing it would never go off the Paper; but this did no ways satisfy them.
Soon after that, I got a letter from Captain Dagge, asking me to update him on the situation at Jaqueen. After I filled him in on everything, he concluded it would be in our owner's best interest if he stayed at Whidaw, where he was doing really well. The locals were in such a desperate state that they had to sell their servants and children for money and goods to buy food from their neighbors in Popoe; as a result, his ship quickly filled up with Negroes, and he was fortunate enough to leave the coast three days before me. Not long after Captain Dagge arrived, I fell ill with a fever; my surgeon, a very accomplished man in both trade and medicine, passed away just a few days after I got sick. With the rainy season approaching, both my white crew members on board and on shore became ill. To add to my troubles, the traders from Dahomè started to become a nuisance and overbearing. I did have one piece of comfort during this hardship; even though I went two whole days without a white man in the factory with me due to the sickness, nothing was stolen from me, which I believe was thanks to the strict orders given by the King to the Lord of Jaqueen and his brother to look out for me and my belongings.[87] However, regarding the traders from Dahomè, when I reminded them of my agreement with their master, showing them the document I had written in his presence and calling the interpreter as a witness to confirm that I was only to take slaves that I wanted, it didn’t matter. Although the interpreter was honest enough to acknowledge it, he was just as imposing as everyone else, claiming it was the King's orders for their actions. Eventually, I started to feel unsafe; one trader got so bold that he aimed his gun at me when I refused to accept his poor-quality slaves. Although they came to trade, they were always armed with swords and daggers, and a boy carried their gun for them. These traders were completely different from those we usually dealt with at Whidaw: the latter would approach us in a respectful manner, and even when I owed them goods on my notes for ten days straight because rough seas prevented us from landing, they never showed any impatience about it. In contrast, the Dahomè traders would come to me ten times a day with their notes, fully aware that the sea was too rough for us to land any goods. When I protested about the unnecessary bother they caused me and themselves by coming to have me read their notes, which I couldn’t pay until I got goods unloaded, they angrily insisted, “They didn’t trust a piece of paper for their slaves because the writing might fade or the notes could be lost, and then they’d lose their payment.” In response, I would show them my book, telling them their notes were recorded in there, and even if they lost them somehow, I would still pay them based on my book. As for the writing, it wouldn’t just disappear from the paper; unfortunately, that didn’t satisfy them at all.
About this time several Portuguese Ships arrived in the Road of Whidaw and stay’d there, on a prospect of the Country’s being settled again; for the King of Dahomè had permitted a great number of the[89] common People to return, and they began to build them Houses near the English and French Forts. But some time after it appeared, that it was only done to deceive the Europeans. However the King of Dahomè being desirous of the Portuguese Gold, which they bring to purchase Negroes with, his Majesty sent a great many Slaves down to Whidaw, which made Trade dull with us at Jaqueen. For tho’ formerly great Numbers came to this place, from other Nations now destroyed by the Dahomes, there remains at present only one Country called Lucamee, lying towards the North-East, for Jaqueens to trade to. Which Nation, by means of a wide River, has escaped being made a Conquest to the barbarous and cruel Dahomes. As I was in this melancholy state, one day, my old Acquaintance the Captain (who had been so civil to me at the Camp) came to visit me; and the Linguist not being in the way, I made use of a little black Boy, who spoke pretty good English, and was entertained by me in the Factory as a Servant, to be my[90] Interpreter; ordering him to tell the Captain my Grievances, for which he seemed concerned. He told me he was a warlike Person, and so had no Knowledge of the Affairs of the Traders; but he was confident the Jaqueens were not tolerated in such things by the King. Then I bid the little Boy further inform him, That the Traders very much imposed upon the military Gentlemen of his Country, in selling them Muskets bought out of the French Factory, for the sake of a small Present. These being made in imitation of English Arms, were sent to the King, as if bought from me, by which means a bad repute was brought on our Arms; because the French Guns split in firing, and hurt the Soldiers; which is owing to their not being proved as ours are, with a good load of Gunpowder, before they are put into a Stock and finished. I observed, this very much moved him, so I made him a Present of some things, with a promise of a greater Reward, if he would go to the King, and let his Majesty know my Complaints. So[91] having considered the matter a little while, he agreed to go, charging the little Boy to keep the thing secret, on pain of being put to cruel Torments if he divulged it; and I soon after experienced the good Effects of his Journey.
Around this time, several Portuguese ships arrived in the harbor of Whidaw and stayed there, hoping the area would be settled again. The King of Dahomè had allowed many common people to return, and they began building houses near the English and French forts. But after a while, it turned out this was just a trick to mislead the Europeans. However, the King of Dahomè, eager for the Portuguese gold that they brought to buy Negroes, sent a large number of slaves down to Whidaw, which made trade slow for us in Jaqueen. Although many people used to come here from other nations, now destroyed by the Dahomes, only one country called Lucamee, located to the northeast, remains for the Jaqueens to trade with. This nation has managed to avoid conquest by the brutal and cruel Dahomes due to a wide river. While I was in this sad situation one day, my old acquaintance, the captain (who had been very kind to me at the camp), came to visit. With the linguist absent, I used a little black boy who spoke decent English and who worked for me in the factory as my interpreter. I instructed him to tell the captain my complaints, which seemed to concern him. He mentioned that he was a warrior and didn't know much about the traders' affairs, but he was sure the Jaqueens weren’t allowed to engage in such things by the king. I then asked the little boy to inform him that the traders were taking advantage of the military gentlemen in his country by selling them muskets bought from the French factory for a small gift. These guns were made to look like English arms and were sent to the king as if they had been purchased from me, damaging our reputation because the French guns burst when fired and injured the soldiers. This was because they weren’t properly tested with a good load of gunpowder before being finished. I noticed this really affected him, so I gave him a gift along with a promise of a bigger reward if he would go to the king and let his majesty know my complaints. After thinking it over for a bit, he agreed to go, warning the little boy to keep it secret, threatening cruel punishment if he revealed it; soon after, I saw the benefits of his journey.
The People of Jaqueen, as I mentioned before, were in very uneasy Circumstances. The King of Dahomè being informed of it, resolved to send the great Captain to their Lord, to settle all things to their Satisfaction. The Captain my Friend being got to the Camp before the Great Captain set out, and acquainting the King with my Complaints, it much incensed him against the Traders, and he caused the great Captain to go forthwith to Jaqueen, to settle all matters. He made such haste, that he brought the first news of his coming himself; and because he had a great Retinue, on the first report of his arrival, the Inhabitants of Jaqueen were going to fly to Appah; believing he was come in a hostile manner: But he soon made them easy, ordering the far greater part of his People to remain on the other[92] side of the River, which runs on the back part of the Town; and he came only with one hundred Attendants into the place. Upon the first notice of his coming, the Duke, Brother to the Lord of Jaqueen, went to receive him; and all the white Gentlemen in the Town, both Merchants and Commanders of Ships, assembled at the Door of the Dutch Factory, to salute him as he pass’d by that House. He was conducted to the Duke’s Court, with all the Honours the place could possibly afford. His Retinue was lodged near my Factory, which proved a great disturbance to me; for they made a dismal noise with their musical Instruments, both night and day; but on my complaining of it, they were afterwards removed.
The people of Jaqueen, as I mentioned earlier, were in a very difficult situation. The King of Dahomè, upon hearing about it, decided to send the great Captain to their Lord to sort everything out to their satisfaction. My friend, the Captain, arrived at the camp before the Great Captain set out and informed the King of my complaints, which angered him against the traders. He ordered the great Captain to go immediately to Jaqueen to resolve all the issues. He rushed so much that he personally brought the first news of his arrival. Because he had a large entourage, as soon as the locals heard he was coming, they started to flee to Appah, thinking he was coming to attack. But he quickly reassured them, directing most of his people to stay on the other side of the river that runs behind the town, and he only came with one hundred attendants. When news of his arrival spread, the Duke, who was the brother of the Lord of Jaqueen, went out to greet him, and all the European gentlemen in town, both merchants and ship captains, gathered at the door of the Dutch Factory to welcome him as he passed by. He was escorted to the Duke’s court with all the honors the place could provide. His entourage was originally housed near my factory, which caused me a lot of trouble since they made a terrible noise with their musical instruments day and night, but after I complained, they were later moved.
It seems the Great Captain, at his first coming into the Town, had given orders to some of his Officers, to seize all the Dahomè Traders. But by means of some Friend they had in their Retinue, notice was given them; whereupon several of them fled. However, about ten were[93] seized, and immediately sent in Irons to the King: And the Duke, brother to the Lord of Jaqueen, told me afterwards, “That when the Great Captain began to talk of Business with him, the first Question he asked, was, Whether the Traders had used me ill? To which he replied in the affirmative; Adding, He was in my Factory, when one of them presented his Piece at me, because I refused to buy the bad Slaves brought by him.” The great Captain upon that asked him, “Why he suffered me to be so used?” To which the Duke answered, “That not only he himself, but his Brother, had been treated by them with great Insolence; and that they were afraid to resent it, for fear they should represent their Actions in a bad Light to the King.” On this account the Great Captain said, they had talked enough upon that Point.
It seems the Great Captain, when he first arrived in the town, instructed some of his officers to capture all the Dahomè traders. However, thanks to a friend in their group, they were warned and several of them managed to escape. Still, around ten were[93] caught and sent in chains to the King. The Duke, who was the brother of the Lord of Jaqueen, later told me that when the Great Captain started discussing business with him, the first question he asked was whether the traders had treated me poorly. The Duke confirmed they had, adding that he was present when one of the traders aimed a gun at me because I refused to buy the inferior slaves he was selling. The Great Captain then asked him why he allowed me to be treated that way. The Duke replied that not only he but also his brother had been treated with great disrespect by them, and they were afraid to react because it might reflect poorly on them in front of the King. For this reason, the Great Captain stated they had discussed that matter enough.
We understood afterwards, that this great Man, at his return to the King, acquainting him with the Misbehaviour of the Traders, his Majesty ordered the Person[94] who presented his Piece at me, to be beheaded, with another, who had highly insulted me at the same time: And the others were kept in bonds, fed only with Bread and Water; and whenever it rained, they were put out into the Prison Court, and exposed till it had done raining. By this I found, that the Traders and the Linguist had shamefully belied the King; however, in Prudence I did not think fit to complain of the Interpreter, but only chid him in private; at which he was so frighted, that he left me, when the great Captain returned to their King.
We understood later that this great man, upon returning to the King, informed him about the bad behavior of the traders. His Majesty then ordered that the person who aimed his weapon at me be executed, along with another who had seriously insulted me at the same time. The others were kept in chains, given only bread and water; whenever it rained, they were taken out into the prison courtyard and left there until the rain stopped. From this, I realized that the traders and the linguist had shamefully lied about the King. However, I decided it was wise not to complain about the interpreter publicly, but to reprimand him privately. He was so frightened by this that he left me when the great captain returned to their King.
The next day after this Great Man’s arrival, all the white Gentlemen in the place went to wait on him at the Duke’s House, carrying him Presents; and I went amongst the rest. Upon my taking leave, I invited him to dine with me at my Factory the next day. He came accordingly with many Attendants, one of whom he admitted with the Duke, to sit at Table with us. He seemed to be much pleased with the Victuals, especially with a Ham; and was much surprized when I told him,[95] it was part of a Hog that had been killed six Months ago. I was so much diverted to see him handle a Fork, which it seems he had never used before, that I could hardly keep my Countenance, so aukwardly did he manage it. Amongst other dishes there was brought to the Table a Pye of minced meat. Of this he eat greedily, asking me, “How it was prepared?” I told him the manner; adding it was done by my Wife, and being put up in earthen Pans, it would keep in so hot a Country as this was, for six Months at least. He then asked me, “How many Wives I had?” I told him we were allowed by our Laws but one; on which he fell a laughing, saying, “He had five hundred, and wished fifty of them could prepare such meat for him as mine had done.” After this the Servants brought Bananas, with other Fruit of the Country, on Delft Plates. These Plates he was much taken with, and desired I would give him that he eat on, with the Knife, Fork, and Napkin he used. I told him he was welcome to[96] all on the Table: Of which the Linguist had no sooner informed him, but he spoke to his Servants, and they immediately swept all away, so suddenly, that they had like to have broke all the Plates, but they luckily escaped. I put on a good Face on the matter, tho’ I was something surprized to be so soon taken at my word, with the manner of it; so I said to him, “I would present him further with some Mugs and Cups, which I called for.”
The day after this important man's arrival, all the white gentlemen in the area went to visit him at the Duke’s House, bringing him gifts; I went along with them. When I took my leave, I invited him to have dinner with me at my factory the following day. He came with several attendants, one of whom he allowed to sit at the table with us. He seemed to really enjoy the food, especially the ham, and was quite surprised when I told him it was from a pig that had been killed six months ago. I found it amusing to see him use a fork, which he apparently had never used before; it was so awkward that I could hardly keep a straight face. Among the dishes served was a meat pie, which he ate eagerly, asking me how it was made. I explained the process, adding that my wife prepared it, and that when sealed in earthen pans, it would last in such a hot country for at least six months. He then asked me, “How many wives do you have?” I told him that our laws only permitted one, which made him laugh, saying, “I have five hundred, and I wish fifty of them could cook like yours!” After that, the servants brought bananas along with other local fruits on Delft plates. He was very taken with those plates and asked if I would give him the ones he ate from, along with the knife, fork, and napkin he used. I told him he was welcome to everything on the table. As soon as the linguist informed him of this, he instructed his servants, who quickly gathered everything up so suddenly that they almost broke all the plates, but fortunately, they didn’t. I tried to keep a good demeanor, although I was a bit surprised by how quickly he took me up on my offer. I then said to him that I would also present him with some mugs and cups, which I called for.
I had almost forgot to relate another Circumstance, full as odd as this. When we first sat down to dinner, some of his principal Servants who stood behind his Chair, would every now and then snatch off his Plate, a Slice of Ham or Fowl; and observing he did not rebuke them for it, I bid the Linguist tell him, “His Servants should not want for Victuals after we had dined; for it was not the white Peoples custom, to let their Guests Attendants go home hungry;” so he ordered them to be quiet for the future.
I almost forgot to mention another rather odd situation. When we first sat down for dinner, some of his main servants who were standing behind him would occasionally take his plate, grabbing a slice of ham or chicken. Noticing that he didn’t scold them for it, I told the linguist to let him know, “His servants shouldn’t go without food after we’ve eaten; it’s not the custom of white people to send their guests' servants home hungry.” So, he instructed them to stop doing that in the future.
After dinner we drank both our Kings healths, and he grew very merry, preferring Punch to other Liquors. When he took his leave of me in the Evening, he express’d great Satisfaction at his Entertainment: Moreover he told me, “He design’d to go and see the Sea the next day, (which was about three Miles off) and as he had never yet seen it, nor a Ship, he should be glad of my Company.” But I was obliged to excuse my self, on account of my late Illness, from which I was not perfectly recovered. So I told him, “I would order my Officer in the Tent, to entertain him in the best manner he could; and if he would be pleased to go on board my Ship to see her, all possible Care should be taken of him.”
After dinner, we toasted to both our healths, and he became quite cheerful, favoring punch over other drinks. When he said goodbye in the evening, he expressed great satisfaction with his time here. He also mentioned, “I plan to go see the sea tomorrow, which is about three miles away, and since I’ve never seen it or a ship before, I’d love your company.” But I had to excuse myself because I was still recovering from my recent illness. I told him, “I’ll make sure my officer in the tent entertains you as best as he can; and if you’d like to visit my ship, we’ll take great care of you.”
I must now leave this great Man for a while, and give an Account of a remarkable thing that happened whilst he was at the Sea side. For the right understanding of it, the Reader is to know, That a few days before the great Captain came to Jaqueen, the Linguist brought me two[98] Female Negroes, saying, “The King desired, I would buy them, and promise I would not let them be redeemed by any one that should offer to do it:” After I had viewed these Women, one of which was turned of fifty, and the other about twenty Years old, I told the Linguist, “The first was past her Labour, and not for my purpose; but I would buy the other.” He replied, “He could not part them; adding, It would highly oblige the King if I took them both:” But suspecting he made use of the King’s Name, to get rid of an old Woman, I refused it, and he carried them away. I little suspected then what would happen to this poor Creature, which I shall presently relate.
I must now leave this great man for a bit and share a story about something remarkable that happened while he was at the seaside. To understand it correctly, the reader should know that a few days before the great captain arrived at Jaqueen, the linguist brought me two[98] female Negroes and said, “The king asked me to buy them and promised that I wouldn’t let anyone redeem them if they made an offer.” After I looked at these women, one of whom was over fifty and the other around twenty years old, I told the linguist, “The first one is too old for my needs, but I would buy the younger one.” He replied, “He couldn’t separate them,” adding that it would greatly please the king if I took both. But I suspected he was using the king’s name to get rid of the older woman, so I refused, and he took them back. At that moment, I had no idea what would happen to this poor woman, which I will explain shortly.
The great Captain, as he had told me, went the next day to the Sea side, accompanied by abundance of People who came from the inland Country, which indeed they daily did in great Numbers, to see so rare a sight, now the ways were open to them. There lay then at Anchor, in the Road of Jaqueen, the Katherine Galley[99] which I commanded, being a fine Ship of near three hundred Tuns burthen; and two Portuguese Vessels. This sight exceedingly surprized him, as well as did the Sea, which came rolling and roaring with its Billows on the Shore; so that he stood for some time fixed as if he had been a Statue, till he heard the Guns fired from the Katherine, wherewith I had ordered him to be saluted, on a signal made from our Tent. Being by the Noise of the Guns roused out of his Astonishment, my Officer then invited him to go to the Tent to dinner, which he readily accepted. Whilst he was at dinner, he could not sit still three minutes together, his Curiosity still prompting him to go and look on the Sea and Ships.
The great Captain, as he had told me, went to the seaside the next day, accompanied by a large crowd of people from the inland country, who indeed came in great numbers every day to see such a rare sight now that the ways were open to them. Anchored in the road of Jaqueen was the Katherine Galley[99], which I commanded, a fine ship of nearly three hundred tons burden, along with two Portuguese vessels. This sight amazed him, as did the sea, which rolled and roared with its waves crashing on the shore, leaving him standing for a while as if he were a statue until he heard the cannon fire from the Katherine, which I had ordered to salute him in response to a signal made from our tent. Roused from his astonishment by the sound of the guns, my officer then invited him to join us in the tent for dinner, which he readily accepted. While he was at dinner, he couldn’t sit still for three minutes, his curiosity constantly prompting him to go and look at the sea and the ships.
As the Water near the Shore is very shallow, our Boats cannot approach nearer than within two Cables length, so that we are obliged to make use of Cannoes, which draw much less Water than our Boats, to land our Goods: And also the fresh Water for the Ship’s use, is rafted[100] in Casks by Ropes from the Boats. The great Man was so pleased with the sight, that he went too near the Sea to see it; in which instant a Wave coming with great force, reached him so, that with the surprize he fell on his back; by which Accident some salt Water got into his Stomach. His Servants seeing him fall, immediately run to his Assistance; and taking him up, carried him to our Tent, where he drank half a pint of Brandy, to qualify the salt Water he had swallowed down. Tho’ he had met with this mischance, he stay’d at the Tent till the Evening, and then left the place with reluctance, to come to Town; so much delighted was he with this sight. It was about nine a clock at night when he returned to Jaqueen, being usher’d in with the hideous noise of their musical Instruments, and the Acclamations of the People.
As the water near the shore is very shallow, our boats can't get closer than two cable lengths, so we have to use canoes, which draw much less water than our boats, to land our goods. The fresh water for the ship's use is also railed in casks using ropes from the boats. The important man was so impressed by the sight that he went too close to the sea to get a better look; at that moment, a strong wave hit him, surprising him so much that he fell on his back, causing some salt water to get into his stomach. His servants saw him fall and immediately rushed to help him. They picked him up and brought him to our tent, where he drank half a pint of brandy to counteract the salt water he had swallowed. Even though he had this mishap, he stayed at the tent until the evening and reluctantly left the place to go back to town, so delighted was he with what he had seen. He returned to Jaqueen around nine o'clock at night, greeted by the loud noise of their musical instruments and the cheers of the crowd.
Soon after, one of his principal Servants, together with the Linguist, came to me, saying, “The Great Man had sent them to return me thanks for the kind Entertainment[101] he had received at my Tent; that he designed to set out next day for the King’s Camp, and should be glad to see me before he went.”
Soon after, one of his main servants, along with the translator, came to me, saying, “The Great Man sent them to thank me for the kind hospitality he received at my tent; that he planned to leave the next day for the King’s Camp and would be happy to see me before he left.”
The Servant being gone, the Linguist told me in private, “That the oldest Woman whom I had refused to buy, had that day been sacrificed to the Sea, by order of the great Captain. For she had highly offended the King, and as I would not take her, his Majesty had ordered her to be destroyed this way, in the room of another Victim that was designed for the same Purpose.” I asked him, What Crimes she had committed? He replied hastily, “Did I think he knew the King’s Secrets? adding, She had lived a long time in the Court, with good Repute till now.” I then wish’d in my mind I had bought her; but only said to the Linguist, “I wondered he should have a hand in such Cruelty, having been bred up amongst white People.” To which he answered, “Great Mens Commands were not to be disputed, especially there being[102] no one but himself of the Dahomes, that durst go off in a Cannoe with her.” Whereupon he told me the following Story; “The Woman’s Hands being tied behind her, and her Feet across, she was put into the Cannoe, and carried off about half a Mile from the Shore: And then he ordered the Rowers to throw her over board; which they had no sooner done, but he saw some Sharks (voracious Fishes very common in those Seas) tear her to pieces in an instant.” On hearing this Account I pitied the Fate of this poor Creature, for I intirely credited the Story, knowing full well the Barbarity of those People. But the next day I was greatly surprized, with a Letter from my chief Mate, informing me, that the Woman was on board our Ship: Which happened in this manner. It seems, neither my People at the Tent, nor those in our Boats, which lay at the Moorings near the Shore, knew any thing of the real occasion of the Cannoe’s going off. For the Woman was put very privately into the[103] Cannoe. They only thought the Linguist was gone, with a design to see some of the Ships. When he came on shore again, one of our Boats went just then from the Moorings, in order to go on board our Ship. Being got about half way, the Officer in the Boat spied something floating on the Sea, which at his coming nearer, he perceived to be a human Body lying on its back; and now and then spurting Water out at the Mouth. This showing it was still living, he ordered it to be taken into the Boat, being bound in the same manner as the Linguist had told me. Immediately they untied this poor Woman, chafed her Limbs, and rolled her Body about, whereupon she discharged a good quantity of salt Water out of her Mouth. Then they carried her on board the Ship, not knowing in the least the occasion of her being in the Sea, and extremely wondering she had escaped the Sharks, who are usually so voracious, that when a dead Person is thrown overboard, or a living one falls into the Sea by Accident, they are in an instant torn to pieces[104] by those voracious Animals. So that this poor Creature seemed to have a miraculous Escape; and the knowledge of the greediness of these Sharks, I suppose, induced the Linguist to tell me, that he actually saw her torn to pieces; verily believing it would so happen, which his Fears would not let him stay to see, on account of the great swell the Billows of the Sea had at that time.
The Servant had left when the Linguist privately told me, “The oldest Woman I had refused to buy was sacrificed to the Sea today by order of the great Captain. She had seriously offended the King, and since I wouldn’t take her, his Majesty ordered her to be killed this way, in place of another Victim intended for the same purpose.” I asked him what crimes she had committed. He replied quickly, “Did I think he knew the King’s Secrets?” adding, “She had lived a long time in the Court with a good reputation until now.” I then wished I had bought her, but only said to the Linguist, “I wonder how he could be part of such cruelty, having grown up among white people.” He responded, “Commands from great men shouldn't be questioned, especially since there was no one but him from the Dahomey who could dare take her out in a Canoe.” Then he told me this story: “With her Hands tied behind her and her Feet crossed, she was put into the Canoe and taken about half a mile from the Shore. Then he ordered the Rowers to throw her overboard; as soon as they did, he saw some Sharks (greedy fish very common in those waters) tear her to pieces instantly.” Hearing this account, I felt sorry for this poor woman, completely believing his story, knowing full well the brutality of those people. But the next day, I was greatly surprised to receive a letter from my chief Mate, informing me that the Woman was on board our Ship. This happened like this: Neither my people at the Tent nor those in our Boats that were moored near the Shore knew the real reason for the Canoe’s departure. The Woman was put into the Canoe very secretly. They only thought the Linguist had left to see some of the Ships. When he came ashore again, one of our Boats left the Moorings to go on board our Ship. About halfway, the Officer in the Boat spotted something floating in the Sea, and as he got closer, he realized it was a human Body lying on its back, occasionally spitting water out of its mouth. This indicated she was still alive, so he ordered her to be brought into the Boat, bound just as the Linguist had told me. They immediately untied this poor Woman, rubbed her Limbs, and rolled her Body around, causing her to cough up a good amount of seawater. Then they took her on board the Ship, having no idea why she had been in the Sea, and were extremely surprised she had escaped the Sharks, who are usually so greedy that when a dead person is thrown overboard, or someone living falls into the Sea by accident, they are immediately torn to pieces by those hungry creatures. So this poor woman seemed to have made a miraculous escape; and knowing how greedy these Sharks are, I suppose the Linguist told me he actually saw her being torn to pieces, truly believing that would happen, which his fears wouldn’t let him stay to see, because of the rough swells of the Sea at that time.
Upon my receiving the above-mentioned account from the Mate, tho’ pleas’d with the safety of the poor Woman, yet it filled me with Apprehensions, if the King of Dahomè should come to know it: For he might pretend, his Fetiche, or God, being disappointed of this Sacrifice by us, would revenge it on me, or at least oblige me to make up the Affair with large Presents. So having considered of the matter, I writ to the chief Mate, to charge our People to keep the thing secret; it being of the utmost Consequence to us all to do it: Which they accordingly did. Some time after, going on board the Ship, I examined this Woman[105] by the Linguist, but she would never confess the reason of the King’s displeasure against her; alledging she knew not that she had in any respect offended him. However, I found by the Linguist, that he suspected, it was on account of her assisting some of the King’s Women in their Amours.
When I got the report from the Mate, I was relieved that the poor woman was safe, but it made me anxious about what would happen if the King of Dahomè found out. He might claim that his Fetiche, or God, would be angry with us for not providing the sacrifice and could retaliate against me or at least make me give him lavish gifts to make up for it. So, after thinking it over, I wrote to the chief Mate, instructing our crew to keep this matter confidential, as it was extremely important for all of us to do so. They followed my orders. Some time later, when I boarded the ship, I questioned this woman through the Linguist, but she would never admit why the King was upset with her, claiming she didn’t know that she had offended him in any way. However, I learned from the Linguist that he suspected her of helping some of the King’s women with their affairs.
This Woman being a sensible Person, did us good service in the Voyage. For she was known to several of the Negroes on board, and by her talking to and advising them, made them easy in their Minds: She observed to them, amongst other things, “That as we had shown such Kindness to her, first in saving her Life, and since in taking care of her, who might be reckoned an useless Person to us, on account of her Age; so they had all the reason in the World to believe we were much better people than their own Countrymen; and that the strange Stories they had been formerly told of white People, must be false.” The female Negroes, who used always to be the most troublesome to us,[106] on account of the noise and clamour they made, were kept in such Order and Decorum by this Woman, that I had never the like in any Voyage before: And when I came to Antegoa, Charles Dunbar Esq; Surveyor General of Barbadoes, and the Leeward Islands, on my Recommendation, bought her, and I was not a little pleased she had got so generous and good a Master.
This woman, being a sensible person, helped us greatly on the voyage. She was familiar with several of the Black passengers on board, and by speaking to and advising them, she eased their minds. She pointed out to them, among other things, “That since we had shown such kindness to her, first in saving her life, and later in taking care of her, even though she might be seen as useless to us because of her age, they had every reason to believe we were much better people than their own countrymen; and that the strange stories they had previously heard about white people must be false.” The female Black passengers, who usually caused us the most trouble with their noise and commotion, were kept in such order and decorum by this woman that I had never seen anything like it on any other voyage before. When I reached Antigua, Charles Dunbar Esq; Surveyor General of Barbados and the Leeward Islands, bought her on my recommendation, and I was quite pleased that she found such a generous and good master.
But to return again to the great Captain: When he was ready to depart from Jaqueen, all the Europeans in the Place waited on him to the side of the River, that runs on the back part of the Town. Upon taking leave I told him, “I wanted but eighty Negroes to compleat my Cargo,” and he promised he would acquaint the King with it; and I might be sure his Majesty would send them down to me forthwith. However, this did not happen according to my Expectation; for I understood afterwards the King had no Slaves by him for sale, tho’ he had great numbers of captive Negroes, which tilled his Grounds, and did other Work. For,[107] it seems, after they are once inrolled for that Service, his Majesty never sells them, unless they are guilty of very great Crimes.
But back to the great Captain: When he was about to leave Jaqueen, all the Europeans in the area went with him to the river at the back of the town. When we said our goodbyes, I told him, “I just need eighty Negroes to complete my cargo,” and he promised he would let the King know. He assured me that his Majesty would send them to me right away. However, that didn’t happen as I expected; later I found out the King didn’t have any slaves for sale, even though he had a lot of captured Negroes working his land and doing other tasks. It seems that once they are enrolled for that service, his Majesty never sells them unless they commit very serious crimes. For, [107]
After the great Captain’s departure, I was obliged to wait a long while for a dispatch; at last the desired Time came, and the King’s Factors that brought the Negroes behaved themselves so well towards me, that I had no reason to complain of them. The principal amongst them told me, “The King was much surprized, that I had not been dispatch’d before; and that his Majesty had punished those severely, who had been the occasion of my long stay at Jaqueen: That if my Affairs would admit of my going to the Camp, the King was desirous to see me again there, to discourse, and settle Matters, for the mutual Interest of himself, and the Europeans trading to his Country; for when I was with him before, the great Hurry of Affairs his Majesty had then on his Hands, did not allow him sufficient time to talk of Business.” I desired the Gentleman to[108] return the King my due Acknowledgments for all his Favours; “and that I should have been very glad and ready to have waited again on his Majesty at the Camp: But the bad state of health I was then in, did not allow it; of which himself being an Eye-Witness, I desired he would be pleased to inform the King of it: Adding, I should not fail, on my arrival into England, to tell my Countrymen who trade to this place, how great and generous a Prince I had been entertained by; hoping (if God bless’d me) to return again in a twelvemonth at farthest.” So having made the Traders some small Presents, they took their Leaves, returning many thanks for what I had given them.
After the great Captain left, I had to wait a long time for news; finally, the moment I had been waiting for arrived, and the King’s representatives who brought the Negroes treated me so well that I had no complaints about them. The main one among them said to me, “The King was very surprised that you hadn’t been sent off earlier; and that his Majesty had punished those severely who caused your long delay at Jaqueen: If your matters allow you to come to the Camp, the King is eager to see you again to talk things over and settle matters for the mutual benefit of himself and the Europeans trading in his Country, since when I was with him before, the great rush of issues he was dealing with left him little time to discuss business.” I asked the gentleman to[108] kindly convey my sincere thanks to the King for all his kindness; “and that I would have been very happy and willing to visit his Majesty at the Camp again, but my poor health at the time did not permit it; since he himself witnessed my condition, I requested he inform the King about it: I added that when I returned to England, I would definitely tell my countrymen who trade here how great and generous a Prince I had been hosted by; hoping (if God permits) to come back again within a year at the latest.” After giving the traders some small gifts, they took their leave, expressing many thanks for what I had given them.
As soon as I had finished my Affairs with these People, I waited on the Lord of Jaqueen, and told him, “That having compleated my Ship’s Cargoe of Negroes, I design’d to go on board in two days time, desiring he would be pleased to pay me the ballance of an account that was between us.” This[109] he readily promised, but never performed it. Moreover, the next day, having paid his Brother the rest of the Customs, and my Servants their Wages, my Store-house was soon after plundered in a violent manner: But, by good fortune, there were in it, only things of small value. I complained of this Usage, but had no Redress. However, I did not think proper to threaten, as I had formerly done, “That I would inform the King of Dahomè of it;” but quietly putting up the Affront, I went to the Sea side the next day, where I was obliged to lie all night in our Tent, because the Sea ran high on the Shore; but the next morning it being calmer, I got on board to my great Satisfaction, having, through the goodness of Providence, compleated my Affairs, much beyond my Expedition, considering I had so melancholy a Prospect, when I first came to this Country.
As soon as I wrapped up my business with these people, I met with the Lord of Jaqueen and told him, “Since I've finished loading my ship with Negroes, I plan to board in two days. I would appreciate it if you could pay me the balance of the account we have.” This[109] he readily promised, but he never followed through. Additionally, the next day, after paying his brother the remaining customs fees and my servants their wages, my storehouse was violently looted shortly after. Luckily, there were only items of little value inside. I complained about this treatment but received no remedy. However, I chose not to make threats as I had previously done, saying “I would inform the King of Dahomè about it;” instead, I quietly brushed off the insult. The next day, I went to the seaside, where I had to sleep in our tent because the waves were high along the shore. Fortunately, the following morning was calmer, and I was able to board my ship with great satisfaction, as I had managed to settle my affairs much quicker than expected, especially considering the gloomy outlook I had when I first arrived in this country.
The first of July 1727, we sailed from the Road of Jaqueen, having on board above 600 Negroes. I had a tedious Passage to the West-Indies of seventeen Weeks,[110] which obliged us to stop at several places for Water and Provision. But at length we arrived at Antegoa, where the Cargo of Negroes (who had stood very well) came to a good Market: And having lain there for a Cargo of Sugars, we sailed from thence the latter end of February, and got safe into the River of Thames, the 25th of April 1728, having been sixteen Months on this remarkable Voyage.
On the first of July 1727, we set sail from the Road of Jaqueen, carrying over 600 Negroes on board. I had a long journey to the West-Indies that lasted seventeen weeks,[110] which forced us to stop at several locations for water and supplies. Eventually, we arrived at Antegoa, where the cargo of Negroes (who were in good condition) fetched a good price. After staying there to pick up a load of sugars, we departed at the end of February and safely reached the River of Thames on the 25th of April 1728, having been on this remarkable Journey for sixteen months.

A
Add-on
Containing an Account of what happened to the King and People of Whidaw, and the Dahomes, since I came away from thence, to the Time of my return thither in the Month of February 1729-30. All which I was informed of, by some white Gentlemen of good Credit, who resided at Jaqueen all the Time I was absent.
Containing a report on what occurred with the King and the People of Whidaw, and the Dahomes, since I left there until my return in February 1729-30. All of this information came from some reputable white gentlemen who stayed in Jaqueen during my absence.
UPON my coming to England, being in a bad State of Health, I desired leave of my Owner to stay at home a Season, which he was pleased to grant me; and appointed Captain John Dagge to command the Ship I had been in. He made a successful Voyage, and returned with her in the Month[112] of August 1729: As I was by that time very well recovered, my Owner was pleased to send me again to the Coast of Guinea in the Katherine Galley. Having therefore spent some time on the Windward and Gold Coast, I proceeded for Whidaw. In my way to that place I stop’d at Great Popoe, which lies a few Leagues to the Windward of Whidaw. Being informed there, that the late King of Whidaw was near that place, with Captain Ossue, one of his principal Cabociers or Lords, on two barren sandy Islands, with many other People, I sent my first Mate on Shore with a Present to each of them. He returned at night, with some of the King’s People, who brought me a Goat from him: Saying, “Their Master being in a poor Condition, had nothing better to send me.” And they having bought some few things, I sent them on Shore again. After they were gone, my Mate gave me the following account, “That the King and Captain Ossue, had with them many Thousands of People who lived in a miserable manner, the[113] Islands they were on being so barren, that they produced nothing: But by means of the River which separated them from the Continent, they were very well secured from the Dahomes Power; who not understanding the Management of Cannoes, could not invade them. Moreover, they had planted several great Guns, which secured the Passes, so that they were in no fear of the Enemies. But then, on the other hand, they could not sow Corn, or other Pulse in that barren place, but were supplied with what they wanted by their Neighbours of Great and Little Popoe. However, this constantly decreased their Numbers, they being obliged to sell their Wives, Children, and Servants for Provisions and other necessaries, because they had no Money left.”
UPON my arrival in England, feeling unwell, I asked my owner for permission to stay home for a while, which he kindly granted. He appointed Captain John Dagge to take command of the ship I had been on. He completed a successful voyage and returned with her in August 1729. By that time, I had recovered well, so my owner decided to send me back to the Coast of Guinea on the Katherine Galley. After spending some time on the Windward and Gold Coast, I headed towards Whidaw. On my way there, I stopped at Great Popoe, which is a few leagues upwind of Whidaw. While there, I learned that the former King of Whidaw was nearby, along with Captain Ossue, one of his main lords, on two barren sandy islands with many other people. I sent my first mate ashore with a gift for each of them. He returned that night with some of the king’s people, who brought me a goat from him, saying, “Their master is in a poor condition and had nothing better to give.” After buying a few things, I sent them back ashore. Once they left, my mate gave me this report: “The King and Captain Ossue had many thousands of people living in miserable conditions on the barren islands, which produced nothing. However, thanks to the river separating them from the mainland, they were well protected from Dahome’s power, as they didn’t know how to manage canoes and couldn’t invade them. They had also set up several large guns to secure the entrances, so they weren’t afraid of enemies. On the flip side, they couldn’t sow any corn or other crops in that barren place but were supported by their neighbors in Great and Little Popoe. Unfortunately, this constantly reduced their numbers, as they had to sell their wives, children, and servants for food and other necessities because they had no money left.”
From Great Popoe I went to the Road of Whidaw, where being informed there was little Trade, I proceeded for Jaqueen, which is seven Leagues to the Eastward of it; and anchored in that road the 20th of February 1729-30: At my going on Shore there, the King of Dahomè’s Agent[114] came to see me; and upon my enquiring after his Master’s welfare, he told me, “He would send a Messenger to inform his Majesty of my Arrival: But as the King was then in his own Country, far inland, it would be at least twenty days before he could have an Answer.” At his taking leave, he promised to let me know his Master’s Pleasure on the return of the Messenger. Accordingly he came to see me again, about three weeks after his former visit, and told me, “The King was very glad to hear of my being once more arrived at Jaqueen; but as he was then far within Land, tho’ he was desirous of seeing me again, yet he could not in reason require it: His Master being sensible, such a long Journey would be neither safe for my Health, nor suitable to my Business; but in case the King came to Ardra, whilst I was at Jaqueen, which is but two days journey off, and where I had formerly been with his Majesty, he should be very glad to see me there once more.” However,[115] this not happening, I had not the Fortune to see the King a second time.
From Great Popoe, I went to the Road of Whidaw, where I was told there wasn't much trade, so I headed for Jaqueen, which is seven leagues to the east. I anchored in that road on the 20th of February 1729-30. When I went ashore there, the King of Dahomè’s agent came to see me. When I asked about his Master's well-being, he told me, “He would send a messenger to inform his Majesty of my arrival. But since the King was currently in his own country, far inland, it would take at least twenty days before he could get a response.” As he took his leave, he promised to update me on his Master's wishes upon the messenger's return. He did come to see me again about three weeks later and said, “The King was very glad to hear I had arrived back in Jaqueen; however, since he was far inland, although he was eager to see me again, he couldn't reasonably request it. His Master understood that such a long journey wouldn’t be safe for my health or suitable for my business. But if the King came to Ardra while I was at Jaqueen, which is only two days away and where I had previously visited him, he would be very happy to see me again.” However, since that didn't happen, I wasn't fortunate enough to see the King a second time.
I now come to relate what I heard from several white Gentlemen residing at Jaqueen, ever since my former Voyage, concerning the Whidaws and the Dahomes. The King of Whidaw, with abundance of his People, having fled to the Islands formerly mentioned, the King of Dahomè was disappointed in his design of destroying him, as he had always intended. So that he contented himself with keeping Possession of the Country of Whidaw, by an Army encamp’d at Sabee, which had been the principal place of the Kingdom, till destroyed by him. But in time this Army being much diminished, it incouraged Captain Ossue to leave the Islands, and settle himself, with many of his People, near the French Fort, which is about four Miles from Sabee; believing the great Guns therein would be a sufficient Protection from the Dahomes, in case they should offer to disturb him. This Fort had a dry Ditch, with mud Walls made of the Earth that was dug out of it; and was a square[116] place with Towers at each Corner, on which were mounted several Cannons; and their Lodgings, Storehouses, and even their Magazine of Gunpowder, were covered with Rushes, according to the Custom of that Country; which occasioned a terrible Misfortune, as shall be immediately related.
I’m now going to share what I heard from several white gentlemen living in Jaqueen since my last voyage, about the Whidaws and the Dahomes. The King of Whidaw and many of his people fled to the islands I mentioned earlier, which disappointed the King of Dahomè in his plan to destroy him as he always intended. So, he settled for keeping control of the Whidaw territory with an army camped at Sabee, which had been the main city of the kingdom until he destroyed it. Over time, this army was significantly reduced, encouraging Captain Ossue to leave the islands and establish himself, along with many of his people, near the French fort that's about four miles from Sabee. He believed that the big guns there would be enough protection against the Dahomes if they tried to disturb him. This fort had a dry ditch and earth walls made from the dirt dug out of it; it was a square place with towers at each corner, where several cannons were mounted. Their living quarters, storehouses, and even their gunpowder magazine were covered with rushes, following the custom of that country, which led to a terrible misfortune, as will be explained next.
The King of Dahomè being informed of Captain Ossue’s return into his Country, resolved to send an Army to drive him out; which the other having notice of, retired with many of his People into the French Fort: Ossue little thinking at that time, that the Governor was the occasion of his Enemies coming in order to betray them.
The King of Dahomè learned about Captain Ossue’s return to his land and decided to send an army to force him out. Once Ossue found out, he withdrew with many of his people into the French Fort. At that moment, Ossue had no idea that the Governor was the one who had set up his enemies to come in order to betray them.
The next day after he and his People were received into the Fort, the Dahomè Army came down, and being informed the French had given them Protection, contrary to a secret Promise their King had received from the Governor, they assaulted the Fort. But having nothing but small Arms to make their Attack, it would have availed little, had not the[117] Thatch of the Houses within the Fort taken Fire. This Accident alarmed the white Men, who knowing there was a great quantity of Gunpowder in their Magazine, and no possibility of stopping the Fire, fled to the English Fort, which was within Musquet-Shot of their own, and so saved themselves: But the black People not being so sensible of their Danger, suffered very much by the blowing up of the Magazine, there being above one thousand of them killed, besides many wounded by this Accident. However, in the Confusion, and under cover of the Smoke, Captain Ossue, and several of his People, escaped to the English Fort: Where Governor Wilson, who then resided there for the African Company, generously gave them Protection; and to prevent Accidents, ordered immediately all the Houses in the Fort to be unthatch’d, and by firing on the Dahomes with his Cannon, killed several, and kept the rest at a distance.
The next day after he and his people were welcomed into the Fort, the Dahomè Army came down. When they learned that the French had granted them protection, which went against a secret promise their king had received from the Governor, they attacked the Fort. However, since they only had small arms for their assault, it wouldn’t have mattered much if the [117] thatch of the houses inside the Fort hadn’t caught fire. This incident alarmed the white men, who, knowing there was a large amount of gunpowder in their magazine and being unable to extinguish the fire, fled to the English Fort, which was within musket range of their own, thus saving themselves. The black people, however, were not as aware of their danger and suffered greatly when the magazine exploded, with over a thousand of them killed and many more wounded as a result. Still, amidst the chaos and shrouded in smoke, Captain Ossue and several of his men managed to escape to the English Fort. There, Governor Wilson, who was stationed there for the African Company, kindly offered them protection. To prevent further problems, he immediately ordered all the houses in the Fort to be stripped of thatch and fired upon the Dahomes with his cannon, killing several and keeping the others at bay.
The Dahomes having taken the French Fort, sheltered themselves therein; and[118] the next morning sent a principal Man amongst them to Governor Wilson, to know the reason why he had fired on their Army. To which he answered, “That they having come down out of the Country in a hostile manner, without giving him the least notice, and attacked his Neighbours the French, he looked on it as the common Cause of all the Europeans settled there, who were bound to assist one another.” To this the Dahomes replied, “That when they came down, they had no design to attack the French Fort, for the King had no quarrel with the white Men: But the Governor having taken Captain Ossue and his People into the French Fort, contrary to his Promise, it obliged them to act as they had done.” At the same time they told the Governor to his Face, “That he had first sent to their King by a French Surgeon, then residing with their Master, to persuade his Majesty to send an Army down, to destroy Captain Ossue and his People; promising[119] at the same time he would give them no Protection.” This the French Governor denied, but all that were present believed it to be too true; and by this means he let the Dahomes see, that white Men (whom they had before a high opinion of) could be the basest of Villains, when their Interest tempted them thereto. For it was much suspected, that the Governour had contrived the whole Affair, in order to squeeze a large Sum of Money from Captain Ossue to protect him, and for some other infamous Views. However, he met afterwards with a suitable Reward, being killed by the Whidaws, whom he had so much injured.
The Dahomes took the French Fort and made it their base; and[118] the next morning they sent a key representative to Governor Wilson to ask why he had attacked their Army. He replied, “Since you came down from the Country in a hostile way without any warning and attacked my neighbors, the French, I see it as a shared concern for all the Europeans here, who are obligated to help one another.” The Dahomes responded, “When we came down, we had no intention of attacking the French Fort, as the King had no issue with the white Men: But your decision to take Captain Ossue and his people into the French Fort, against your promise, forced us to act as we did.” They also confronted the Governor directly, stating, “You had first sent a message to our King through a French Surgeon who was working with our Master, urging him to send an army down to destroy Captain Ossue and his people; at the same time, you promised you wouldn't offer them any protection.” The French Governor denied this, but everyone present believed it was likely true; through this, the Dahomes realized that white Men (whom they had previously respected) could be the most despicable villains when their interests were at stake. It was widely suspected that the Governor had orchestrated the whole situation to extract a large sum of money from Captain Ossue for protection and for some other shady reasons. Nevertheless, he eventually received fitting retribution, being killed by the Whidaws, whom he had wronged so deeply.
As soon as the King of Dahomè was informed of the taking of the French Fort, he sent this Message to the French Governor; “that he had brought this Misfortune on himself by his Perfidy, for he had no quarrel to his Nation; therefore he would order his Soldiers to repair the Fort, which had been greatly damaged by the Powder: Or if he did not desire this, he might depart[120] with all the Frenchmen to his own Country.” After this, the Ships that lay then in the Road of Whidaw had good Trade for Women and Children, which the Dahomes had taken of Captain Ossue’s People, but there were few Men taken; many of them being lost when the Magazine blew up: and the rest having fled to the Island which their King was in.
As soon as the King of Dahomè heard about the capture of the French Fort, he sent a message to the French Governor saying, “You brought this disaster upon yourself by your betrayal, as you had no conflict with my people. Therefore, I will instruct my soldiers to repair the Fort, which was severely damaged by the explosion. If you don’t want this, you can leave[120] with all the Frenchmen and return to your own country.” After that, the ships that were anchored in the harbor of Whidaw had a thriving trade for women and children, whom the Dahomes had taken from Captain Ossue’s crew, but there were few men captured; many lost their lives when the armory exploded, and the others fled to the island where their King was located.
I come now to relate a great Misfortune which befel the Dahomes, some Months after they had taken the French Fort. For the better understanding of it, the Reader is to know, that the King of Dahomè having conquered several Countries within a few Years, and depopulated them; the King of Weemey’s Sons, with other Princes, (whose Fathers this Conqueror had taken in War, and beheaded) fled to a far Inland Potent Nation called the J-oes. The King of Whidaw having, after Ossue’s Defeat, found means to send Messengers to the King of this Country, they, and the others that had fled to him for Protection, did at last, through their earnest Sollicitations, obtain[121] an Army to march against the King of Dahomè, whom they all look’d upon as a most cruel Destroyer of Mankind. This Nation of J-oe fight all on Horseback, and living a great way on the North towards Nubia, they can at no other time march to the Southward, but when the Season for Forage, and the dry Weather sets in. The King of Dahomè had notice of their coming, a few days before they reached his Country; and he having formerly experienced how terrible such Numbers of Horse had been to his Army, which consists of none but foot Soldiers; he resolved to bury his Riches, burn his Towns, and then fly into the Woods and Thickets with his People; which is a common thing amongst the Negroes, for the weaker side to do, when at War; for they have no fortified Towns as in Europe: So they that are Masters of the Field command the Country far and near.
I’m here to share a major misfortune that happened to the Dahomes a few months after they captured the French fort. To understand what happened, you should know that the King of Dahomè had conquered several countries in just a few years and had devastated them. The sons of the King of Weemey, along with other princes whose fathers had been captured and executed by this conqueror, fled to a powerful inland nation called the J-oes. After Ossue’s defeat, the King of Whidaw managed to send messengers to the King of this country. Through their persistent pleas, they, along with the others seeking protection, finally secured an army to march against the King of Dahomè, who they all viewed as a ruthless destroyer of people. The J-oes fight entirely on horseback, and since they live far to the north near Nubia, they can only march south when it's the right season for foraging and the dry weather comes. The King of Dahomè got word of their approach a few days before they entered his territory. Having previously seen the devastation that such a large cavalry had caused to his army, which consisted solely of foot soldiers, he decided to bury his treasure, burn his towns, and then retreat into the woods and thickets with his people. This is a typical strategy among the Negroes during war; when they're outmatched, they have no fortified towns like they do in Europe. Thus, whoever controls the battlefield holds authority over the surrounding land.
The King of Dahomè having thus in time provided for his Safety by Flight, the J-oes were disappointed: But one Appragah and his People, formerly subject[122] to the King of Whidaw, but now under the Dominion of the Dahomes, did not escape so well. For not moving so soon by two days as they did, the J-oes came up with him and his People, and took abundance of them, with all Appragah’s Riches; and he himself was hardly put to it to escape, with a few of his Servants.
The King of Dahomè had managed to ensure his safety by fleeing, which left the J-oes feeling let down. However, one Appragah and his followers, who had previously been under the rule of the King of Whidaw but were now under the control of the Dahomes, were not so fortunate. Since they didn't move as quickly, delaying by two days, the J-oes caught up with Appragah and his people, capturing many of them along with all of Appragah's wealth. He barely managed to escape with just a few of his servants.
After this the J-oes marched on in quest of the Dahomes, but finding they were got into the thick Woods and Bushes, they incamped near them; making frequent Assaults, and often taking some of the Dahomes Prisoners. At last, they so distressed them, that for want of other Provision, they were obliged to eat many of their own Slaves. Yet the Dahomes patiently endured these Calamities, knowing the J-oes would be obliged to retire in a little time, on account of the rainy Season that was approaching, and for want of Forage: Accordingly they were obliged to retire soon after; and the Dahomes then returned to their own Country, and rebuilt their Towns again.
After this, the J-oes marched on in search of the Dahomes, but when they found out the Dahomes had gone into the thick woods and bushes, they set up camp nearby. They made frequent attacks and often captured some of the Dahomes as prisoners. Eventually, they put so much pressure on them that, lacking other food, the Dahomes had to eat many of their own slaves. Still, the Dahomes endured these hardships, knowing the J-oes would have to pull back soon due to the approaching rainy season and the lack of forage. Sure enough, they had to withdraw shortly after, and the Dahomes then returned to their own country and rebuilt their towns.
During these Misfortunes of the Dahomes,[123] which lasted several Months, various Reports came to Whidaw. Sometimes it was said, “That the King of Dahomè was killed:” But that was again contradicted: And it was reported, “he had lost so many of his People, that he never could be again in a Condition to disturb his Neighbours;” and this was so currently believed that no one doubted of it.
During these troubles of the Dahomes,[123] which lasted several months, various reports came to Whidaw. Sometimes it was said, “The King of Dahomè was killed,” but this was later denied. It was also reported that he had lost so many of his people that he would never be able to disturb his neighbors again; this was so widely believed that no one questioned it.
About this time, which was in the beginning of July 1729, Governor Wilson departed from Whidaw, in order to return to England. He left in his room one Mr. Testefole, who had resided there many Years, but was no ways equal to him in Prudence and Conduct, as his unhappy Fate will afterwards show. For tho’ this Person had been often at the King of Dahomè’s Camp, where he was always used with great Civility, yet now believing that King was so far reduced, that the People of Whidaw had nothing more to fear from him; he too hastily advised their King, to leave the barren Islands wherein he had fled with his People, and come and take again Possession of his Country.
Around this time, in early July 1729, Governor Wilson left Whidaw to return to England. He left Mr. Testefole in his place, who had lived there for many years but was not nearly as wise or capable, as his unfortunate fate would later reveal. Although this man had frequently visited the King of Dahomè’s camp, where he was always treated with great respect, he now mistakenly believed that the king had been weakened to the point where the people of Whidaw had nothing more to fear from him. He hastily advised their king to leave the barren islands where he had taken refuge with his people and reclaim his country.
Hereupon the King of Whidaw resolved to return; and, to provide against the worst, he desired his Neighbours of Popoe to lend him some of their Forces; which they readily did. For these People, with all the Coast-Negroes, mortally hate the Dahomes, on account of their Cruelty, and their Barbarity in eating human Flesh. And, besides that the Popoes are little afraid of the Dahomes Power, because they live in Islands, they now assisted the Whidaws out of Policy; thinking, if they were reinstated in their Country, Trade would soon revive, which had been so long interrupted on account of the War. So they sent them some thousands of their People; and at their Arrival the King of Whidaw joined them with his Forces. Tho’ he was a very fat unwieldy Man, yet he marched at the head of his Army, which consisted of about fifteen thousand Men, including the Popoes, and incamped in his own Country for some time, near the English and French Forts. This the Dahomes knew nothing of; for they had so mean an opinion of the Whidaws, that[125] they never thought they would attempt to settle again in their own Country: Neither had they, since the departure of the J-oes, sent any of their People to the Sea side, having been employed in repairing their Towns, and about other Affairs. These being near finished, the King of Dahomè sent some of his Traders down with Slaves, to the English and French Forts: But his People were much surprised to see such an Army of Whidaws incamped near them. So they returned in great haste to inform their King, who upon the receipt of this News, was greatly embarassed; for he had lost many of his best Soldiers whilst the J-oes remained in his Country, and kept him so long in the Bushes. Moreover, his Majesty had lately sent an Army into the inland Country, to take Slaves: For as I have formerly observed, he drives no regular Trade in Slaves, but only sells such as he takes in his Wars.
The King of Whidaw decided to return and, to be prepared for the worst, asked his neighbors in Popoe to lend him some of their forces, which they readily agreed to do. The people there, along with all the Coast-Negroes, deeply hated the Dahomes due to their cruelty and their barbaric practice of eating human flesh. Additionally, the Popoes were not very afraid of the Dahomes power because they lived on islands. They helped the Whidaws out of self-interest, believing that if the Whidaws were restored to their country, trade would quickly return to normal, which had been disrupted for so long due to the war. They sent thousands of their people, and upon their arrival, the King of Whidaw joined them with his forces. Although he was a very large and unwieldy man, he marched at the front of his army, which had about fifteen thousand men, including the Popoes, and camped in his own territory for a while, close to the English and French forts. The Dahomes were completely unaware of this; they had such a low opinion of the Whidaws that they never thought they would try to settle again in their own country. They hadn’t sent anyone to the seaside since the J-oes left, as they were busy repairing their towns and handling other matters. With those tasks nearly finished, the King of Dahomè sent some of his traders with slaves to the English and French forts. His people were very surprised to see such an army of Whidaws camped close by. They hurried back to inform their king, who was quite troubled by the news because he had lost many of his best soldiers while the J-oes were in his country, keeping him hidden for so long. Furthermore, his Majesty had recently sent an army into the interior to capture slaves. As I've mentioned before, he doesn't run a regular slave trade; he only sells those he captures in wars.
Being in this State of Perplexity (when he had not a sufficient Number of Soldiers[126] to encounter the Whidaws and Popoes together, and, on the other hand, could not bear to see himself braved by such a cowardly Race as the Whidaws,) his Policy extricated him out of this Difficulty. He ordered a great number of Women to be armed like Soldiers, and appointed Officers to each Company, with Colours, Drums and Umbrellas, according to the Negroe Fashion. Then ordering the Army to march, the Women Soldiers were placed in the Rear, to prevent Discovery. When they came in sight of the Whidaw Army, the latter were much surprized to see such Numbers of Dahomè Soldiers, as they supposed them all to be, marching against them: For they had much depended on the former Reports, that they were so far reduced, as not to be able (at least so soon) to have made Head against them. At this unexpected sight the Whidaws were divided: Some were for retiring back to the Islands; but others who were commanded by Captain Ossue, with the Popoes, were for fighting. During this Dispute, the[127] Dahomè Army marched on boldly, and Captain Ossue, with the Popoe General, as bravely advanced to meet them; and attacked their right Wing so briskly, that they drove them for some time before them. But the Whidaws who were with the King, at that instant cowardly fled; tho’ his Majesty used his utmost endeavours and Intreaties to stop them, and at last wounded several with his Lance, to oblige them to second Captain Ossue’s People: But all in vain. This being observed by the left Wing of the Dahomes, they fell on the Rear of Ossue’s Soldiers, and soon obliged them and the Popoes, to fly in their turn; which the King of Whidaw perceiving, and being so very unwieldy and fat, he had no other way to save his Life, but to fly into the dry Ditch of the English Fort; where, by the help of two of his Sons, his Majesty got over the Wall, and so escaped the fury of his Enemies: But many of his People were killed, and others taken.
Being in a state of confusion (when he didn't have enough soldiers[126] to face both the Whidaws and Popoes at the same time, and, on top of that, couldn't stand the thought of being challenged by such a cowardly group as the Whidaws), his strategy helped him out of this issue. He ordered a large number of women to be armed like soldiers and assigned officers to each company, complete with banners, drums, and umbrellas, following the Negroe style. Then, after ordering the army to march, the women soldiers were placed at the back to avoid detection. When they came into view of the Whidaw army, the latter were surprised to see so many Dahomè soldiers, as they thought all of them were marching against them. They had heavily relied on previous reports that they were so weakened that they wouldn’t be able to mount a defense (at least not this soon). This unexpected sight divided the Whidaws: some wanted to retreat back to the islands, while others, led by Captain Ossue with the Popoes, wanted to fight. During this argument, the Dahomè army marched on boldly, and Captain Ossue, along with the Popoe General, bravely advanced to meet them, launching a fierce attack on their right flank that pushed them back for a time. However, the Whidaws with the King cowardly fled at that moment, despite his Majesty's best efforts and pleas to stop them, and he even wounded several with his lance to encourage them to support Captain Ossue’s forces. But it was all in vain. Seeing this, the left flank of the Dahomes charged the rear of Ossue’s soldiers, quickly forcing both them and the Popoes to flee in turn. The King of Whidaw, realizing this and being rather large and heavy, had no choice but to jump into the dry ditch of the English fort to save his life; with the help of two of his sons, he managed to climb over the wall and escape the wrath of his enemies, though many of his people were killed and others taken.
Mr. Testefole, the Governor, was at a great loss how to act on this occasion.[128] For he foresaw the Dahomes would demand the King, and insist on his being delivered to them, as soon as they should know he was in the Fort. Which if he refused to do, he was sensible, they could oblige him in time to do it, by starving him. Moreover, he could not but sustain a great loss by the Interruption of Trade. So the Governor persuaded the King to leave the Fort that Night, and he happily escaped to his barren Islands again. However, the King of Dahomè was afterwards fully informed of all this, and likewise that the Governor had been the principal occasion of the Whidaws endeavouring to regain their Country: Which he highly resented.
Mr. Testefole, the Governor, was at a total loss about what to do in this situation.[128] He realized that the Dahomes would demand the King and insist on getting him delivered to them as soon as they found out he was in the Fort. If he refused, he knew they could force him to comply eventually by starving him. Additionally, he would suffer significant losses due to the disruption of trade. So, the Governor convinced the King to leave the Fort that night, and he successfully escaped to his desolate Islands again. However, the King of Dahomè later learned all of this and that the Governor was mainly responsible for the Whidaws trying to reclaim their territory, which he was very angry about.
The Dahomes, after this, retired from about the Forts, and, leaving a small Army at Sabee, returned to their own Country; where many Banditti of other Nations resorting to them, their King, in a few Months, found his Strength and Power as much increased, as when he fled from the J-oes. But the Countries being laid waste far and near by his former Wars, tho’[129] he has large Territories of many hundred Miles, and as fine a Country under his Dominion, as any in the Southern Parts of Africa; yet he is only a great King in name for want of Subjects, by reason of his having destroyed in so cruel a manner the Inhabitants of all the Places he has conquered. This has obliged many hundred thousands to fly from his Arms, into foreign Countries; that are by Situation secured from his rambling Bands, either by great Rivers, Mountains or Lakes.
The Dahomes then withdrew from the Forts and, leaving a small army at Sabee, returned to their own country. There, many bandits from other nations joined them, and in a few months, their king found his strength and power increased, just as it was when he fled from the J-oes. However, the lands had been devastated by his previous wars, and although he controls large territories spanning hundreds of miles and has an impressive country under his rule, as fine as any in southern Africa, he is only a great king in name due to the lack of subjects. This is a result of having cruelly destroyed the inhabitants of all the places he conquered. Because of this, many hundreds of thousands have fled from him to foreign lands, which are protected from his wandering bands by significant rivers, mountains, or lakes.
He has acted since as impolitick a part in another matter. For he gave his word to a great number of the former Inhabitants, If they would return again into their own Country, they should quietly enjoy it, upon paying a certain Tribute. On this many thousands returned into the Kingdom of Ardra, where they built Houses, sowed Corn, and planted Potatoes; but no sooner were these poor People settled, than the Dahomes surprized them, and killed or took captive all that could not escape from them. The King[130] having thus broken his promise, I believe no others will ever venture to trust him: And the Country, in all Probability, will remain uninhabited, during his Life: Moreover, by this means the Trade at Whidaw is almost ruined; for the far inland People having now no Markets to carry their Slaves to, as formerly, and the Dahomes using no Trade but that of War, few Negroes are now brought down to be sold to the Europeans.
He has since acted in an equally foolish way regarding another issue. He promised a large number of the former residents that if they returned to their own country, they could enjoy it peacefully by paying a certain tribute. Because of this, thousands returned to the Kingdom of Ardra, where they built houses, planted crops, and grew potatoes. But no sooner had these poor people settled in than the Dahomes attacked them, killing or capturing all who couldn't escape. The King[130] broke his promise, and I believe no one will ever trust him again. Consequently, the country will likely remain uninhabited for the duration of his life. Additionally, this has nearly destroyed trade at Whidaw; since the people from the interior no longer have markets to sell their slaves as they did before, and the Dahomes only engage in war, very few Negroes are now brought down to be sold to the Europeans.
Whether it was the badness of Trade, occasioned by the Dahomes acting in this manner, or any thing else, that enraged Mr. Testefole against them; he was so imprudent, that on all Opportunities he used their People ill, when they came to the English Fort: And at last whipped one of their principal Men at the Flag-Staff; and upon his complaining of this great Indignity, Testefole rashly replied, He would serve his King in the same manner if he was in his Power. All this being afterwards reported to his Majesty, it highly offended him: And he said, “Surely this Man must be full of Malice[131] against us, else he could never have so suddenly forgot our former Kindnesses to him.”
Whether it was the bad situation with trade, caused by the Dahomes acting this way, or something else that made Mr. Testefole so angry with them, he was so reckless that he mistreated their people whenever they came to the English Fort. Eventually, he even whipped one of their top men at the Flag-Staff; when this man complained about such a great insult, Testefole foolishly responded, He would treat his King the same way if he had the chance. When all this was reported to his Majesty, it greatly upset him. He said, “Surely this man must be full of malice[131] against us, otherwise he could never have so quickly forgotten our past kindnesses to him.”
The King upon this ordered his People to watch for an Opportunity to surprize the Governor, and make him Prisoner; and his Imprudence soon made him fall into their Hands in the following manner. There was a French Captain who had a Factory, at some distance from the English Fort: This Gentleman had been drinking with the Governor all night, and when the day came, he persuaded Mr. Testefole to go and drink Coffee with him at his Factory. The Dahomes, who were on the Watch, seeing him go to the Frenchman’s House, went and surrounded it, demanding to have the Governor delivered to them. This the Captain at first refused, but they threatning to burn his Factory; he told them, He would forthwith bring him out. So he went into the House, and advised Mr. Testefole to make his Escape; which he refusing to do, the Captain put him by force into a large Chest, and lock’d him in: Then[132] he went out, and told the Dahomes, “He could not find the Governor, and that he believed he had escaped.” This so enraged them, that they fired a Pistol at the Captain, which shot him in the Arm, and thereupon broke into his House, where they at last found the unfortunate Man in the Chest; whom they took out, tied his Hands and Legs, and putting him into a Hammock, sent him away to their King, who was at that time encamp’d up into the Country, four days journey off.
The King then ordered his people to look for a chance to surprise the Governor and capture him. His foolishness quickly led him to fall into their hands in this way. There was a French captain who had a factory some distance from the English fort. This man had been drinking with the Governor all night, and when morning came, he convinced Mr. Testefole to go for coffee with him at his factory. The Dahomes, who were on watch, saw him heading to the Frenchman’s house and surrounded it, demanding that the Governor be handed over. The captain initially refused, but when they threatened to burn his factory, he agreed to bring the Governor out. He went inside, urged Mr. Testefole to escape, but when he refused, the captain forcibly put him into a large chest and locked it. Then he stepped out and told the Dahomes, “I couldn’t find the Governor, and I believe he got away.” This made them so angry that they fired a pistol at the captain, hitting him in the arm, and then broke into his house, eventually finding the unfortunate man in the chest. They pulled him out, tied his hands and feet, and placed him in a hammock before sending him off to their King, who was camped in the countryside, four days' journey away.
This unhappy Gentleman flattered himself, that the former Kindness the King had shown for him, would now save him; but his Majesty was so highly offended, that he would not vouchsafe to see him; so that he gave himself up for lost. However, a few days after this he was sent down to Sabee, about four Miles from the Fort, where he was given to understand, “If he would write to the Person that commanded in his Abscence for several things, which they named for his Ransom, that on their being sent he should have his Liberty.”
This unfortunate gentleman thought that the kindness the King had shown him in the past would save him now, but the King was so angered that he wouldn’t even see him, leaving him feeling doomed. A few days later, though, he was sent down to Sabee, about four miles from the Fort, where he was told, “If you write to the person who is in charge in your absence about certain things we need for your ransom, and then send them, you'll be freed.”
This he readily complied with, and they instantly allowed him more Freedom, permitting two of his own Negroe Servants to wait on him; so that he began to be easy in his Mind: But the Scene soon changed; for on their receiving the Things he had writ for, and which were of a considerable Value, these cruel base Villains seized his Person, and made his Body fast to Stakes drove in the Ground: Where, spreading him on his Belly, they with sharp Knives cut open his Arms, Back, Thighs and Legs in several places, and filled the Wounds with a mixture of Limejuice, Salt and Pepper mixed together; which put him to inexpressible Torment. However, they soon after put him out of his pain, by cutting off his Head. Then they cut his Body in pieces, broiled them on the Coals, and eat them.
This he readily agreed to, and they immediately gave him more freedom, allowing two of his own Black servants to attend to him; so he started to feel more at ease. But things quickly changed; once they received the valuable items he had requested, these cruel, dishonorable villains captured him and tied his body to stakes driven into the ground. There, laying him on his stomach, they used sharp knives to cut open his arms, back, thighs, and legs in several places, filling the wounds with a mix of lime juice, salt, and pepper, which caused him unimaginable pain. However, they soon ended his suffering by cutting off his head. Then, they dismembered his body, grilled the pieces over the coals, and ate them.
Thus this poor Gentleman lost his Life in a terrible manner. And tho’ the King of Dahomè has since denied to some white People, “That he gave Orders to have him put to death;” His Majesty[134] saying, by way of Excuse, “He only told some of his principal People to carry him to Sabee, and there do with him what they thought fit, not suspecting they would have used a white Gentleman in such a manner;” Yet it is not to be doubted but they knew their Master’s Mind too well in this Affair. For his Majesty punished none of those that were Actors in this cruel Tragedy; tho’ it was earnestly insisted on. Nay some of them that eat part of his Flesh, have been since so audacious, as to tell several Portuguese Gentlemen, that talked with them about it; “That English Beef was very good.”
So this unfortunate gentleman lost his life in a horrific way. And although the King of Dahomè has since told some white people, “I didn’t order his death;” His Majesty[134] said, in his defense, “I only instructed some of my top people to take him to Sabee and deal with him as they saw fit, not suspecting they would treat a white gentleman in such a way;” still, there's no doubt they understood their master's intentions in this matter. For His Majesty punished none of those involved in this brutal act, even though it was strongly demanded. In fact, some of those who ate part of his flesh have since been so bold as to tell several Portuguese gentlemen, who asked them about it, that “English beef was quite tasty.”
After Mr. Testefole’s unhappy Fate, two white Men running away from the English Fort, one of them went to the King of Dahomè, and informed him, “There were but four white People left in the place, so that he might easily take it.” The King replied, “He had no quarrel with the English Nation; for what had been done to the late Governor, he by his Imprudence had brought on himself: And he hoped, the African Company[135] would send a fitter Person to command the Fort for the future.”
After Mr. Testefole’s unfortunate fate, two white men escaped from the English fort. One of them went to the King of Dahomè and told him, “Only four white people are left there, so you could easily take it.” The King replied, “I have no issue with the English nation; what happened to the late Governor was his own fault due to his carelessness. I hope the African Company[135] will send someone more suitable to lead the Fort in the future.”
Sometime after this the King of Dahomè considering he should certainly be invaded again by the J-oes, as soon as the Season permitted them to march, and dreading very much their power, he sent Embassadors with large Presents to their King, together with one of his handsomest Daughters. These were civilly received, and had the good fortune to succeed in their Negotiations. For they so gained some great Men about the King, by presenting them with large pieces of Coral (which the J-oes esteem above all things) that by their means an advantagious Peace was obtained for their Master, and they were civilly dismissed with handsome Rewards. For a Confirmation of the Peace, the King of J-oe sent, a little while after, one of his Daughters to the King of Dahomè for a Wife; and she was received with great Joy by the King and his People.
Sometime after this, the King of Dahomè believed he would definitely be invaded again by the J-oes as soon as the season allowed them to march, and he was very concerned about their power. He sent ambassadors with generous gifts to their King, along with one of his most beautiful daughters. They were received politely and were fortunate enough to succeed in their negotiations. They managed to win over some influential figures around the King by giving them large pieces of Coral (which the J-oes value above all else), and through their efforts, a favorable peace was secured for their King. They were then courteously dismissed with substantial rewards. To confirm the peace, the King of J-oe later sent one of his daughters to the King of Dahomè as a wife, and she was welcomed with great joy by the King and his people.
At my going on Shore at Jaqueen, the latter end of February 1729-30: I was[136] informed of all that I have here related; and tho’ I found Trade very dull, yet all the white Gentlemen residing at that place, were full of Expectations, That, now a Peace was concluded between the J-oes and the Dahomes, we should soon have a great many Negroes brought down for Sale. But tho’ I was there above two Months, Trade did not mend in the least: And I am afraid it will not for many Years, because of the great Destruction of the Inhabitants of the neighbouring Countries, who used to carry on a regular Trade with the far inland People: Neither will those that had the good fortune to escape the Dahomes Cruelty, dare to return during the Life of the present Conqueror, whose Perfidiousness and Treachery they have often experienced.
When I arrived at Jaqueen at the end of February 1729-30, I was[136] informed of everything I've mentioned here. Although I found trade to be very slow, all the white gentlemen living there were full of hope that, now that peace was achieved between the J-oes and the Dahomes, we would soon see many Negroes brought down for sale. However, even after spending more than two months there, trade did not improve at all. I'm afraid it won't get better for many years due to the significant loss of life among the people of the nearby countries, who used to engage in regular trade with the people far inland. Those who managed to escape the Dahomes cruelty won't dare to return while the current conqueror is still alive, having frequently experienced his deceit and betrayal.
I shall conclude this first Book with an account of a Misfortune that befel me by Fire, whilst I was at Jaqueen. The relation, if I mistake not, may be acceptable to the Reader, and give him a true notion of the Buildings, and some other Matters amongst the Negroes.
I will wrap up this first book with a story about a misfortune that happened to me due to a fire while I was at Jaqueen. This account, if I'm not mistaken, might interest the reader and provide a real understanding of the buildings and some other things among the Negroes.
The Houses in that Country are built with mud-Walls, one Story high. The Rafters that support the Roof are made of Bamboes, which is a light spungy Wood. On these they lay a great quantity of Thatch, which in the dry Season of the Year is like Tinder: Yet the Natives are so careless, that many Fires happen in that Season; there having been no less than five during the two Months I was there, in which some thousands of their Houses were burnt down. This carelesness of the Negroes, I judge, chiefly proceeds from the little regard they have for their Furniture. For it is very mean, except amongst some of the principal People, consisting of Matts to sleep on, earthen Pots to boil their Victuals in; with a few other things of small value. Moreover, the Walls of their Houses being made of Clay, the Fire does them rather good than hurt, as it bakes them harder. And to new cover them it costs but little. So that the Europeans that have Factories in the Town of Jaqueen, are often great Sufferers by these frequent[138] Fires, occasioned generally by the stupid Carelessness of the Negroes, which proceeds from the Reasons just now mentioned.
The houses in that country are built with mud walls and are one story high. The rafters that support the roof are made of bamboo, which is a light, spongy wood. On top of these, they lay a lot of thatch, which in the dry season is like tinder. However, the locals are so careless that many fires occur during that time; there were no less than five in the two months I was there, resulting in thousands of their houses being burned down. This carelessness among the Negroes seems to stem mainly from their lack of concern for their belongings. Their furniture is quite basic, except among some of the higher-ups, consisting of mats to sleep on, earthen pots for cooking, and a few other items of little value. Additionally, since the walls of their houses are made of clay, fire actually benefits them rather than harms them, as it makes the walls harder. Plus, it doesn't cost much to cover them again. Because of this, the Europeans who have factories in the town of Jaqueen often suffer greatly from these frequent[138] fires, which are generally caused by the irresponsible carelessness of the locals for the reasons mentioned above.
I thought our Factory pretty safe from it, for we lived in a large Court belonging to the Duke, who was the only Brother of the Lord of the Place by the same Mother, and his chief Minister. This House joined to the Apartments of the Duke’s Women, which it being a capital Crime for the Natives to go into, so it would have been very imprudent for any white Man to have attempted it: Yet the Fire, obliged us to save our selves that way, as I shall just now relate. The other side of the Court we lived in, opened into the Fields; and just by our Door a narrow Street began, where the Lord of Jaqueen’s Feticheer or Priest lived with his Family.
I thought our factory was pretty safe from it because we lived in a large courtyard owned by the Duke, who was the only brother of the Lord of the place on their mother's side, and his main minister. This house was connected to the Duke’s women’s quarters, which was off-limits for the locals, making it very risky for any white man to try to enter. But the fire forced us to escape that way, as I will explain shortly. On the other side of the courtyard where we lived, there was an opening to the fields, and right by our door was a narrow street that led to where the Lord of Jaqueen’s Feticheer or priest lived with his family.
Two Fires having happened in the Town, within a few days one of the other, in which some Portuguese suffered a great Loss in their Goods, I express’d my apprehensions of the like Danger. But the Duke assured me, “It was never[139] known, that either his Brother’s Houses, or his own had been burn’d. For they having abundance of Servants, if any Fire began near them, their People, by unthatching the Houses, soon put a stop to it. Moreover, all the Inhabitants who lived near the Court, were very careful of Fire; because it was death by their Law to all the Family where it began.” These Reasons made me more easy than I had been for some time. But on the fifteenth of March, being Sunday, what I long feared came to pass.
Two fires occurred in the town within a few days of each other, causing significant losses for some Portuguese. I shared my concerns about the same danger. However, the Duke reassured me, “It has never been known for either his brother’s houses or his own to be burned. They have plenty of servants, so if any fire starts near them, their people quickly extinguish it by removing the thatch from the roofs. Additionally, all the residents living near the court are very cautious with fire because, according to their law, it means death for the entire family where it started.” These reasons made me feel more relieved than I had in a while. But on the fifteenth of March, which was a Sunday, what I had always feared finally happened.
My hired black Servants asked me leave after Dinner, to go to the Burial of one of their acquaintance; and several of my white People did the same, being desirous to see the Customs of the Blacks on this occasion: In which indeed they are very ridiculous and expensive, drinking as much Brandy and other Liquors, as the Circumstances of the deceased Person will allow. I granted them all their request; and by that means there remained only two white Men with me in the Factory.
My hired Black servants asked me for time off after dinner to attend the funeral of someone they knew, and several of my white employees did the same, wanting to observe the customs of the Black community during this event. Honestly, these customs can be quite amusing and costly, as they drink as much brandy and other spirits as the situation allows based on the deceased. I granted them all their requests, which left me with just two white men at the factory.
The Fire began about two a clock that afternoon, in the Feticheer’s House, just opposite to our Door, which immediately taking Fire, prevented our Escape that way. However in the first Surprize, I gave my Box of Books and Accounts to one of my young Men, who ventured through the Door-way with them, tho’ he was scorched by the Flames; and so I luckily saved them. My next care was to save our Gold, which I kept in a large Dutch Chest, thinking it safer there than in a Portmanteau, or a small Box, which our black Servants might have been tempted to run away with. But, in the hurry, I could not find the Key of the Chest, to take the Money out; and the Fire having taken hold of the Thatch of the room wherein it stood, I and the other white Man then remaining with me, took it up, and carried it into the Apartments belonging to the Duke’s Women: Where we met him and his Brother with many People, going to endeavour to stop the Fire, by unthatching the adjoining Houses; but the Flames were got to such a head,[141] that they were soon forced to fly before them. My Man and I having carried the Chest through several windings and turnings in the Duke’s Houses, we began to be quite tired, (for it was very heavy) when, just in the nick of time, five black People came running towards us, and the way was so narrow they could not easily pass by us. One of these Men I knew, who spoke good English, “so I desired him and the others to save the Chest, for which I would well reward them.” He answered, “They durst not assist me; being obliged, on no less a Penalty than the loss of their Heads, to go and save the Duke’s Goods.” By good fortune I had my Cane then hanging on my Wrist, which I used to such purpose, that two of them immediately took up the Chest; whereupon I let the other three pass by: So, with the help of the two Men I had obliged to assist us, we got the Chest at last over a Wall ten foot high, into the Street, and so to the Dutch Factory in safety. But we had the Misfortune to lose in our Factory a large quantity of[142] Goods, with all my Necessaries, except what was in the Chest. All the Duke’s houses, and the greatest part of his Furniture was destroyed; but his Brother’s were preserved, by unthatching the Houses that stood next his Court. I think, for the time this Fire lasted, which was but about an hour, nothing could be fiercer or quicker; and had it happened in the night, we should certainly have been burnt; for we could never have found our way out, amongst so many Turnings and Windings, as were in the Dukes Apartments.
The fire started around two o'clock that afternoon in the Feticheer's House, directly across from our door, which caught fire immediately, blocking our escape that way. In the initial shock, I handed my box of books and accounts to one of my young men who bravely went through the doorway with them, even though he got scorched by the flames; luckily, I saved them. Next, I focused on saving our Gold, which I kept in a large Dutch chest, thinking it was safer there than in a suitcase or small box that our black servants might be tempted to take. But in the chaos, I couldn't find the key to the chest to get the money out; and as the fire spread to the thatch of the room where it was, the other white man with me and I picked it up and carried it into the apartments belonging to the Duke’s women. There, we encountered him and his brother with many others, trying to stop the fire by removing the thatch from the nearby houses; however, the flames had spread so far that they were soon forced to flee. My companion and I were exhausted from carrying the heavy chest through several twists and turns in the Duke's houses when, just in time, five black people came running towards us, but the path was so narrow that they couldn't easily get past us. I recognized one of them, who spoke good English, so I asked him and the others to help with the chest, promising a reward. He replied that they couldn’t help me, as they were required, under threat of losing their heads, to save the Duke's belongings. Thankfully, I had my cane with me, which I used effectively, convincing two of them to lift the chest; then I let the other three pass. With the help of the two men I had persuaded, we finally managed to get the chest over a ten-foot high wall and into the street, making it safely to the Dutch Factory. Unfortunately, we lost a large amount of goods and all my essentials from our factory, except for what was in the chest. All the Duke’s houses and most of his furniture were destroyed, but his brother's were saved by removing the thatch from the houses next to his court. I think that for the brief hour the fire lasted, nothing could have been fiercer or faster; had it occurred at night, we would have surely been burned, as we would never have found our way out amid all the twists and turns in the Duke's apartments.
When the hurry was pretty well over, the Lord of Jaqueen inquired after me, being under some concern about me; for he did not see me as he passed along in his Brother’s Rooms: As soon as he was informed of my Safety, he sent a Messenger to enquire, “How I did, after so severe a Misfortune?”
When things had calmed down a bit, the Lord of Jaqueen asked about me, clearly worried since he hadn’t seen me while walking through his brother’s rooms. Once he found out I was safe, he sent a messenger to ask, “How are you doing after such a terrible mishap?”
It is remarkable, we could never learn how this Fire happened, for tho’ I often press’d the Duke to make an inquiry after it, yet he always declined it; which I believe[143] was on account of his Brother’s Feticheer, in whose Family the Fire began. However, they were so wise as not to let them repair their Houses, but obliged them to build further from the Court which belonged to the Duke.
It’s surprising that we never found out how this fire started. I often urged the Duke to investigate it, but he always refused. I think this was due to his brother's connection to the family where the fire originated. However, they were smart enough not to allow them to fix their homes and forced them to build further away from the Duke's property.
Adjoining to the Feticheer’s House that was burnt, there was a large square Court, adorned with many handsome Trees that grew round it. In the middle of this place stood the Lord of Jaqueen’s Fetiche. It was made in the fashion of a large Hay-cock, and covered over with Thatch: On the top of this was placed a dead Man’s Scull, before which Offerings were made for the Duke’s Health and Preservation. This Fetiche escaped being burn’d, tho’ all the Houses adjoining to the Court wherein it stood were consum’d. This was cryed up by the People as a great Miracle; saying, “Their Lord’s God had taken care to preserve his own House:” Tho’ by what I could judge it was impossible this Fetiche should be burn’d, because it was at a considerable distance from the Fire, and guarded by so many[144] Trees full of Branches and Leaves. But it was in vain to argue against their superstitious Notion.
Next to the burnt-down Feticheer’s House, there was a big square courtyard decorated with many beautiful trees surrounding it. In the center of this area stood the Lord of Jaqueen’s Fetiche. It was shaped like a large haystack and covered with thatch. At the top, there was a dead man's skull, where offerings were made for the Duke's health and safety. This Fetiche survived the fire, even though all the nearby houses were destroyed. People praised this as a great miracle, saying, “Their Lord’s God has taken care to protect his own House.” However, from what I could tell, it seemed impossible for this Fetiche to have burned because it was quite far from the fire and surrounded by so many[144] leafy branches. But it was pointless to argue against their superstitious beliefs.
After this Misfortune, I sent my People on board to get them more necessaries; during which time I remained in the Dutch Factory. On their return ashore, I was obliged, tho’ much against my will, to take a new-built house belonging to the Duke, but finding no one durst let me one (which it seems had been forbidden for the sake of the Duke’s Advantage) I complied. But what I feared came to pass, for we all got Fevers in a few days after we had been in this House.
After this misfortune, I sent my people on board to get more supplies. During that time, I stayed at the Dutch Factory. When they returned, I had to take a newly built house owned by the Duke, although I really didn't want to. It seemed no one would rent me a place, as it had been forbidden for the Duke's benefit, so I went along with it. Unfortunately, my worries came true, and we all developed fevers just a few days after moving into the house.
About ten days after this, another terrible Fire happened, which began in a Portuguese Factory, and in this manner. A Negroe Cook frying some Fish in Palm-Oyl, the Oyl took fire; and he imprudently throwing Water thereon, the Flame of the Oyl ran up the side of the Wall, (for the Negroe Houses have no Chimneys) and instantly fired the Thatch. Whereupon the Wind then blowing very fresh, it[145] spread in a moment and consumed, in two hours time, one third of the Town, in which stood several thousands of their little Houses: However, this did not come near our Factory.
About ten days later, another terrible fire broke out, starting in a Portuguese factory. A Black cook was frying some fish in palm oil when the oil caught fire. In a misguided attempt to put it out, he threw water on it, causing the flames to shoot up the wall (since the Black houses don’t have chimneys) and instantly igniting the thatched roof. With the wind blowing strongly, it[145] spread rapidly and consumed one third of the town in just two hours, destroying thousands of their small houses. Fortunately, it didn’t reach our factory.
Soon after this, my People grew so bad, that I was obliged to send them on board the Ship, and have others ashore in their room: In a little while after, the House we had been burnt out of, being repaired, we removed into it; and by this means had the Opportunity of seeing daily thousands of People bring Bamboes and Thatch, to repair the Duke’s Houses with; it being the Custom of the Country so to do, when either their Lord or his Brother wants it. But the noise of the People’s Musick, and antick dancing, on this occasion, gave me much Disturbance: Moreover, Trade continuing still very dull, it gave me no little concern; and having got rid of my Fever for a few days, it returned again. Being in these unhappy Circumstances, I received advice, that two of my Owner’s Ships were arrived in the Road of Jaqueen. Whereupon I left my[146] Factory, and went on board my Ship; and there, the Commanders of the other two and I agreed, “It would be for our Owner’s Interest that I should go directly for England.” So, delivering to one of them what Negroes I had on Board, and receiving what Elephants Teeth, and Gold they had, I left the Road of Jaqueen the first day of May: And having had a fine Passage, in which I intirely lost my Fever, and recovered my Strength a little, I arrived safe in the River of Thames the 13th of July 1730.
Soon after this, my people became so troublesome that I had to send them on board the ship and bring others ashore to replace them. Shortly after, the house we had been evicted from was repaired, and we moved back in. This way, we had the chance to see thousands of people daily bringing bamboo and thatch to fix up the Duke’s houses, as is the custom in this country when either their lord or his brother needs it. However, the noise from the music and dancing of the people during this time disturbed me quite a bit. Also, with trade still being very slow, it caused me a lot of worry; after a few days of relief from my fever, it returned. In these unfortunate circumstances, I heard that two of my owner’s ships had arrived in the road at Jaqueen. So, I left my factory and went on board my ship. There, the commanders of the other two ships and I agreed that it would be in our owner’s best interest for me to head directly for England. I handed over some of the Negroes I had on board to one of them and received the elephants' tusks and gold they had, and I left the road at Jaqueen on the first day of May. After a lovely journey during which I completely lost my fever and regained some strength, I safely arrived in the River Thames on the 13th of July, 1730.
Additions
To the foregoing Account.
AS the Publication of this Book has been deferred till the Winter Season, it may not be unacceptable to the Reader, to have a farther Account of the King of Dahomè, according to the latest Advices come from those Parts.
As the release of this book has been pushed back until winter, the reader might appreciate a further account of the King of Dahomè, based on the most recent information from that region.
I ended the first Book with an account of that King’s having concluded a Peace with the most powerful of his Enemies, the King of J-oe. This put the Europeans then residing at Jaqueen in great hopes, that those Countries would be settled, and Trade flourish again; tho’ at my departure from that Place, in May 1730, I saw but little prospect of it: And indeed it has been quite ruined since, by the Destruction of the Country of Jaqueen, on the 22nd of March 1731-2.
I finished the first book with a story about that king making peace with his most powerful enemy, the king of J-oe. This gave the Europeans living in Jaqueen a lot of hope that those countries would stabilize and trade would thrive again; however, when I left that place in May 1730, I saw little chance of that happening. In fact, it has been completely devastated since then, with the destruction of the country of Jaqueen on the 22nd of March 1731-2.
For the King of Dahomè being a restless ambitious Prince, instead of endeavouring (after the concluding of the Peace with the J-oes) to settle his conquered Countries, he marched far Inland against a Nation called the Yahoos.
For the King of Dahomè, being a restless and ambitious leader, instead of trying to stabilize his conquered territories after making peace with the J-oes, he marched deep inland against a nation called the Yahoos.
These People valiantly defended themselves for many Months, having retired amongst their Mountains and Woods, where they were besieged by the Dahomes. The rainy Season coming on, the Dahomè Soldiers were desirous of returning to their own Country, but the King was highly incensed at it, and put several of the principal Officers to death, only for mentioning it to him. This caused great Murmurings in the Army, which were increased by their Sufferings from the Rains; so that some of his Captains deserted him with many Soldiers, amongst whom was one of his Sons, who fled with four thousand Men to the King of Weemey.
These people bravely defended themselves for many months, retreating into their mountains and woods, where the Dahomey besieged them. As the rainy season approached, the Dahomey soldiers wanted to return to their homeland, but the king was furious about it and executed several of the top officers just for suggesting it. This led to widespread discontent in the army, which intensified due to their hardships from the heavy rains. Eventually, some of his captains deserted him along with many soldiers, including one of his sons, who fled with four thousand men to the king of Weemey.
Finding himself in these Circumstances, he resolved to make one grand Effort on the Yahoos, in which he prevailed; but[149] tho’ he beat them out of their Fastnesses, he gain’d little by it, they making a brave Retreat, in which his wearied Soldiers could not pursue them; and soon after he returned to his own Country, with the loss of most of his Forces and of his Reputation.
Finding himself in this situation, he decided to make one final attempt against the Yahoos, where he succeeded; but[149] even though he drove them out of their strongholds, he achieved little from it, as they made a strong retreat that his exhausted soldiers couldn't follow. Soon after, he returned to his own country, having lost most of his forces and his reputation.
At this the People of Jaqueen were not a little pleased; for they always stood in fear of him, but now began to entertain Hopes, he might at last be destroyed.
At this, the people of Jaqueen were quite pleased; they had always been afraid of him, but now they started to hope that he might finally be defeated.
There resided at that Place, a Dutch Gentleman named Mynheer Hertog. This Person carried on a considerable Trade, with the help of his black Servants, into several distant Countries, by means of a River that runs from Jaqueen into the Bay of Bennin. Having gained a great influence over the King of Jaqueen, they often consulted together, sending private Messages by the Traders to the King of Weemey, and other neighbouring Princes, to stir them up against the King of Dahomè, and withal supplied them with Ammunition. Of this the King of Dahomè having received Intelligence, and also that[150] the People of Jaqueen were going to build a Fortification by the Directions of the Europeans residing there; he resolved to attack them, in order to be revenged.
There lived at that place a Dutch gentleman named Mynheer Hertog. He ran a significant trade, aided by his Black servants, with several distant countries via a river that flows from Jaqueen into the Bay of Bennin. Having gained considerable influence over the King of Jaqueen, they frequently met to discuss matters, sending private messages through traders to the King of Weemey and other neighboring rulers to incite them against the King of Dahomè, while also providing them with ammunition. The King of Dahomè learned of this, as well as that the people of Jaqueen were planning to build a fort under the direction of the Europeans living there; he decided to attack them for revenge.
The better to deceive them, he gave out, that he intended a second Expedition far inland: And to blind the Jaqueen Spies, he gave Order to his General to march towards the inland Parts, but in the Night the Army wheeled about, and with great Expedition (tho’ there were above fifteen thousand men in this Army) they came by the way of Whidaw to Jaqueen, without being discovered, till they were just entring the Town.
To better deceive them, he claimed he was planning a second expedition deep into the land. To throw the Jaqueen spies off track, he ordered his general to march towards the interior. But at night, the army turned around and, despite having over fifteen thousand men, quickly made their way through Whidaw to Jaqueen, without being noticed until they were just entering the town.
As the People of Jaqueen stood always in dread of the King of Dahomè, (as I have just now mention’d) they kept in readiness a great many Cannoes in the River that runs on the back part of the Town, to save themselves, in case they should be attacked and defeated. But being now surprized, they had little time to provide for their own Safety: However, the King and many of his principal People escaped in the Cannoes, to an Island he had fortified[151] against such an Accident, and which lies in the middle of the River towards Appah. By that means he escaped the fury of the Dahomes; but he lost all his Riches, and, to add to his Misfortune, his Mother, (that was highly reverenced by him and his People) was taken Prisoner by the Enemy, and carried to the King of Dahomè; and what became of her afterwards is unknown.
As the people of Jaqueen always feared the King of Dahomè (as I just mentioned), they kept a lot of Canoes ready in the river behind the town to escape if they were attacked and defeated. But when they were caught by surprise, they had little time to secure their safety. However, the King and many of his key supporters managed to escape in the canoes to an island he had fortified[151] for such emergencies, located in the middle of the river towards Appah. This way, he avoided the wrath of the Dahomes; but he lost all his wealth, and to make matters worse, his mother (who was greatly respected by him and his people) was captured by the enemy and taken to the King of Dahomè; what happened to her afterward is unknown.
Mynheer Hertog, the Dutch Chief, was at dinner, when the Dahomes entered the Town: And knowing how obnoxious he had made himself to their King, he immediately fled, being defended by four hundred of his People from the Enemy, till he got into a Cannoe; and then they shifted for themselves. He lost every thing in the Factory, which at that time was full of European Goods to a very great Value. This Gentleman escaped to Appah, which lies on the Sea Coast, about ten Leagues to the eastward of Jaqueen. He was kindly received by the King and People, who have a great aversion for the Dahomes.
Mynheer Hertog, the Dutch Chief, was having dinner when the Dahomes entered the town. Knowing how much he had angered their King, he quickly fled, being protected by four hundred of his people from the enemies, until he reached a canoe; then they looked out for themselves. He lost everything in the factory, which was filled with European Goods of great value at that time. This gentleman escaped to Appah, which is on the coast, about ten leagues east of Jaqueen. He was warmly welcomed by the King and the people, who strongly dislike the Dahomes.
In the Town of Jaqueen the Conquerors met with a great deal of Plunder, the Inhabitants not having had time to carry any thing away. But not satisfied with this, they made, according to their barbarous Custom, a terrible Carnage of the People; and to compleat the Destruction of the Country, set all the Towns and Villages on fire.
In the town of Jaqueen, the conquerors found a lot of loot, as the inhabitants hadn't had time to take anything away. But not content with that, they followed their brutal custom and committed a horrific massacre of the people. To complete the devastation of the area, they set all the towns and villages on fire.
There were at this time in Jaqueen several Europeans, who fared little better than the Natives; their Factories being plundered of every thing. Amongst the rest there was Captain Robert More Commander of the Squirrel Galley, belonging to the late Humphrey Morrice Esq; This Gentleman being taken Prisoner with the white Men in his Factory, (as the French and Portuguese also were in theirs) was obliged to travel with them to the King of Dahomè, who then resided at Ardra, about fifty Miles within Land. And they were not so much as provided with Hammocks, or any other Carriages, but forced to walk on foot in the scorching Sun, which had like to have kill’d them.
At this time in Jaqueen, there were several Europeans who were doing no better than the locals; their factories were looted of everything. Among them was Captain Robert More, commander of the Squirrel Galley, which belonged to the late Humphrey Morrice Esq. This gentleman was taken prisoner along with the white men in his factory, just like the French and Portuguese in theirs, and was forced to travel with them to the King of Dahomè, who was then staying at Ardra, about fifty miles inland. They weren’t even given hammocks or any other means of transport, but had to walk on foot in the blazing sun, which nearly killed them.
Upon their appearing before the King, Captain More complained of his hard usage; telling his Majesty, “They had had no Victuals nor any Refreshment since they had been taken Prisoners.” The King thereupon rose up, and went into an inner room; whence coming out again with a Hatchet in his Hand, the sight of it so frightned some of the Portuguese, that they fell on their Knees to implore his Mercy; imagining their Heads were going to be cut off. But Captain More severely upbraiding them for their cowardly Behaviour, so disgraceful to white Men, they rose up: And had soon after the pleasure of seeing a small Cask of Beef opened with it, and several pieces ordered to be dress’d for them. This Cask of Beef, it seems, was found by the Soldiers in the Captain’s Factory, and sent up with other Plunder, to the King, the day before.
When they appeared before the King, Captain More complained about his poor treatment, telling his Majesty, “We haven’t had any food or refreshments since we were taken prisoner.” The King then stood up and went into an inner room. When he came back out with a hatchet in hand, the sight of it scared some of the Portuguese so much that they fell to their knees to beg for mercy, thinking their heads were about to be chopped off. But Captain More harshly criticized them for their cowardly behavior, which was so shameful for white men, and they got up. Shortly after, they were pleased to see a small cask of beef being opened, and several pieces were ordered to be cooked for them. This cask of beef had been found by the soldiers in the Captain’s factory and was sent to the King along with other plunder the day before.
Then they were distributed according to their different Nations, and put under the care of several great Men. Captain More and his People were delivered to[154] Allegee the English Cabocier; (as he was termed) that is, the Person appointed to Trade with them in particular. This black Gentleman treated them with great Civility; but they had the Mortification, a few days after, to hear, he was seized and beheaded; tho’ they could never learn the Cause.
Then they were divided according to their different nations and placed under the care of several notable figures. Captain More and his people were handed over to [154] Allegee, the English Cabocier; (as he was called), meaning the person designated to trade with them specifically. This gentleman treated them with great respect, but they were disheartened a few days later to hear that he was seized and beheaded; however, they could never find out the reason.
It seems the King of Dahomè is grown exceedingly cruel towards his People, being always suspicious, that Plots and Conspiracies are carrying on against him: So that he frequently cuts off some of his great Men on bare Surmises. This, added to the many Disappointments he has met with from the J-oes, has so soured his Temper, that he is likewise greatly altered towards the Europeans, as Captain More experienced. For this Gentleman had been at his Camp formerly, and was known to him soon after the Conquest of Whidaw, as I have related in the former part of this Book.
It seems the King of Dahomey has become extremely cruel towards his people, always suspicious that plots and conspiracies are being hatched against him. As a result, he often executes some of his nobles based on mere suspicion. This, along with the many disappointments he has faced from the J-oes, has made him so bitter that he has also become very different towards the Europeans, as Captain More observed. This gentleman had previously been at his camp and was known to him soon after the conquest of Whidaw, as I mentioned earlier in this book.
But to return to Captain More. He and the other Europeans having continued a good while Prisoners, Mr. Dean, the African Company’s Governor of the Fort at Whidaw, came to Ardra, and interceded with the King for them: Representing, “As they had been at Jaqueen only on account of Trade, it was very unjust to detain them.” With these and many other Arguments, he at last obtained their Freedom: And a Guard was ordered to see Captain More safe down to Jaqueen. But he reflecting on the hard usage he had received at that place from the Soldiers, when at first taken Prisoner; and that they still were encamped there, he chose to go by the way of Whidaw: From whence he got on board a French Ship, and borrowed their Boat, which carried him to his own Ship, that lay in the Road of Jaqueen.
But to go back to Captain More. He and the other Europeans had been prisoners for a while when Mr. Dean, the African Company’s Governor of the Fort at Whidaw, came to Ardra and advocated for them with the King. He argued that, “Since they were in Jaqueen only for trade, it was very unfair to keep them detained.” With these and many other arguments, he eventually secured their release. A guard was assigned to ensure Captain More was safely escorted back to Jaqueen. However, reflecting on the harsh treatment he had received from the soldiers there when he was first captured, and knowing they were still camped in that area, he decided to take the route through Whidaw. From there, he boarded a French ship and borrowed their boat, which took him to his own ship that was anchored in the Road of Jaqueen.
From this and the foregoing Account the Reader may observe, that now all the Countries near the Sea side, which the King of Dahomè could possibly get at, are not only conquered, but also turned into Desolation, with the Inland Parts, in so terrible a manner, that there is no Prospect of Trade’s reviving there again for many Years, or at least so long as the Conqueror lives. What little there is, is carried on chiefly at Appah, a place secured from him by a Morass and a River.
From this and the previous account, the reader can see that now all the coastal countries that the King of Dahomè could possibly reach have not only been conquered but also reduced to desolation, including the inland areas, in such a terrible way that there's no chance of trade reviving there for many years, or at least for as long as the conqueror is alive. The little trade that does exist is mainly conducted at Appah, a location protected from him by a swamp and a river.
The End of BOOK I.
The End of BOOK I.
Book II.
The manner how the Negroes become Slaves. The Numbers of them yearly exported from Guinea to America. The Lawfulness of that Trade. Mutinies among them on board the Ships where the Author has been, &c.
The way the Black people are turned into slaves. The number of them exported each year from Guinea to America. The legality of that trade. Revolts among them on board the ships where the author has been, & etc.
BEFORE I give a particular Relation of the several Mutinies among the Negroe Slaves, whereof I have been a Witness, and which is to be the chief Subject of this present Book, it will be very proper to prefix a short account of the Manner how the Negroes become Slaves; what Numbers of them are yearly exported from Guinea;[158] and then offer a few words in Justification of that Trade.
BEFORE I share a detailed account of the various Mutinies among the Black slaves, which I've witnessed and will be the main focus of this book, it's important to provide a brief overview of how the Negroes become enslaved, how many are exported from Guinea each year;[158] and then offer a few words to justify that trade.
As for the Manner how those People become Slaves; it may be reduced under these several Heads.
As for the Way those people become slaves, it can be categorized under these different headings.
1. It has been the Custom among the Negroes, time out of Mind, and is so to this day, for them to make Slaves of all the Captives they take in War. Now, before they had an Opportunity of selling them to the white People, they were often obliged to kill great Multitudes, when they had taken more than they could well employ in their own Plantations, for fear they should rebel, and endanger their Masters Safety.
1. For a long time now, it has been common among the Black people to enslave all the captives they take in war. Back when they had the chance to sell them to white people, they often had to kill large numbers of captives when they had more than they could effectively use on their own plantations, fearing that those captives would rebel and put their masters' safety at risk.
2dly. Most Crimes amongst them are punished by Mulcts and Fines; and if the Offender has not wherewithal to pay his Fine, he is sold for a Slave: This is the Practice of the inland People, as well as of those on the Sea side.
2dly. Most crimes among them are punished with fines and penalties; if the offender can't afford to pay the fine, they are sold into slavery. This is the practice of both the inland people and those by the sea.
3dly. Debtors who refuse to pay their Debts, or are insolvent, are likewise liable to be made Slaves; but their Friends may redeem them; And if they are not able or[159] willing to do it, then they are generally sold for the Benefit of their Creditors. But few of these come into the hands of the Europeans, being kept by their Countrymen for their own use.
3dly. Debtors who refuse to pay what they owe or who are bankrupt can also be made into slaves; however, their friends may rescue them. If their friends can't or don't want to help, they are usually sold for the benefit of their creditors. But not many of these debtors end up in the hands of the Europeans, as they are typically kept by their fellow countrymen for their own purposes.
4thly. I have been told, That it is common for some inland People, to sell their Children for Slaves, tho’ they are under no Necessity for so doing; which I am inclined to believe. But I never observed, that the People near the Sea Coast practise this, unless compelled thereto by extreme Want and Famine, as the People of Whidaw have lately been.
4thly. I've heard that some people living inland often sell their children into slavery, even though they don't really need to. I tend to believe this. However, I've never seen people along the coast do this unless they're forced by severe need and famine, like the people of Whidaw have recently experienced.
Now, by these means it is that so many of the Negroes become Slaves, and more especially by being taken Captives in War. Of these the Number is so great, that I may safely affirm, without any Exaggeration, that the Europeans of all Nations, that trade to the Coast of Guinea, have, in some Years, exported at least seventy thousand. And tho’ this may no doubt be thought at first hearing a prodigious Number; yet when ’tis considered how great the Extent of this Coast is, namely[160] from Cape Verd to Angola, which is about four thousand Miles in length; and that Polygamy is allowed in general amongst them, by which means the Countries are full of People, I hope it will not be thought improbable that so many are yearly exported from thence.
Now, this is how so many Black people end up as slaves, particularly by being captured during wars. The number is so high that I can confidently say, without exaggeration, that the Europeans from all nations that trade along the coast of Guinea have, in certain years, exported at least seventy thousand. While this might initially sound like an enormous number, when you consider the vast length of this coast, approximately[160] from Cape Verde to Angola, which is about four thousand miles long, and the fact that polygamy is commonly practiced among them, leading to a large population, I hope it won't seem unlikely that so many are exported each year.
Several Objections have often been raised against the Lawfulness of this Trade, which I shall not here undertake to refute. I shall only observe in general That tho’ to traffick in human Creatures, may at first sight appear barbarous, inhuman, and unnatural; yet the Traders herein have as much to plead in their own Excuse, as can be said for some other Branches of Trade, namely, the Advantage of it: And that not only in regard of the Merchants, but also of the Slaves themselves, as will plainly appear from these following Reasons.
Several objections have often been raised against the legality of this trade, which I won't attempt to refute here. I will just note that, although trading in human beings may seem, at first glance, cruel, inhumane, and unnatural, the traders have as much justification for their actions as can be said for some other types of trade, namely the benefits of it. This applies not only to the merchants but also to the slaves themselves, as will be clearly demonstrated by the following reasons.
Secondly, When they are carried to the Plantations, they generally live much better there, than they ever did in their own Country; for as the Planters pay a great price for them, ’tis their interest to take care of them.
Secondly, when they are brought to the plantations, they usually live much better there than they ever did in their own country, because the plantation owners pay a high price for them, so it’s in their interest to take care of them.
Thirdly, By this means the English Plantations have been so much improved, that ’tis almost incredible, what great Advantages have accrued to the Nation thereby; especially to the Sugar Islands, which lying in a Climate near as hot as the Coast of Guinea, the Negroes are fitter to cultivate the Lands there, than white People.
Thirdly, through this means, the English plantations have improved so much that it’s almost unbelievable how many great advantages have come to the nation as a result, particularly for the Sugar Islands. These islands are located in a climate as hot as the coast of Guinea, making Negroes better suited to cultivate the land there than white people.
Then as to the Criminals amongst the Negroes, they are by this means effectually transported, never to return again; a Benefit which we very much want here.
Then regarding the criminals among the Black people, they are effectively transported by this means, never to return again; a benefit that we really need here.
In a word, from this Trade proceed Benefits, far outweighing all, either real or pretended Mischiefs and Inconveniencies. And, let the worst that can, be said of it, it will be found, like all other earthly Advantages, tempered with a mixture of Good and Evil.
In short, this Trade brings benefits that far exceed any real or imagined harms and inconveniences. And no matter what negative things are said about it, it will prove to be, like all other earthly advantages, a mix of good and bad.
I come now to give an Account of the Mutinies that have happened on board the Ships where I have been.
I’m here to share what happened during the mutinies on the ships where I was.
These Mutinies are generally occasioned by the Sailors ill usage of these poor People, when on board the Ships wherein they are transported to our Plantations. Wherever therefore I have commanded, it has been my principal Care, to have the Negroes on board my Ship kindly used; and I have always finally charged my white People to treat them with Humanity and Tenderness; In which I have usually found my Account, both in keeping them from mutinying, and preserving them in health.
These mutinies usually happen because the sailors mistreat these poor people when they're on board the ships taking them to our plantations. So, wherever I have been in charge, I've made it my main concern to ensure the Negroes on my ship are treated kindly; I've always instructed my white crew to treat them with humanity and care. I’ve typically found that this approach benefits me, both by preventing them from mutinying and keeping them healthy.
And whereas it may seem strange to those that are unacquainted with the method of managing them, how we can carry so many hundreds together in a small Ship, and keep them in order; I shall just mention what is generally practised. When we purchase grown People, I acquaint them by the Interpreter, “That, now they are become my Property, I think fit to let them know what they are bought for, that they may be easy[163] in their Minds:” (For these poor People are generally under terrible Apprehensions upon their being bought by white Men, many being afraid that we design to eat them; which, I have been told, is a story much credited by the inland Negroes;) “So after informing them, That they are bought to till the Ground in our Country, with several other Matters; I then acquaint them, how they are to behave themselves on board, towards the white Men; that if any one abuses them, they are to complain to the Linguist, who is to inform me of it, and I will do them Justice: But if they make a Disturbance, or offer to strike a white Man, they must expect to be severely punished.”
And while it may seem unusual to those unfamiliar with the method of managing them, how we can keep so many hundreds together in a small ship and maintain order, I will briefly explain what is generally done. When we buy adults, I inform them through the interpreter, “Now that you are my property, I think it's important to let you know what you are bought for, so you can feel at ease in your minds.” (Because these poor people often have terrible fears when they are purchased by white men, many fearing that we plan to eat them; this is a story that many inland Black people believe.) “So after letting them know that they are bought to work the land in our country, along with other matters, I then tell them how to behave on board towards the white men; that if anyone mistreats them, they should complain to the linguist, who will inform me, and I will ensure they receive justice. But if they cause a disturbance or attempt to strike a white man, they should expect to be severely punished.”
When we purchase the Negroes, we couple the sturdy Men together with Irons; but we suffer the Women and Children to go freely about: And soon after we have sail’d from the Coast, we undo all the Mens Irons.
When we buy the Negroes, we chain the strong men together; but we let the women and children move around freely. Soon after we leave the coast, we take off all the men's chains.
They are fed twice a day, and are allowed in fair Weather to come on Deck[164] at seven a clock in the Morning, and to remain there, if they think proper, till Sun setting. Every Monday Morning they are served with Pipes and Tobacco, which they are very fond of. The Men Negroes lodge separate from the Women and Children; and the places where they all lye are cleaned every day, some white Men being appointed to see them do it.
They are fed twice a day and are allowed to come on deck in nice weather at seven in the morning, staying there as long as they want until sunset. Every Monday morning, they receive pipes and tobacco, which they really enjoy. The men and women, as well as the children, sleep in separate areas. The sleeping areas are cleaned daily, with some white men assigned to make sure it gets done.[164]
It would be tedious to the Reader as well as to my self, should I relate all the Particulars of our Management of them, and the Care we take to keep them in health and order; wherefore I shall conclude with this remark, That if a Commander is himself well inclined, and has good Officers to execute his Orders, the Negroes on board may be easily governed; and many Difficulties (which unavoidably arise amongst such Numbers) got over with a little trouble.
It would be boring for both the Reader and myself if I went into all the details of how we manage them and the efforts we put into keeping them healthy and organized. So, I’ll wrap up with this observation: if a Commander is well-intentioned and has capable Officers to carry out his Orders, the crew on board can be easily managed; many challenges (which inevitably come up with large groups) can be overcome with just a bit of effort.
The first Mutiny I saw among the Negroes, happened during my first Voyage, in the Year 1704. It was on board the Eagle Galley of London, commanded by my Father, with whom I was as Purser.[165] We had bought our Negroes in the River of Old Callabar in the Bay of Guinea. At the time of their mutinying we were in that River, having four hundred of them on board, and not above ten white Men who were able to do Service: For several of our Ship’s Company were dead, and many more sick; besides, two of our Boats were just then gone with twelve People on Shore to fetch Wood, which lay in sight of the Ship. All these Circumstances put the Negroes on consulting how to mutiny, which they did at four a clock in the Afternoon, just as they went to Supper. But as we had always carefully examined the Mens Irons, both Morning and Evening, none had got them off, which in a great measure contributed to our Preservation. Three white Men stood on the Watch with Cutlaces in their Hands. One of them who was on the Forecastle, a stout fellow, seeing some of the Men Negroes take hold of the chief Mate, in order to throw him over board, he laid on them so heartily with the flat side of his Cutlace, that they soon[166] quitted the Mate, who escaped from them, and run on the Quarter-Deck to get Arms. I was then sick with an Ague, and lying on a Couch in the great Cabbin, the Fit being just come on. However, I no sooner heard the Outcry, That the Slaves were mutinying, but I took two Pistols, and run on the Deck with them; where meeting with my Father and the chief Mate, I delivered a Pistol to each of them. Whereupon they went forward on the Booms, calling to the Negroe Men that were on the Forecastle; but they did not regard their Threats, being busy with the Centry, (who had disengaged the chief Mate,) and they would have certainly killed him with his own Cutlace, could they have got it from him; but they could not break the Line wherewith the Handle was fastened to his Wrist. And so, tho’ they had seized him, yet they could not make use of his Cutlace. Being thus disappointed, they endeavoured to throw him overboard, but he held so fast by one of them that they could not do it. My Father seeing this stout Man[167] in so much Danger, ventured amongst the Negroes, to save him; and fired his Pistol over their Heads, thinking to frighten them. But a lusty Slave struck him with a Billet so hard, that he was almost stunned. The Slave was going to repeat the Blow, when a young Lad about seventeen years old, whom we had been kind to, interposed his Arm, and received the Blow, by which his Arm-bone was fractured. At the same instant the Mate fired his Pistol, and shot the Negroe that had struck my Father. At the sight of this the Mutiny ceased, and all the Men-negroes on the Forecastle threw themselves flat on their Faces, crying out for Mercy.
The first mutiny I witnessed among the Negroes happened during my first voyage in 1704. It was on the Eagle Galley from London, commanded by my father, with me serving as the purser.[165] We had purchased our Negroes in the River of Old Callabar in the Bay of Guinea. At the time of their mutiny, we were in that river, carrying four hundred of them on board, with only about ten white men capable of doing any work. Several of our crew had died, many more were sick, and two of our boats had just left with twelve people on shore to collect wood, which was in sight of the ship. All these factors prompted the Negroes to plot their mutiny, which they initiated at four o'clock in the afternoon, right as they were about to have supper. Luckily, we had always carefully checked the men's irons both morning and evening, so none had managed to free themselves, which significantly helped our survival. Three white men were on watch with cutlasses in their hands. One of them, a strong man stationed on the forecastle, noticed some of the Negroes grabbing the chief mate to throw him overboard. He swung his cutlass at them fiercely, compelling them to let go of the mate, who then escaped and ran to the quarter-deck to arm himself. At that moment, I was sick with a fever and lying on a couch in the main cabin, the fit just beginning. However, as soon as I heard the cry that the slaves were mutinying, I grabbed two pistols and rushed onto the deck. There, I met my father and the chief mate, and I handed a pistol to each of them. They moved forward on the booms, calling out to the Negroes on the forecastle, but the Negroes ignored their threats, focused on the sentry who had freed the chief mate. They would have surely killed him with his own cutlass if they could have taken it from him, but they couldn't break the line that secured the handle to his wrist. Even though they had grabbed him, they couldn’t use his cutlass. Disappointed, they attempted to throw him overboard, but he held on tightly to one of them, making it impossible. My father, seeing this brave man in such danger, ventured among the Negroes to save him and fired his pistol over their heads in an attempt to scare them. But a strong slave struck him with a piece of wood so hard that it nearly knocked him out. The slave was about to hit him again when a young boy, about seventeen years old, whom we had treated kindly, stepped in and took the blow, fracturing his arm in the process. At that moment, the mate fired his pistol and shot the Negro who had hit my father. This caused the mutiny to stop, and all the Negroes on the forecastle dropped flat on their faces, begging for mercy.
Upon examining into the matter, we found, there were not above twenty Men Slaves concerned in this Mutiny; and the two Ringleaders were missing, having, it seems, jumped overboard as soon as they found their Project defeated, and were drowned. This was all the Loss we suffered on this occasion: For the Negroe that was shot by the Mate, the Surgeon, beyond all Expectation, cured. And I[168] had the good Fortune to lose my Ague, by the fright and hurry I was put into. Moreover, the young Man, who had received the Blow on his Arm to save my Father, was cured by the Surgeon in our Passage to Virginia. At our Arrival in that place we gave him his Freedom; and a worthy Gentleman, one Colonel Carter, took him into his Service, till he became well enough acquainted in the Country to provide for himself.
After looking into the situation, we found that there were no more than twenty enslaved men involved in this revolt, and the two ringleaders were missing, having apparently jumped overboard as soon as they realized their plan had failed, and they drowned. That was all the loss we experienced this time: the enslaved man who got shot by the mate was, surprisingly, cured by the surgeon. And I had the good luck of recovering from my fever because of the fright and chaos I went through. Furthermore, the young man who was injured on his arm while trying to save my father was treated by the surgeon during our journey to Virginia. Upon arriving there, we granted him his freedom, and a respectable gentleman, Colonel Carter, took him into his service until he became well enough acquainted with the area to support himself.
I have been several Voyages, when there has been no Attempt made by our Negroes to mutiny; which, I believe, was owing chiefly, to their being kindly used, and to my Officers Care in keeping a good Watch. But sometimes we meet with stout stubborn People amongst them, who are never to be made easy; and these are generally some of the Cormantines, a Nation of the Gold Coast. I went in the year 1721, in the Henry of London, a Voyage to that part of the Coast, and bought a good many of these People. We were obliged to secure them very well in irons, and watch them narrowly: Yet[169] they nevertheless mutinied, tho’ they had little prospect of succeeding. I lay at that time near a place called Mumfort on the Gold-Coast, having near five hundred Negroes on board, three hundred of which were Men. Our Ship’s Company consisted of fifty white People, all in health: And I had very good Officers; so that I was very easy in all respects.
I've taken several voyages where our crew of enslaved people didn’t try to rebel, which I think was mainly because they were treated well and my officers were diligent in keeping a close watch. However, sometimes we encounter stubborn individuals among them who are impossible to placate, typically some of the Cormantines, a group from the Gold Coast. In 1721, I went on the Henry from London to that part of the Coast and purchased quite a few of these individuals. We had to secure them tightly in chains and keep a close eye on them. Yet[169] they still attempted a mutiny, even though their chances of success were slim. At that time, I was anchored near a place called Mumfort on the Gold Coast, with almost five hundred enslaved people on board, three hundred of whom were men. Our ship's crew consisted of fifty healthy white people, and I had very competent officers, so I felt quite at ease.
This Mutiny began at Midnight (the Moon then shining very bright) in this manner. Two Men that stood Centry at the Fore-hatch way, where the Men Slaves came up to go to the house of Office, permitted four to go to that place; but neglected to lay the Gratings again, as they should have done: Whereupon four more Negroes came on Deck, who had got their Irons off, and the four in the house of Office having done the same, all the eight fell on the two Centries, who immediately called out for help. The Negroes endeavoured to get their Cutlaces from them, but the Lineyards (that is the Lines by which the handles of the Cutlaces were fastned to the Mens Wrists) were so[170] twisted in the Scuffle, that they could not get them off before we came to their Assistance. The Negroes perceiving several white Men coming towards them, with Arms in their hands, quitted the Centries, and jumped over the Ship’s side into the Sea.
This mutiny started at midnight (the moon was shining really bright) like this. Two men guarding the fore hatch, where the enslaved people came up to use the restroom, let four of them go there; but they forgot to close the grating again like they should have. Because of this, four more enslaved people climbed onto the deck, having managed to get their shackles off, and the four in the restroom did the same. All eight attacked the two guards, who immediately called for help. The enslaved people tried to take their knives from the guards, but the lines (the ones that connected the handles of the knives to the guards' wrists) got twisted in the scuffle, so they couldn’t get them off before we arrived to assist. When the enslaved people saw several white men approaching with weapons, they abandoned the guards and jumped over the side of the ship into the sea.
I being by this time come forward on the Deck, my first care was to secure the Gratings, to prevent any more Negroes from coming up; and then I ordered People to get into the Boat, and save those that had jumped over-board, which they luckily did: For they found them all clinging to the Cables the Ship was moored by.
I had come up on deck by this time, and my first priority was to secure the grates to stop any more Black people from coming up. Then I ordered people to get into the boat and rescue those who had jumped overboard, which they fortunately did. They found them all clinging to the cables the ship was moored to.
After we had secured these People, I called the Linguists, and ordered them to bid the Men-Negroes between Decks be quiet; (for there was a great noise amongst them.) On their being silent, I asked, “What had induced them to mutiny?” They answered, “I was a great Rogue to buy them, in order to carry them away from their own Country; and that they were resolved to regain their Liberty if possible.” I replied,[171] “That they had forfeited their Freedom before I bought them, either by Crimes, or by being taken in War, according to the Custom of their Country; and they being now my Property, I was resolved to let them feel my Resentment, if they abused my Kindness: Asking at the same time, Whether they had been ill used by the white Men, or had wanted for any thing the Ship afforded?” To this they replied, “They had nothing to complain of.” Then I observed to them, “That if they should gain their Point and escape to the Shore, it would be no Advantage to them, because their Countrymen would catch them, and sell them to other Ships.” This served my purpose, and they seemed to be convinced of their Fault, begging, “I would forgive them, and promising for the future to be obedient, and never mutiny again, if I would not punish them this time.” This I readily granted, and so they went to sleep. When Daylight came we called the Men Negroes up on Deck, and examining their Irons, found[172] them all secure. So this Affair happily ended, which I was very glad of; for these People are the stoutest and most sensible Negroes on the Coast: Neither are they so weak as to imagine as others do, that we buy them to eat them; being satisfied we carry them to work in our Plantations, as they do in their own Country.
After we had secured these people, I called the translators and asked them to tell the men below deck to be quiet, as there was a lot of noise among them. Once they calmed down, I asked, “What made you all want to mutiny?” They replied, “You are a terrible person for buying us just to take us away from our home; we are determined to regain our freedom if we can.” I responded, [171] “You lost your freedom before I bought you, either through crimes or by being captured in war, according to your own customs. Now that you are my property, I am determined to make sure you understand my anger if you take advantage of my kindness. I also asked if the white men had mistreated them or if they lacked anything the ship had to offer.” They said, “We have nothing to complain about.” Then I pointed out, “If you manage to escape to the shore, it won't help you, because your fellow countrymen would catch you and sell you to other ships.” This seemed to convince them of their error, and they pleaded with me to forgive them, promising to be obedient in the future and never mutiny again if I would not punish them this time. I readily agreed, and they went to sleep. When morning came, we called the men up on deck, and after checking their handcuffs, found them all secure. So this situation ended happily, which I was very relieved about; these people are the strongest and smartest Negroes on the coast. They are not so naive as to think, like others do, that we buy them to eat them; they understand that we take them to work on our plantations, just like they do in their own country.
However, a few days after this, we discovered they were plotting again, and preparing to mutiny. For some of the Ringleaders proposed to one of our Linguists, If he could procure them an Ax, they would cut the Cables the Ship rid by in the night; and so on her driving (as they imagined) ashore, they should get out of our hands, and then would become his Servants as long as they lived.
However, a few days later, we found out they were scheming again and getting ready to rebel. Some of the leaders suggested to one of our Linguists that if he could get them an ax, they would cut the cables the ship was anchored by at night. They thought that once the ship drifted ashore, they could escape our control and then would serve him for as long as they lived.
For the better understanding of this I must observe here, that these Linguists are Natives and Freemen of the Country, whom we hire on account of their speaking good English, during the time we remain trading on the Coast; and they are likewise Brokers between us and the black Merchants.
To better understand this, I should note that these linguists are locals and free citizens of the country whom we hire because they speak good English while we are trading along the coast. They also act as brokers between us and the black merchants.
This Linguist was so honest as to acquaint me with what had been proposed to him; and advised me to keep a strict Watch over the Slaves: For tho’ he had represented to them the same as I had done on their mutinying before, That they would be all catch’d again, and sold to other Ships, in case they could carry their Point, and get on Shore; yet it had no effect upon them.
This linguist was honest enough to tell me about what he had been told; and he advised me to keep a close watch on the slaves. Even though he had warned them just like I had during their previous mutiny, that they would all be caught again and sold to other ships if they succeeded in their plan and made it to shore, it didn’t have any impact on them.
This gave me a good deal of Uneasiness. For I knew several Voyages had proved unsuccessful by Mutinies; as they occasioned either the total loss of the Ship and the white Mens Lives; or at least by rendring it absolutely necessary to kill or wound a great number of the Slaves, in order to prevent a total Destruction. Moreover, I knew many of these Cormantine Negroes despised Punishment, and even Death it self: It having often happened at Barbadoes and other Islands, that on their being any ways hardly dealt with, to break them of their Stubbornness in refusing to work, twenty or more have hang’d themselves at a time in a Plantation.[174] However, about a Month after this, a sad Accident happened, that brought our Slaves to be more orderly, and put them in a better Temper: And it was this. On our going from Mumfort to Annamaboe, which is the principal part on the Gold Coast, I met there with another of my Owner’s Ships, called the Elizabeth. One Captain Thompson that commanded her was dead; as also his chief Mate: Moreover the Ship had afterwards been taken at Cape Lahoe on the windward Coast, by Roberts the Pirate, with whom several of the Sailors belonging to her had entered. However, some of the Pirates had hindered the Cargoe’s being plundered, and obtained that the Ship should be restored to the second Mate: Telling him, “They did it out of respect to the generous Character his Owner bore, in doing good to poor Sailors.”
This made me quite anxious. I knew that several voyages had ended badly due to mutinies, which either resulted in the complete loss of the ship and the lives of the white crew, or, at the very least, required the killing or injuring of many slaves to avoid total destruction. Furthermore, I knew that many of these Cormantine Africans had little regard for punishment, even death itself. It often happened in Barbados and other islands that when they were treated harshly to force them to work, twenty or more had hanged themselves at once on a plantation.[174] However, about a month later, a tragic event occurred that made our slaves more cooperative and put them in a better mood. Here's what happened: while we were traveling from Mumfort to Annamaboe, the main area on the Gold Coast, I encountered another ship owned by my master, called the Elizabeth. The captain, Thompson, had died, along with his first mate. Additionally, the ship had been captured at Cape Lahoe on the windward coast by Roberts, the pirate, who had recruited several of its sailors. However, some of the pirates prevented the cargo from being looted and arranged for the ship to be returned to the second mate, stating, “They did it out of respect for the good reputation of his owner for helping poor sailors.”
When I met with this Vessel I had almost disposed of my Ship’s Cargoe; and the Elizabeth being under my Direction, I acquainted the second Mate, who then commanded her, That I thought it for[175] our Owner’s Interest, to take the Slaves from on board him, being about 120, into my Ship; and then go off the Coast; and that I would deliver him at the same time the Remains of my Cargoe, for him to dispose of with his own after I was sailed. This he readily complied with, but told me, “He feared his Ship’s Company would mutiny, and oppose my taking the Slaves from him:” And indeed, they came at that instant in a Body on the Quarter-deck; where one spoke for the rest, telling me plainly, “they would not allow the Slaves to be taken out by me.” I found by this they had lost all respect for their present Commander, who indeed was a weak Man. However, I calmly asked the reason, “Why they offered to oppose my taking the Slaves?” To which they answered, “I had no business with them.” On this I desired the Captain to send to his Scrutore, for the Book of Instructions Captain Thompson had received from our Owner; and he read to them, at my request, that Part, in which their former Captain, or his[176] Successor (in case of Death) was to follow my Orders. Hereupon they all cried out, “they should remain a great while longer on the Coast to purchase more Slaves, if I took these from them, which they were resolved to oppose.” I answered, “That such of the Ship’s Company as desired it, I would receive on board my own; where they should have the same Wages they had at present on board the Elizabeth, and I would send some of my own People to supply their Places.” This so reasonable an Offer was refused, one of the Men who was the Ship’s Cooper telling me, that the Slaves had been on board a long time, and they had great Friendship with them: therefore they would keep them. I asked him, “Whether he had ever been on the Coast of Guinea before?” He replied no. Then I told him. “I supposed he had not by his way of talking, and advised him not to rely on the Friendship of the Slaves, which he might have reason to repent of when too late.” And ’tis remarkable this very person was killed by them[177] the next Night, as shall be presently related.
When I met with this ship, I had nearly sold off my cargo, and since the Elizabeth was under my command, I informed the second mate, who was in charge, that I thought it was in our owner's best interest to take the slaves onboard—about 120 of them—into my ship and then leave the coast. I also offered to hand over the remaining cargo for him to sell after I had departed. He agreed to this but mentioned he was worried his crew might rebel and oppose my taking the slaves from him. Just then, the crew approached the quarterdeck as a group, with one person speaking for the rest, clearly stating they wouldn't allow me to take the slaves. I realized they had completely lost respect for their commander, who was indeed a weak man. Nevertheless, I calmly asked why they were opposing my taking the slaves. They replied that I had no right to them. I then asked the captain to get his instructions book, which Captain Thompson had received from our owner, and he read the relevant part at my request, which stated that their previous captain or his successor (in case of death) was to follow my orders. Upon hearing this, they all shouted that they would stay on the coast for a long time to acquire more slaves if I took these from them, and they were determined to resist. I said that any of the ship's crew who wanted to join my crew would be welcome aboard, where they'd receive the same wages they currently earned on the Elizabeth, and I would send some of my own people to take their places. This reasonable offer was rejected, with one of the crew members, the ship's cooper, telling me that they had developed a strong bond with the slaves, which was why they wished to keep them. I asked him if he had ever been to the coast of Guinea before, and he replied no. I then noted that I assumed he hadn't based on his comments and advised him not to rely on the slaves' loyalty, as it might lead to regret later on. Interestingly, this very person was killed by the slaves the following night, as will be explained shortly.
So finding that reasoning with these Men was to no Purpose, I told them, “When I came with my Boats to fetch the Slaves, they should find me as resolute to chastise such of them as should dare to oppose me, as I had been condescending to convince them by arguing calmly.” So I took my leave of their Captain, telling him, “I would come next Morning to finish the Affair.”
So realizing that talking to these men was useless, I told them, “When I came with my boats to pick up the slaves, they would find me just as determined to punish anyone who dared to oppose me as I had been willing to persuade them by arguing calmly.” Then I said goodbye to their captain, telling him, “I’ll come back tomorrow to settle the matter.”
But that very Night, which was near a month after the Mutiny on board of us at Mumfort, the Moon shining now very bright, as it did then, we heard, about ten a Clock, two or three Musquets fired on board the Elizabeth. Upon that I ordered all our Boats to be manned, and having secured every thing in our Ship, to prevent our Slaves from mutinying, I went my self in our Pinnace, (the other Boats following me) on board the Elizabeth. In our way we saw two Negroes swimming from her, but before we[178] could reach them with our Boats, some Sharks rose from the bottom, and tore them in Pieces. We came presently along the side of the Ship, where we found two Men-Negroes holding by a Rope, with their Heads just above water; they were afraid, it seems, to swim from the Ship’s side, having seen their Companions devoured just before by the Sharks. These two Slaves we took into our Boat, and then went into the Ship, where we found the Negroes very quiet, and all under Deck; but the Ship’s Company was on the Quarter-deck, in a great Confusion, saying, “The Cooper, who had been placed centry at the Fore-hatch way, over the Men-Negroes, was, they believed, kill’d by them.” I was surprized to hear this, wondring that these cowardly fellows, who had so vigorously opposed my taking the Slaves out, a few hours before, had not Courage enough to venture forward, to save their Ship-mate; but had secured themselves by shutting the Quarter-deck-door, where they all stood with Arms in their Hands. So I[179] went to the fore-part of the Ship with some of my People, and there we found the Cooper lying on his back quite dead, his Scull being cleft asunder with a Hatchet that lay by him. At the sight of this I called for the Linguist, and bid him ask the Negroes between Decks, “Who had killed the white Man?” They answered, “They knew nothing of the matter; for there had been no design of mutinying amongst them:” Which upon Examination we found true; for above one hundred of the Negroes then on board, being bought to Windward, did not understand a word of the Gold-Coast Language, and so had not been in the Plot. But this Mutiny was contrived by a few Cormantee-Negroes, who had been purchased about two or three days before. At last, one of the two Men-Negroes we had taken up along the Ship side, impeached his Companion, and he readily confessed he had kill’d the Cooper, with no other View, but that he and his Countrymen might escape undiscovered by swimming on Shore. For on their coming[180] upon Deck, they observed, that all the white Men set to watch were asleep; and having found the Cook’s Hatchet by the Fire-place, he took it up, not designing then to do any Mischief with it; but passing by the Cooper, who was centry, and he beginning to awake, the Negroe rashly struck him on the head with it, and then jump’d overboard. Upon this frank Confession, the white Men would have cut him to Pieces; but I prevented it, and carried him to my own Ship. Early the next morning, I went on board the Elizabeth with my Boats, and sent away all the Negroes then in her, into my own Ship: not one of the other Ship’s Company offering to oppose it. Two of them, the Carpenter and Steward, desired to go with me, which I readily granted; and by way of Security for the future Success of the Voyage, I put my chief Mate, and four of my under Officers (with their own Consent,) on board the Elizabeth; and they arrived, about five Months after this, at Jamaica, having disposed of most part of the Cargoe.
But that very night, nearly a month after the mutiny aboard us at Mumfort, with the moon shining bright like before, we heard, around ten o'clock, two or three muskets fired on the Elizabeth. Because of that, I ordered all our boats to be manned. After securing everything in our ship to prevent our slaves from mutinying, I went myself in our pinnace, with the other boats following me, on board the Elizabeth. On our way, we spotted two black men swimming away from her, but before we could reach them with our boats, some sharks came up from below and tore them apart. We soon approached the side of the ship, where we found two black men clinging to a rope, their heads barely above water; they seemed too scared to swim away from the ship, having just seen their companions devoured by the sharks. We took those two slaves into our boat and then boarded the ship, where we found the black men very calm and all below deck, while the crew was in chaos on the quarter deck, saying, “They believed the cooper, who had been stationed at the fore hatch over the black men, was killed by them.” I was shocked to hear this, wondering why these cowardly men, who had so strongly opposed me taking the slaves out just a few hours earlier, didn’t have the courage to save their shipmate; instead, they had locked themselves behind the quarter-deck door, armed and waiting. So I went to the front of the ship with some of my crew and found the cooper lying on his back, dead, with his skull cleaved open by a hatchet that lay next to him. Seeing this, I called for the linguist and told him to ask the negroes below decks, “Who killed the white man?” They replied, “They knew nothing about it; there had been no plan to mutiny among them.” Upon investigation, we discovered this was true, as over a hundred of the black men aboard, having been bought from upwind, didn’t understand a single word of Gold Coast language, and therefore had no part in the plot. The mutiny had actually been organized by a few Cormantee negroes, purchased just two or three days prior. Eventually, one of the two black men we had rescued from the side of the ship turned on his companion, who then admitted he had killed the cooper solely so he and his countrymen could escape unseen by swimming ashore. When they came above deck, they noticed that all the white men on guard were asleep; and finding the cook’s hatchet by the fireplace, he picked it up, not intending any harm at that moment, but when passing the cooper, who was supposed to be on guard and was starting to wake, the black man foolishly struck him on the head with it and then jumped overboard. After his honest confession, the white men wanted to tear him apart, but I stopped them and took him back to my ship. Early the next morning, I went back to the Elizabeth with my boats and sent all the black men on board her to my own ship; not one of the crew from the other ship dared to object. Two of them, the carpenter and steward, wanted to come with me, which I gladly allowed; and to secure the future success of the voyage, I placed my chief mate and four of my junior officers (with their own consent) aboard the Elizabeth; they eventually arrived, about five months later, in Jamaica, having sold off most of the cargo.
After having sent the Slaves out of the Elizabeth, as I have just now mentioned, I went on board my own Ship; and there being then in the Road of Anamaboe, eight sail of Ships besides us, I sent an Officer in my Boat to the Commanders of them, “To desire their Company on board my Ship, because I had an Affair of great Consequence to communicate to them.” Soon after, most of them were pleased to come; and I having acquainted them with the whole Matter, and they having also heard the Negroe’s Confession, “That he had killed the white Man;” They unanimously advised me to put him to death; arguing, “That Blood required Blood, by all Laws both divine and human; especially as there was in this Case the clearest Proof, namely the Murderer’s Confession: Moreover this would in all probability prevent future Mischiefs; for by publickly executing this Person at the Ship’s Fore-yard Arm, the Negroes on board their Ships would see it; and as they were very much disposed to mutiny, it might prevent them from[182] attempting it.” These Reasons, with my being in the same Circumstances, made me comply.
After sending the slaves off the Elizabeth, as I just mentioned, I boarded my own ship. There were eight other ships in the road of Anamaboe, so I sent an officer in my boat to their commanders, asking them to come aboard my ship because I had an important matter to discuss with them. Soon after, most of them agreed to come, and I explained the whole situation to them. They also heard the slave's confession, “That he had killed the white man.” They all agreed that I should execute him, arguing, “Blood demands blood, according to all laws, both divine and human; especially since there was clear evidence, namely the murderer’s confession. Additionally, this would likely prevent future incidents; by publicly executing this person at the ship’s fore-yard arm, the slaves on board their ships would see it; and since they were already leaning towards mutiny, it might stop them from attempting it.” These reasons, along with my similar situation, led me to comply.
Accordingly we acquainted the Negroe, that he was to die in an hour’s time for murdering the white Man. He answered, “He must confess it was a rash Action in him to kill him; but he desired me to consider, that if I put him to death, I should lose all the Money I had paid for him.” To this I bid the Interpreter reply, “That tho’ I knew it was customary in his Country to commute for Murder by a Sum of Money, yet it was not so with us; and he should find that I had no regard to my Profit in this respect: For as soon as an Hour-Glass, just then turned, was run out, he should be put to death;” At which I observed he shewed no Concern.
Accordingly, we told the Black man that he was going to die in an hour for murdering the white man. He replied, “I must admit it was a rash decision to kill him, but I ask you to consider that if you execute me, you’ll lose all the money you’ve paid for me.” I instructed the interpreter to respond, “Even though I know it's customary in your country to settle a murder case with money, that's not how it works here; you should understand that I don't care about my profit in this matter. As soon as the hourglass we just turned runs out, you will be executed.” I noticed he showed no concern at this.
Hereupon the other Commanders went on board their respective Ships, in order to have all their Negroes upon Deck at the time of Execution, and to inform them of the occasion of it. The Hour-Glass[183] being run out, the Murderer was carried on the Ship’s Forecastle, where he had a Rope fastened under his Arms, in order to be hoisted up to the Fore-yard Arm, to be shot to death. This some of his Countrymen observing, told him, (as the Linguist informed me afterwards) “That they would not have him be frightened; for it was plain I did not design to put him to death, otherwise the Rope would have been put about his neck, to hang him.” For it seems they had no thought of his being shot; judging he was only to be hoisted up to the Yard-arm, in order to scare him: But they immediately saw the contrary; for as soon as he was hoisted up, ten white Men who were placed behind the Barricado on the Quarter-deck, fired their Musquets, and instantly killed him. This struck a sudden Damp upon our Negroe-Men, who thought, that, on account of my Profit, I would not have executed him.
Then the other commanders went aboard their ships to gather all their crew members on deck for the execution and to inform them of the reason behind it. Once the hourglass ran out, the murderer was taken to the ship's forecastle, where a rope was fastened under his arms to hoist him up to the foreyard arm for his execution by firing squad. Some of his fellow countrymen, seeing this, told him (as the translator later informed me) that he shouldn't be scared; they believed that I didn't intend to kill him, as the rope was not around his neck for hanging. They thought he was just being hoisted up to scare him. But they quickly realized the truth, because as soon as he was lifted up, ten white men positioned behind the barricade on the quarterdeck fired their muskets and killed him instantly. This created a sudden feeling of dread among our crew, who thought that for my own gain, I would not go through with the execution.
The Body being let down upon the Deck, the Head was cut off, and thrown overboard. This last part was done, to[184] let our Negroes see, that all who offended thus, should be served in the same manner. For many of the Blacks believe, that if they are put to death and not dismembred, they shall return again to their own Country, after they are thrown overboard. But neither the Person that was executed, nor his Countrymen of Cormantee (as I understood afterwards,) were so weak as to believe any such thing; tho’ many I had on board from other Countries had that Opinion.
The body was lowered onto the deck, the head was cut off, and tossed overboard. This was done to [184] show our crew that anyone who disobeys would meet the same fate. Many of the Black crew members think that if they are executed and not dismembered, they will return to their home country after being thrown overboard. However, neither the person who was executed nor his fellow countrymen from Cormantee (as I later found out) were foolish enough to believe that; although many others on board from different countries held that belief.
When the Execution was over, I ordered the Linguist to acquaint the Men-Negroes, “That now they might judge, no one that killed a white Man should be spared:” And I thought proper now to acquaint them once for all, “That if they attempted to mutiny again, I should be obliged to punish the Ringleaders with death, in order to prevent further Mischief.” Upon this they all promised to be obedient, and I assured them they should be kindly used, if they kept their Promise: which they faithfully did. For we sailed, two days after, from[185] Anamaboe for Jamaica; and tho’ they were on board near four Months, from our going off the Coast, till they were sold at that Island, they never gave us the least reason to be jealous of them; which doubtless was owing to the Execution of the white Man’s Murderer.
When the execution was over, I directed the interpreter to inform the men, "Now you can judge that anyone who kills a white man will not be spared." I also thought it was important to let them know once and for all, "If you try to mutiny again, I will have to punish the ringleaders with death to prevent any further trouble." They all promised to be obedient, and I assured them they would be treated kindly if they kept their word, which they did. We set sail two days later from [185] Anamaboe for Jamaica; and even though they were on board for nearly four months from the time we left the coast until they were sold on that island, they never gave us any reason to mistrust them, which was likely due to the execution of the man who murdered the white man.
These three Mutinies, I have here related, are all that ever happened where I was present, tho’ I have gone many Voyages to the Coast of Guinea. But I have heard of several, that have ended in a very tragical manner. However to avoid being tedious, I shall relate only one, which is very remarkable, and happen’d on board the Ferrers Galley of London Capt. Messervy; who by his over-care, and too great Kindness to the Negroes on board his Ship, was destroyed by them, and the Voyage at last came to nothing. I met this Gentleman at Anamaboe on the Coast of Guinea, in January 1722. At his coming on board my Ship, he informed me of his good fortune, in that he had purchased near 300 Negroes in a few Days, at a place called Cetre-Crue, on[186] the windward part of the Coast of Guinea; which happened in this manner.
These three mutinies I've mentioned are all that occurred while I was there, even though I've traveled to the coast of Guinea many times. I've heard about several others that ended tragically. To keep things brief, I'll share just one that stands out, which took place on the Ferrers Galley from London, commanded by Messervy; who, due to his excessive care and kindness toward the Negroes on his ship, met a tragic fate at their hands, and the voyage ultimately came to nothing. I encountered this gentleman at Anamaboe on the coast of Guinea in January 1722. When he came aboard my ship, he told me about his good fortune in having purchased nearly 300 Negroes in just a few days from a place called Cetre-Crue, on[186] the windward side of the coast of Guinea; which happened like this.
It seems the Inhabitants of this place, which lies near the Sea-side, had been often misused by some inland People, who for a long time had treated them in a villainous manner, whenever they went to their Towns with Salt, or any other Commodities to sell. For knowing the People of Cetre-Crue, did in a great measure depend on them for their Food, which is Rice, they took their Commodities, and gave them just what quantity of Rice they pleased, in exchange. The Cetre-Crues having long complained of this Injury, without redress, resolved to bear it no longer, but to revenge themselves by Arms. And they were crowned with Success, destroying and taking all the Inhabitants of the principal Town where they used to go and buy Rice.
It seems the people living in this area by the seaside had often been mistreated by some inland folks, who had long treated them poorly whenever they came to their towns to sell salt or other goods. Knowing that the people of Cetre-Crue largely depended on them for their food, mainly rice, they took their goods and only offered them whatever amount of rice they chose in return. The Cetre-Crues had complained about this unfair treatment for a long time without any help, so they decided they couldn't tolerate it anymore and sought to take revenge through force. They succeeded, destroying and capturing all the people from the main town where they used to go to buy rice.
Captain Messervy happened to anchor near Cetre-Crue just at that time, and had the opportunity of purchasing a great many of the Captives at an easy rate. For the Conquerors were glad to get something[187] for them at that instant, since if a Ship had not been in the Road, they would have been obliged to have killed most of the Men-Captives, for their own Security.
Captain Messervy happened to anchor near Cetre-Crue at that moment and had the chance to buy many of the captives at a low price. The conquerors were eager to get something[187] for them right then, because if a ship hadn't been in the area, they would have had to kill most of the male captives for their own safety.
After the Captain had told me this story, he desired me to spare him some Rice, having heard, I had purchased a great many Tuns to the Windward; where he had bought little, not expecting to meet with so many Slaves. This request I could not comply with, having provided no more than was necessary for my self, and for another of my Owner’s Ships, which I quickly expected. And understanding from him, that he had never been on the Coast of Guinea before, I took the liberty to observe to him, “That as he had on board so many Negroes of one Town and Language, it required the utmost Care and Management to keep them from mutinying; and that I was sorry he had so little Rice for them: For I had experienced that the Windward Slaves are always very fond of it, it being their[188] usual Food in their own Country and he might certainly expect dissatisfactions and Uneasiness amongst them for want of a sufficient quantity.”
After the Captain told me this story, he asked me to share some rice, having heard I had bought a lot for the Windward side; he had bought very little, not expecting to find so many slaves. I couldn’t fulfill his request, as I had only enough for myself and for another of my owner’s ships, which I was expecting soon. When I learned from him that he had never been to the coast of Guinea before, I took the opportunity to point out, “Since you have so many people on board from one town and speaking the same language, it will take a lot of care and management to prevent them from revolting. I'm sorry you have so little rice for them. I’ve found that Windward slaves really like it, as it’s their usual food back home, and you can definitely expect some dissatisfaction and unrest among them due to the lack of sufficient amounts.”
This he took kindly, and having asked my Advice about other Matters, took his leave, inviting me to come next day to see him. I went accordingly on board his Ship, about three a clock in the afternoon. At four a clock the Negroes went to Supper, and Captain Messervy desired me to excuse him for a quarter of an hour, whilst he went forward to see the Men-Negroes served with Victuals. I observed from the Quarter-Deck, that he himself put Pepper and Palm Oyl amongst the Rice they were going to eat. When he came back to me, I could not forbear observing to him, “How imprudent it was in him to do so: For tho’ it was proper for a Commander sometimes to go forward, and observe how things were managed; yet he ought to take a proper time, and have a good many of his white People in Arms when he[189] went; or else the having him so much in their Power, might incourage the Slaves to mutiny: For he might depend upon it, they always aim at the chief Person in the Ship, whom they soon distinguish by the respect shown him by the rest of the People.”
This he accepted graciously, and after asking my advice on some other matters, he took his leave, inviting me to come see him the next day. I went on board his ship around three o'clock in the afternoon. At four o'clock, the Black crew members went to dinner, and Captain Messervy asked me to excuse him for a quarter of an hour while he went to check on the men getting their meals. I noticed from the quarterdeck that he himself added pepper and palm oil to the rice they were about to eat. When he returned, I couldn't help but point out to him, “How unwise it was to do that. While it's important for a captain to occasionally go forward and see how things are being handled, he should choose the right moment and have several of his white crew members armed when he goes. Otherwise, being so vulnerable might encourage the slaves to rebel. They always target the main person on the ship, who they can easily recognize by the respect the others show him.”
He thanked me for this Advice, but did not seem to relish it; saying, “He thought the old Proverb good, that The Master’s Eye makes the Horse fat.” We then fell into other Discourse, and among other things he told me, “He designed to go away in a few days:” Accordingly he sailed three days after for Jamaica. Some Months after I went for that place, where at my arrival I found his Ship, and had the following melancholy account of his Death, which happened about ten days after he left the coast of Guinea in this manner.
He thanked me for this advice, but didn’t seem to appreciate it, saying, “I think the old proverb is true: The Master’s Eye makes the Horse fat.” We then moved on to other topics, and among other things, he told me, “I plan to leave in a few days.” So, he set sail three days later for Jamaica. A few months later, I went to that place, where upon my arrival, I found his ship and received the following tragic news about his death, which occurred about ten days after he left the coast of Guinea, in this way.
Being on the Forecastle of the Ship, amongst the Men-Negroes, when they were eating their Victuals, they laid hold on him, and beat out his Brains with the[190] little Tubs, out of which they eat their boiled Rice. This Mutiny having been plotted amongst all the grown Negroes on board, they run from the fore-part of the Ship in a body, and endeavoured to force the Barricado on the Quarter-Deck, not regarding the Musquets or Half Pikes, that were presented to their Breasts by the white Men, through the Loop-holes. So that at last the chief Mate was obliged to order one of the Quarter-deck Guns laden with Partridge-Shot, to be fired amongst them; which occasioned a terrible Destruction: For there were near eighty Negroes kill’d and drowned, many jumping overboard when the Gun was fired. This indeed put an end to the Mutiny, but most of the Slaves that remained alive grew so sullen, that several of them were starved to death, obstinately refusing to take any Sustenance: And after the Ship was arrived at Jamaica, they attempted twice to mutiny, before the Sale of them began. This with their former Misbehaviour coming[191] to be publickly known, none of the Planters cared to buy them, tho’ offered at a low Price. So that this proved a very unsuccessful Voyage, for the Ship was detained many Months at Jamaica on that account, and at last was lost there in a Hurricane.
Being on the forecastle of the ship, among the men—African Americans—while they were eating their food, they grabbed him and smashed his head in with the little tubs they used for their boiled rice. This mutiny had been secretly planned by all the adult crew members on board; they ran from the front of the ship in a body and tried to break through the barricade on the quarterdeck, ignoring the muskets and half pikes pointed at them by the white crew through the loopholes. Eventually, the chief mate had to order one of the quarterdeck guns loaded with birdshot to be fired into them, which caused massive destruction. Almost eighty African Americans were killed and drowned, many jumping overboard when the gun was fired. This did indeed put an end to the mutiny, but most of the slaves who survived became so sullen that several of them starved to death, stubbornly refusing to eat. After the ship arrived in Jamaica, they tried to mutiny twice more before the sale of them began. Because their previous misbehavior became publicly known, none of the planters wanted to buy them, even when they were offered at a low price. As a result, this turned out to be a very unsuccessful voyage, as the ship was held up in Jamaica for many months due to this issue, and eventually, it was lost there in a hurricane.
The End of BOOK II.
The End of BOOK II.

Book III.
Containing an Account of the Author’s being taken by Pirates, on the North part of the Coast of Guinea, in the Bird Galley of London, belonging to the late Humphrey Morrice Esq; who was sole Owner of the said Ship. Interspersed with several Instances of the Author’s many Deliverances, and narrow Escapes from Death, during the time he was detain’d Prisoner by the Pirates.
This is the story of the author's capture by pirates off the northern coast of Guinea, on the Bird Galley from London, which belonged to the late Humphrey Morrice Esq; the sole owner of the ship. It includes various accounts of the author's numerous rescues and close calls with death while he was held prisoner by the pirates.
IN the beginning of November, in the Year 1718, the late Humphrey Morrice Esq; Merchant of London, appointed me Commander of the Bird Galley, and gave me Orders to go to Holland,[194] to take on board a Cargoe for the Coast of Africa: Having so done, we were unfortunately detained by contrary Winds, at Helvoet-Sluys, till the 10th day of December, when a violent Storm arose, and in the night following forc’d our Ship on Shore, with several others. The Ship, by the Strength of the Wind, and height of the Tide, was carried with a great force against the Dike, or Bank that secures the Land from being overflowed on such high Tides, which frightened the Inhabitants thereabouts not a little. Moreover, the Waves made her work so much on the Ground where she was stranded, that when the Tide had left her, we found she set seven foot deep abaft in the Strand; but had the Satisfaction to find, on Examination, the Ship had received no damage in her bottom. Having unloaded, and hired many Boors or Peasants, to dig a Trench of near 300 Foot in length to the low water mark, we waited some time for a high Tide; and then getting the Ship off, carried her into Helvoet-Sluys Peer.
In the beginning of November in the year 1718, the late Humphrey Morrice, Esq.; a merchant from London, appointed me as the Commander of the Bird Galley and instructed me to head to Holland,[194] to load cargo for the Coast of Africa. After doing that, we were unfortunately held up by contrary winds at Helvoet-Sluys until the 10th of December, when a violent storm hit. That night, our ship ended up on the shore along with several others. The force of the wind and the height of the tide pushed the ship fiercely against the dike, which protects the land from flooding during high tides, scaring the local residents quite a bit. Additionally, the waves caused the ship to settle deeply into the ground where it was stranded, and when the tide receded, we found it was sitting seven feet deep in the sand; however, we were relieved to discover upon inspection that the ship had not taken any damage to its hull. After unloading and hiring several peasants to dig a trench nearly 300 feet long to the low-water mark, we waited for a high tide. When it came, we managed to free the ship and took it into Helvoet-Sluys harbor.
Having refitted and loaded again, we proceeded on our Voyage the latter end of January; but the Wind changing by the time we were off the Isle of Wight, and rising to a great Storm westerly, we were forced into Spithead; where having lain some time, we sailed again with a fair Wind, which carried us above 70 Leagues to the westward of the Lizard. Here a severe Storm of Wind coming up at Southwest, obliged us to lye by, under a reef’d Mainsail; and it increased to such a violent Degree, that we expected to be swallowed up every Minute, by the great Sea which ran Mountains high; but it pleased God, that after 24 Hours, it began to abate, and we received no other damage, than the loss of the Lyon from the Ship’s Cut-water, which was washed away by the Sea.
After refitting and loading up again, we continued our voyage at the end of January; however, the wind changed by the time we were off the Isle of Wight and picked up to a fierce westerly storm, forcing us into Spithead. After staying there for a while, we set sail again with a good wind that took us over 70 leagues west of the Lizard. Here, a strong storm came up from the southwest, forcing us to hunker down with a reefed mainsail. The storm escalated to such an extreme that we thought we would be swallowed up at any moment by the massive waves. Thankfully, after 24 hours, the storm started to ease, and the only damage we suffered was the loss of the Lyon from the ship’s cutwater, which was washed away by the sea.
The Wind (after this Storm) remaining contrary a long time, with frequent hard Gales, obliged us at last to go for Kingsale in Ireland: Where having lain a few days, and repaired the Ship’s Head, with other things that were out of Order,[196] we sailed from that place, with a northerly Wind, the 10th day of March 1718-19, and had a short and fine Passage to the River Sieraleon; on the North Coast of Guinea, in the Latitude of 8 Deg. 30 Min. where we arrived the first day of April 1719: We met with nothing remarkable in our Passage, except, that near the Canary Islands, we were chased by a Ship whom we judged to be a Sallec-Rover; but our Ship outsailing her, they soon gave over the Chase.
The wind (after this storm) stayed against us for a long time, with frequent strong gales, which finally forced us to head for Kingsale in Ireland. After being there for a few days and fixing the ship’s bow along with other things that were out of order,[196] we sailed from that location with a north wind on the 10th of March 1718-19 and had a quick and pleasant journey to the River Sieraleon on the north coast of Guinea, at a latitude of 8 degrees 30 minutes. We arrived there on the first day of April 1719. We encountered nothing significant during our journey, except that near the Canary Islands, we were pursued by a ship we thought to be a Sallec-Rover; however, our ship was faster, and they soon gave up the chase.
There were, at the time of our unfortunate Arrival in the above mentioned River, three Pirate Ships, who had then taken ten English Ships in that place. As it is necessary for illustrating this Story, to give an Account how these three Ships came to meet there, I must observe, That the first of them which arrived in the River, was called the Rising Sun, one Cocklyn Commander, who had not with him above 25 Men. These having been with one Captain Moody, a famous Pirate, some Months before, in a Brigantine, which sailed very well, and[197] took the Rising Sun, they were morooned by him, (as they call it) that is forced on board that Ship, and deprived of their share of the Plunder, taken formerly by the Brigantine. These People being obliged to go away in her, with little Provision and Ammunition, chose Cocklyn for their Commander, and made for the River Sieraleon; where arriving, they surprized in his Sloop, one Segnor Joseph, a black Gentleman, who had been formerly in England, and was a Person of good account in this Country. This Man’s Ransom procured the Pirates a sufficient supply of Provision and Ammunition. Moreover, several Bristol and other Ships arriving soon after, were likewise taken; and many of their People entring with the Pirates, they had, when I fell into their hands, near 80 Men in all.
At the time of our unfortunate arrival in the aforementioned river, there were three pirate ships that had captured ten English ships in that area. To explain how these three ships ended up there, I need to mention that the first one to arrive was called the Rising Sun, commanded by a man named Cocklyn, who had no more than 25 men with him. These men had previously sailed with Captain Moody, a well-known pirate, a few months earlier in a brigantine that sailed quite well. Captain Moody had taken the Rising Sun and had marooned them on that ship, meaning they were forced onto it and cut off from their share of the treasure they had previously taken on the brigantine. Since they had to leave in the Rising Sun with limited provisions and ammunition, they chose Cocklyn as their commander and headed for the Sierra Leone River. Upon arrival, they surprised a man named Señor Joseph, a black gentleman who had previously been in England and was a respected figure in this country, in his sloop. The ransom for this man provided the pirates with enough supplies of provisions and ammunition. Additionally, several ships from Bristol and other places arrived shortly afterward and were also captured; many of their crew joined the pirates, giving them nearly 80 men when I encountered them.
The Crue of the Brigantine, who, with their Captain Moody, had thus forced their Companions away in the Rising Sun, soon after repenting of that Action, it bred great Discontents among them; so that they quarrelled with their Captain[198] and some others, whom they thought the chief Promoters of it; and at last forced him, with twelve others, into an open Boat, which they had taken a few days before, from the Spaniards of the Canary Islands; and as they never were heard of afterwards, doubtless they perished in the Ocean. After this, they chose one Le Bouse a Frenchman for their Commander, who carried them to the River Sieraleon, where they arrived about a Month after their parting with the Rising Sun.
The crew of the Brigantine, led by their captain Moody, soon regretted forcing their companions away in the Rising Sun. This decision caused a lot of unhappiness among them, leading to arguments with their captain[198] and with others they believed were the main instigators. Eventually, they forced him and twelve others into an open boat that they had taken a few days earlier from the Spaniards of the Canary Islands. They were never heard from again, so they likely perished in the ocean. After this, they chose a Frenchman named Le Bouse as their new commander, who took them to the Sierra Leone River, where they arrived about a month after leaving the Rising Sun.
At the first Appearance, of this Brigantine, Cocklyn and his Crew were under a great Surprize; but when they understood how Moody and some others had been served by them, they cheerfully joined their Brethren in Iniquity.
At the first sight of this brigantine, Cocklyn and his crew were really surprised. But once they found out how Moody and a few others had been treated by them, they happily joined their fellow wrongdoers.
On the same day also arrived one Captain Davis, who had been pirating in a Sloop, and had taken a large Ship at the Cape de Verd Islands. He coming into Sieraleon with her, it put the other two Pirates into some fear, believing at first it was a Man of War: But upon discovering[199] her black Flag at the Main-top mast-head, which Pirate Ships usually hoist to terrify Merchant-Men; they were easy in their Minds, and a little time after, saluted one another with their Cannon.
On the same day, Captain Davis arrived, having been pirating in a sloop and had captured a large ship at the Cape Verde Islands. When he came into Sierra Leone with her, the other two pirates felt a bit nervous, thinking at first it was a warship. But when they saw[199] her black flag at the main topmast, which pirate ships usually raise to scare merchant ships, they relaxed. After a little while, they greeted each other with cannon fire.
This Davis was a generous Man, and kept his Crew, which consisted of near 150 Men, in good order; neither had he consorted or agreed to join with the others, when I was taken by Cocklyn; which proved a great Misfortune to me, as will appear afterwards. For I found Cocklyn and his Crew, to be a set of the basest and most cruel Villains that ever were. And indeed they told me, after I was taken, “That they chose him for their Commander, on account of his Brutality and Ignorance; having resolved never to have again a Gentleman-like Commander, as, they said, Moody was.”
This Davis was a generous man who kept his crew, made up of nearly 150 men, in good shape. He didn't team up or agree to join the others when I was captured by Cocklyn; this turned out to be a huge misfortune for me, as you'll see later. I discovered that Cocklyn and his crew were the most despicable and cruel villains I've ever encountered. In fact, after I was captured, they told me that they chose him as their commander because of his brutality and ignorance, decisively deciding never to have another gentleman-like commander, as they said Moody was.
Upon mentioning this, I think it necessary to observe in this place, that the Captain of a Pirate Ship, is chiefly chosen to fight the Vessels they may meet with. Besides him, they chuse another principal Officer, whom they call Quarter-master,[200] who has the general Inspection of all Affairs, and often controuls the Captain’s Orders: This Person is also to be the first Man in boarding any Ship they shall attack; or go in the Boat on any desperate Enterprize. Besides the Captain and Quarter-master, the Pirates had all other Officers as is usual on board Men of War.
Upon mentioning this, I think it’s important to note here that the Captain of a Pirate Ship is mainly chosen to engage the vessels they encounter. In addition to him, they select another key Officer, called the Quarter-master,[200] who oversees all operations and often challenges the Captain’s orders. This person is also the first to board any ship they attack or to go in the boat for any risky mission. Besides the Captain and Quarter-master, the Pirates had all the other officers customary on warships.
I come now to give an account how I was taken by them. The day that I made the Land, when I was within three Leagues of the River’s Mouth, it became calm in the Afternoon. Seeing a Smoke on Shore, I sent for my first Mate Mr. Simon Jones, who had been formerly at Sieraleon, where I had not; “bidding him take the Pinnace, and go where the Smoke was, to enquire of the Natives, how Affairs stood up the River.” But he replied, “it would be to little purpose, for no People lived there: As to the Smoke we saw, he believed it might be made by some Travellers who were roasting of Oysters on the Shore; and would be gone before he[201] could get a Mile from the Ship. Moreover, as Night drew on, it would be difficult for him to find the Ship again.” Thinking this answer reasonable, I did not press him further; tho’ I understood afterwards, there was a Town where the Smoke appeared. But I did not then in the least suspect Mr. Jones would have proved such a Villain as he did afterwards.
I’m here to explain how I was captured by them. On the day I landed, when I was about three leagues from the river’s mouth, it got calm in the afternoon. Seeing some smoke onshore, I called my first mate, Mr. Simon Jones, who had previously been to Sierra Leone, a place I hadn’t visited. I asked him to take the pinnace and go check out the smoke to find out how things were upstream. He replied that it wouldn’t be helpful because there weren’t any people living there. As for the smoke we saw, he thought it was probably some travelers roasting oysters on the shore, and they would be gone by the time he could get a mile from the ship. Also, as night approached, it would be hard for him to find the ship again. Thinking this explanation was reasonable, I didn’t push him further, although I later learned there was a town where the smoke was coming from. At the time, I had no idea Mr. Jones would turn out to be such a villain as he did later on.
About five a Clock in the Afternoon, a small Breeze arising from the Sea, and the Tide of Flood setting strong, we stood for the River’s Mouth. At Sun-setting we perceived a Ship at Anchor, a great way up the River; which was the Pirate that took us soon after. The other two Pirate Ships, with their Prizes, were hid from our sight by a Point of Land.
About five o'clock in the afternoon, a light breeze coming in from the sea and the strong incoming tide led us toward the river's mouth. At sunset, we spotted a ship anchored a long way up the river; that was the pirate ship that captured us shortly after. The other two pirate ships, along with their prizes, were out of our view behind a point of land.
It becoming calm about seven a Clock, and growing dark, we anchor’d in the River’s Mouth; soon after which I went to Supper, with the Officers that usually eat with me. About eight a Clock the Officer of the Watch upon Deck, sent me word, “He heard the rowing of a[202] Boat.” Whereupon we all immediately went upon Deck; and the night being very dark, I ordered Lanthorns and Candles to be got ready, supposing the Boat might come from the Shore with some white Gentlemen, that lived there as free Merchants; or else from the Ship we had seen up the River a little while before we came to an Anchor. I ordered also, by way of Precaution, the first Mate to go into the Steerage, to put all things in order, and to send me forthwith twenty Men on the Quarter-deck with fire Arms and Cutlaces, which I thought he went about.
It became calm around seven o'clock, and as it got dark, we anchored at the river's mouth. Shortly after that, I had dinner with the officers who usually join me. Around eight o'clock, the officer on watch on deck sent me a message saying, “He heard the rowing of a[202] boat.” Immediately, we all went up on deck. Since it was very dark out, I ordered lanterns and candles to be prepared, thinking the boat might be coming from the shore with some merchants who lived there or from the ship we had seen up river shortly before anchoring. I also instructed the first mate to head into the steerage to tidy things up and to send me twenty men on the quarter-deck with firearms and cutlasses, which I assumed he was about to do.
As it was dark, I could not yet see the Boat, but heard the noise of the rowing very plain: Whereupon I ordered the second Mate to hail the Boat, to which the People in it answered, “They belonged to the Two Friends, Captain Eliot of Barbadoes.” At this, one of the Officers who stood by me, said, “He knew the Captain very well, and that he commanded a Vessel of that name.” I replied, “It might be so; but I[203] would not trust any Boat in such a place;” and ordered him to hasten the first Mate, with the People and Arms upon Deck, as I had just before ordered. By this time our Lanthorns and Candles were brought up, and I ordered the Boat to be hailed again: To which the People in it answered, “They were from America:” And at the same time fired a volly of small Shot at the Ship, tho’ they were then above Pistol shot from us; which showed the Boldness of these Villains: For there was in the Boat only twelve of them, as I understood afterwards, who knew nothing of the Strength of our Ship; which was indeed considerable, we having 16 Guns, and 45 Men on board. But as they told me after we were taken, “They judged we were a small Vessel of little force. Moreover, they depended on the same good fortune as in the other Ships they had taken; having met with no resistance: For the People were generally glad of an opportunity of entring with them:” Which last was but too true.
As it was dark, I couldn't see the boat yet, but I could hear the rowing clearly. So I told the second mate to call out to the boat, and the people in it replied, “We belong to the Two Friends, Captain Eliot from Barbados.” At that, one of the officers next to me said he knew the captain well and that he commanded a ship by that name. I replied, “That may be true, but I wouldn’t trust any boat in this spot,” and instructed him to urge the first mate to get the crew and weapons on deck, as I had ordered earlier. By this time, our lanterns and candles had been brought up, and I ordered the boat to be called again. The people in the boat answered, “We’re from America:” and at the same time, they fired a volley of small shots at the ship, even though they were still out of pistol range. This showed the boldness of those villains: there were only twelve of them in the boat, as I later learned, and they had no idea about our ship's strength; we had 16 guns and 45 men on board. But as they told me after we were captured, “They thought we were a small vessel with little force. Moreover, they relied on the same good fortune they had with the other ships they had taken, having faced no resistance, since people generally welcomed the chance to come aboard with them:” which was unfortunately very true.
When they first began to fire, I called aloud to the first Mate, to fire at the Boat out of the Steerage Port-holes; which not being done, and the people I had ordered upon Deck with small Arms not appearing, I was extremely surprized; and the more, when an Officer came and told me, “The People would not take Arms.” I went thereupon down into the Steerage, where I saw a great many of them looking at one another. Little thinking that my first Mate had prevented them from taking Arms, I asked them with some Roughness, “Why they had not obeyed my Orders?” Calling upon some brisk Fellows by name, that had gone a former Voyage with me, to defend the Ship; saying, “It would be the greatest Reproach in the World to us all, if we should be taken by a Boat.” Some of them replied, “They would have taken Arms, but the Chest they were kept in could not be found.” The reason of which will be related hereafter.
When they first started to shoot, I shouted to the First Mate to shoot at the boat from the steerage portholes. Since that wasn’t done, and the people I had ordered on deck with firearms didn’t show up, I was very surprised. It was even more shocking when an officer came and told me, “The people won’t take up arms.” So, I went down into the steerage, where I saw many of them looking at each other. Not realizing that my First Mate had stopped them from taking arms, I asked them a bit harshly, “Why didn’t you follow my orders?” I called out some energetic guys by name who had gone on a previous voyage with me to defend the ship, saying, “It would be the biggest disgrace ever if we were captured by a boat.” Some of them replied, “We would have taken arms, but the chest they were in couldn’t be found.” The reason for that will be explained later.
By this time the Boat was along the Ship’s Side, and there being no body to oppose them, the Pirates immediately boarded us; and coming on the Quarter-deck, fired their Pieces several times down into the Steerage, and shot a Sailor in the Reins, of which Wound he died afterwards. They likewise threw several Granado-shells, which burst amongst us, so that ’tis a great wonder several of us were not killed by them, or by their Shot.
By this time, the boat was alongside the ship, and with nobody to stop them, the pirates quickly boarded us. They came onto the quarterdeck and fired their weapons several times down into the steerage, hitting a sailor in the back, who later died from his wound. They also tossed several grenade shells, which exploded among us, and it’s a miracle that more of us didn’t get killed by them or their gunfire.
At last some of our People bethought themselves to call out for Quarter; which the Pirates granting, the Quarter-master came down into the Steerage, enquiring, “Where the Captain was?” I told him, “I had been so till now.” Upon that he asked me, “How I durst order my People to fire at their Boat out of the Steerage? saying, that they had heard me repeat it several times.” I answered, “I thought it my Duty to defend the Ship, if my People would have fought.” Upon that he presented a Pistol to my Breast, which I had but just[206] time to parry before it went off; so that the Bullet past between my Side and Arm. The Rogue finding he had not shot me, he turned the But-end of the Pistol, and gave me such a Blow on the Head as stunned me; so that I fell upon my Knees; but immediately recovering my self, I forthwith jumped out of the Steerage upon the Quarter-deck, where the Pirate Boatswain was.
Finally, some of our people remembered to ask for Quarter; and the pirates agreed. The Quarter-master came down into the Steerage, asking, “Where's the Captain?” I told him, “I was the Captain until now.” He then asked me, “How could you tell your people to fire at their boat from the Steerage? They said they heard you say it several times.” I replied, “I thought it was my duty to defend the ship if my people wanted to fight.” At that point, he aimed a pistol at my chest, and I barely managed to deflect it before it went off; the bullet grazed my side. The rogue, realizing he hadn't shot me, turned the butt of the pistol around and hit me on the head, stunning me, so I fell to my knees. But as soon as I recovered, I jumped out of the Steerage onto the Quarter-deck, where the pirate boatswain was.
He was a bloody Villain, having a few days before killed a poor Sailor, because he did not do something so soon as he had ordered him. This cruel Monster was asking some of my People, “Where their Captain was.” So at my coming upon Deck, one of them, pointing to me, said, “There he is.” Tho’ the night was very dark, yet there being four Lanthorns with Candles, he had a full sight of me: Whereupon lifting up his broad Sword, he swore, “No Quarter should be given to any Captain that offered to defend his Ship,” aiming at the same time a full stroke at my Head. To avoid it I stooped so low, that the Quarter-deck[207] Rail received the Blows and was cut in at least an inch deep: Which happily saved my Head from being cleft asunder: And the Sword breaking at the same time, with the force of the Blow on the Rail, it prevented his cutting me to pieces.
He was a brutal villain, having killed a poor sailor just days before because the sailor didn’t do what he was told quickly enough. This cruel monster asked some of my crew, “Where’s your captain?” When I came up on deck, one of them pointed at me and said, “There he is.” Even though it was very dark that night, he could see me clearly because there were four lanterns with candles. Raising his broad sword, he shouted, “No quarter will be given to any captain who tries to defend his ship,” while aiming a full swing at my head. To dodge it, I bent down so low that the quarter-deck[207] rail took the hit and was cut at least an inch deep. Luckily, this saved my head from being split open, and the sword broke at the same time from the force of the blow against the rail, preventing him from chopping me to pieces.
By good Fortune his Pistols, that hung at his Girdle, were all discharged; otherwise he would doubtless have shot me. But he took one of them, and with the But-end endeavoured to beat out my Brains, which some of my People that were then on the Quarter-deck observing, cried out aloud, “For God’s sake don’t kill our Captain, for we never were with a better Man.” This turned the Rage of him and two other Pirates on my People, and saved my Life: But they cruelly used my poor Men, cutting and beating them unmercifully. One of them had his Chin almost cut off; and another received such a Wound on his Head, that he fell on the Deck as dead; but afterwards, by the care of our Surgeon he recovered.
By sheer luck, his pistols, which were hanging at his side, were all empty; otherwise, he definitely would have shot me. Instead, he took one and tried to bash my brains out with the butt of it. Some of my crew who were on the quarter-deck saw this and shouted, “For God’s sake, don’t kill our captain; we’ve never had a better man!” This shifted the pirates' rage onto my crew and saved my life. However, they brutally attacked my men, cutting and hitting them mercilessly. One of them nearly had his chin sliced off, and another got such a serious head wound that he collapsed on the deck as if dead, but later, thanks to our surgeon’s care, he recovered.
All this happened in a few Minutes and the Quarter-master then coming up ordered the Pirates to tie our People’s Hands, and told me, “That when they boarded us, they let their Boat go adrift, and that I must send an Officer with some of my People in our Boat to look for theirs.” Whereupon my first Mate, Mr. Simon Jones, who stood by offered to go: And the Quarter-master telling him, “He must return quickly otherwise he should judge that they were run away with the Boat, in order to go on Shore; and if they did so he would cut me to pieces:” Mr. Jones replied, “He would not stay above a quarter of an Hour, but return whether he found the Boat or not.” Happily for me he soon found her, and returned (tho’ it was very dark) in less time than he had promised.
All this happened in just a few minutes, and then the quartermaster came over and ordered the pirates to tie up our people’s hands. He told me, “When they boarded us, they let their boat drift away, and I need you to send an officer and some of your crew in our boat to find theirs.” My first mate, Mr. Simon Jones, who was standing by, offered to go. The quartermaster warned him, “You need to come back quickly, or I’ll assume you ran off with the boat to escape on shore, and if you do that, I’ll have to cut you to pieces.” Mr. Jones replied, “I won’t be gone more than a quarter of an hour, but I’ll come back whether I find the boat or not.” Luckily for me, he found it soon and returned (even though it was very dark) in less time than he promised.
Then the Quarter-master took me by the hand, and told me, “My Life was safe provided none of my People complained against me.” I replied, “I was sure none of them could.”
Then the quartermaster took my hand and said, “My life is secure as long as none of my people complains about me.” I replied, “I'm sure none of them would.”
The Pirates next, loaded all their small Arms, and fired several Vollies for Joy they had taken us: Which their Comrades on board their Ship hearing, it being then very near us, tho’ we could not see it for the darkness of the Night, they concluded we had made Resistance, and destroyed their People.
The pirates then loaded all their small arms and fired several volleys in celebration of capturing us. Their comrades on board their ship, hearing the shots and not being able to see it due to the darkness of the night, assumed we had fought back and defeated their men.
It will be proper to observe here, that soon after we had anchored in the Mouth of the River Sieraleon, it became calm; and the Tide of Ebb beginning to come down, the Pirates cut their Cable, and let their Ship drive down with the Tide towards us, from the place where we had seen her at anchor; having sometime before sent their Boat against the Tide of Flood, to discover us. The Ship being by that means come near us, and seeing our Lights, without asking any Questions, gave us a Broad-side with their great Guns; verily believing we had destroyed their Boat and People. This put the Pirates on board us into Confusion, which I observing, asked the Quarter-master, “Why he did not call with the speaking[210] Trumpet, and tell their Ship they had taken us?” Upon that he asked me angrily, “Whether I was afraid of going to the Devil by a great Shot? For, as to his part, he hoped he should be sent to Hell one of these days by a Cannon Ball.” I answered, “I hoped that would not be my Road.” However, he followed my Advice, and informed their Ship, “They had taken a brave Prize, with all manner of good Liquors and fresh Provisions on board.”
It’s worth noting that soon after we anchored at the mouth of the River Sieraleon, it calmed down. As the tide started to drop, the pirates cut their cable and let their ship drift down with the tide toward us, from where we had last seen it anchored. They had previously sent their boat against the flooding tide to find us. Once the ship got close and saw our lights, they didn't ask any questions and fired a broadside with their big guns, truly believing we had destroyed their boat and crew. This threw the pirates on board us into confusion, and noticing this, I asked the quartermaster, “Why didn’t you call out with the speaking trumpet and tell their ship they had captured us?” He angrily replied, “Are you afraid of getting blasted to hell by a cannon shot? As for me, I hope to be sent to hell someday by a cannonball.” I replied, “I hope that’s not my path.” Nonetheless, he took my advice and informed their ship, “They had captured a fine prize, loaded with all kinds of good drinks and fresh provisions.”
Just after this, Cocklyn, the Pirate Captain, ordered them to dress a quantity of these Victuals; so they took many Geese, Turkeys, Fowls and Ducks, making our People cut their Heads off, and pull the great Feathers out of their Wings: But they would not stay till the other Feathers were pick’d off. All these they put into our great Furnace, which would boil Victuals for 500 Negroes, together with several Westphalia Hams, and a large Sow with Pig, which they only bowelled, leaving the Hair on. This strange medley filled the Furnace, and the[211] Cook was ordered to boil them out of Hand.
Just after this, Cocklyn, the Pirate Captain, told them to prepare a bunch of these foods; so they grabbed a lot of geese, turkeys, chickens, and ducks, making our people cut off their heads and pluck the big feathers from their wings. But they wouldn’t wait for the other feathers to be picked off. They tossed all of this into our big furnace, which could cook food for 500 people, along with several Westphalia hams and a large pig, which they only gutted, leaving the hair on. This bizarre mix filled the furnace, and the[211] cook was told to boil them right away.
As soon as the Pirate-ship had done firing, I asked the Quarter-master’s leave, for our Surgeon to dress my poor People that had been wounded; and I likewise went into the Steerage, to have my Arm dress’d, it being very much bruised by the Blow given me by the Pirate-Boatswain. Just after that, a person came to me from the Quarter-master, desiring to know, “What a Clock it was by my Watch?” Which judging to be a civil way of demanding it, I sent it him immediately: desiring the Messenger to tell him, it was a very good going Gold Watch. When it was delivered to the Quarter-master, he held it up by the Chain, and presently laid it down on the Deck, giving it a kick with his Foot; saying, “It was a pretty Foot-ball:” On which, one of the Pirates caught it up, saying, “He would put it in the common Chest to be sold at the Mast.”
As soon as the pirate ship finished firing, I asked the quartermaster for permission for our surgeon to treat my injured crew members. I also went into the steerage to have my arm treated since it was badly bruised from the blow the pirate boatswain gave me. Shortly after that, a person came to me from the quartermaster, wanting to know, “What time is it by your watch?” Taking that as a polite way to ask, I handed it to him right away, asking the messenger to tell him it was a very good gold watch. Once it got to the quartermaster, he held it up by the chain and then dropped it on the deck, giving it a kick with his foot, saying, “It’s a nice football.” At that, one of the pirates grabbed it, saying he would put it in the common chest to be sold at the mast.
By this time I was loudly called upon to go on board the Pirate-ship. As soon as I came upon Deck, they hurried me over our Ship’s side into the Boat; but when we arrived along the side of the Pirate-Vessel, I told them, “I was disabled in my Arm, and so desired their help to get me into their Ship:” Which was readily done. Then I was ordered to go on the Quarter-deck to their Commander, who saluted me in this manner. “I am sorry you have met with bad usage after Quarter given, but ’tis the Fortune of War sometimes. I expect you will answer truly to all such Questions as I shall ask you: otherwise you shall be cut to pieces; but if you tell the Truth, and your Men make no Complaints against you, you shall be kindly used; and this shall be the best Voyage you ever made in your Life, as you shall find by what shall be given you.” I thanked him for his good Intentions, telling him, “I[213] was content to stand on the footing he had proposed to me:”
By this time, they were calling me loudly to come aboard the pirate ship. As soon as I reached the deck, they hurried me over the side of our ship into a boat; but when we got alongside the pirate vessel, I told them, “I have an injured arm, so I need your help to get onto your ship.” They quickly assisted me. Then, I was told to go to the quarterdeck to meet their commander, who greeted me this way: “I’m sorry you’ve faced mistreatment after being given quarter, but that’s the luck of war sometimes. I expect you to answer all my questions honestly; otherwise, you’ll be cut to pieces. But if you tell the truth and your men have no complaints against you, you’ll be treated well, and this will be the best voyage you’ve ever had in your life, as you will see by what you receive.” I thanked him for his kind intentions, telling him, “I’m willing to abide by the terms you’ve set for me.”
Having answered all his Questions, one of which was, “How our Ship sailed both large, and on a wind?” I replying, “Very well:” He then threw up his Hat, saying, “She would make a fine Pirate Man of War.” When I heard that, I must own I could not but be concern’d for having answered so truly in that particular: But then considering, that some of my People would no doubt have told them the same; and moreover, my Journal, when they look’d into it, would have made it plainly appear, which might have proved my Destruction, I satisfied my Mind with these Reflections.
Having answered all his questions, one of which was, “How does our ship sail both large and on a wind?” I replied, “Very well.” He then tossed his hat in the air, saying, “She would make a great pirate warship.” When I heard that, I have to admit I felt a bit worried for having answered so honestly about that. But then I considered that some of my people would no doubt have given them the same information; and besides, my journal, when they looked into it, would have clearly shown the same, which could have led to my downfall. So I calmed my mind with these thoughts.
As, in this whole Affair, I greatly experienced the Providence of Almighty God, in his Goodness delivering me from the hands of these Villains, and from many Dangers; so the same good Providence gave me such a presence of Mind, that when I believed I was upon the point of being killed, such Terrors did not arise, as I had formerly experienced,[214] when in danger of Shipwrack. And tho’ I fared very hard, and endured great Fatigues during the time I was there Prisoner; yet praised be God, I enjoyed my Health: Submitting with that Resignation to the Will of the Almighty, as a Man ought to do in such severe Misfortunes.
As I went through this entire situation, I truly felt the guidance of Almighty God, who, in His goodness, saved me from these villains and many dangers. That same divine presence gave me such clarity of mind that when I thought I was about to be killed, I didn’t feel the same panic I had previously felt during the threat of shipwreck. Even though I faced severe challenges and endured great fatigue while I was imprisoned, I thank God I stayed healthy. I accepted my fate with the kind of resignation one should have in such tough times. [214]
But to return to my Narrative, which the Remembrance of my past Dangers hath interrupted.
But let’s get back to my story, which has been interrupted by memories of my past dangers.
As soon as I had done answering the Captain’s Questions, a tall Man, with four Pistols in his Girdle, and a broad Sword in his Hand, came to me on the Quarter-deck, telling me, “His name was James Griffin, and that we had been School-fellows.” Tho’ I remembred him very well; yet having formerly heard, it had proved fatal to some who had been taken by Pirates, to own any Knowledge of them; I replied, “I could not remember any such Person by name.” Upon that he mentioned some boyish Pranks that had formerly pass’d between us, But I still denying any[215] Knowledge of him, he told me, “He supposed I took him to be one of the Pirate’s Crew, because I saw him armed in that manner; but that he was a forc’d Man, and had been lately chief Mate to Captain James Creichton of Bristol; who was then, with his Ship, in the Possession of the Pirates in the River, and had not been destroyed by them, at his earnest intreaty: That since his being forced, they had obliged him to act as Master of the Pirate-ship; and the reason of his being so armed, was to prevent their imposing on him; for there was hardly any amongst the Crew of Pirates belonging to Captain Cocklyn, but what were cruel Villains; misusing much better Men than themselves, only for having the Misfortune to fall into their Hands, as I had already experienced, and might find hereafter; but he would himself take care of me that night, in which would be my greatest Danger; because many of their People would soon get drunk with the good Liquors found in my Ship.”
As soon as I finished answering the Captain’s questions, a tall man with four pistols in his belt and a broad sword in his hand approached me on the quarterdeck, saying, “My name is James Griffin, and we were schoolmates.” Although I remembered him well, I had previously heard that it could be dangerous for anyone taken by pirates to acknowledge any familiarity with them, so I replied, “I can't recall anyone by that name.” He then mentioned some childhood pranks we had played, but I continued to deny recognizing him. He told me, “I guess you think I’m one of the pirates because I’m armed like this, but I’m a forced man and have recently been the chief mate to Captain James Creichton of Bristol; he is currently with his ship in the pirates' possession in the river, and they didn’t destroy it at his urgent request. Since being forced, they’ve made me act as the ship's master. The reason I'm armed is to prevent them from taking advantage of me, since hardly anyone in Captain Cocklyn’s pirate crew isn't a cruel villain, mistreating much better men than themselves just because they had the misfortune to fall into their hands, as I have already experienced and might again in the future. But I will make sure to look after you tonight, which will be your biggest risk, because many of those people will soon get drunk on the good liquor found on my ship.”
This generous Declaration was very acceptable to me, and I then readily owned my former acquaintance with him. Then he turned to Captain Cocklyn, and desired a Bowl of Punch might be made. Which being done, the Captain desired Mr. Griffin my Schoolfellow to show me the way to the great Cabbin, and he followed himself.
This generous declaration was very welcome to me, and I quickly admitted my previous acquaintance with him. Then he turned to Captain Cocklyn and asked for a bowl of punch to be made. Once that was done, the Captain asked my schoolmate Mr. Griffin to show me the way to the great cabin, and he followed along himself.
There was not in the Cabbin either Chair, or any thing else to sit upon; for they always kept a clear Ship ready for an Engagement: So a Carpet was spread on the Deck, upon which we sat down cross-legg’d. Captain Cocklyn drank my Health, desiring, “I would not be cast down at my Misfortune, for one of the Boat’s Crew who had taken us had told him, My Ship’s Company in general spoke well of me; and they had Goods enough left in the Ships they had taken to make a Man of me.” Then he drank several other Healths, amongst which was that of the Pretender, by the name of King James the Third, and thereby I found they were[217] doubly on the side of the Gallows, both as Traitors and Pirates.
There was neither a chair nor anything else to sit on in the cabin; they always kept the ship clear for an engagement. So, a carpet was spread on the deck, and we sat down cross-legged. Captain Cocklyn toasted to my health, saying, “Don’t be discouraged by your misfortune, because one of the boat crew who captured us told him that my ship’s crew generally spoke highly of me; and they had enough goods left on the ships they had taken to make a man of me.” Then he toasted several other people, including the Pretender, referred to as King James the Third, which made me realize they were[217] clearly on the side of the gallows, both as traitors and pirates.
It being by this time Midnight, my Schoolfellow desired the Captain, “To have a Hammock hung up for me to sleep in;” for it seems every one lay rough, as they called it, that is, on the Deck; the Captain himself not being allowed a Bed. This being granted, and soon after done, I took leave of the Captain, and got into the Hammock, tho’ I could not sleep in my melancholy Circumstances. Moreover, the execrable Oaths and Blasphemies I heard among the Ship’s Company, shock’d me to such a degree, that in Hell it self I thought there could not be worse; for tho’ many Seafaring Men are given to swearing and taking God’s Name in vain, yet I could not have imagined, human Nature could ever so far degenerate, as to talk in the manner those abandoned Wretches did.
It was midnight by this point, and my schoolmate asked the captain to "hang up a hammock for me to sleep in," since it seemed everyone else was sleeping rough on the deck, including the captain who was not even allowed a bed. Once this was arranged and quickly done, I said goodbye to the captain and got into the hammock, even though I couldn’t sleep because of my sad situation. Additionally, the horrible swearing and blasphemy I heard from the crew shocked me so much that I thought it couldn’t get worse even in hell itself. Although many sailors are known for cursing and using God’s name in vain, I never could have imagined that human nature could sink so low as to speak like those wretched people did.
After I was got into the Hammock, Mr. Griffin, according to his Promise, walked by me, with his broad Sword in his Hand, to protect me from Insults.[218] Some time after, it being about two a clock in the morning, the Pirate Boatswain (that attempted to kill me when taken) came on board very drunk, and being told I was in a Hammock, he came with his Cutlace near me. My generous Schoolfellow asked him what he wanted? he answered, “To slice my Liver, for I was a vile Dog, for ordering my People to fire on their Boat; neither would I deliver my Watch when the Quarter-master first demanded it.” Upon hearing that, I told Mr. Griffin, “The last was false, for I had immediately sent it by a Messenger, who only asked, what a clock it was? supposing the Quarter-master expected it.” Then Griffin bid the Boatswain keep his Distance, or else he would cleave his head asunder with his Broad Sword. Nevertheless, that bloody-minded Villain came on to kill me; but Mr. Griffin struck at him with his Sword, from which he had a narrow Escape, and then ran away: So I lay unmolested till day light. By that time the Fumes of the Liquor being gone[219] off by Sleep amongst most of the Pirates, Mr. Griffin complained to the Quarter-master and Company, of the cruel Intention of the Boatswain towards me; representing, “They ought to observe strictly that Maxim established amongst them, not to permit any ill usage to their Prisoners after Quarter given.” At the hearing of this, many of them voted for his being whipp’d, tho’ he was a great Favourite of several others. But tho’ I wish’d him hang’d in my Mind yet I thought it prudent to plead for him; saying, “I believed it was his being in Liquor that was the cause of his using me in that manner.” So he received a general Order, not to give me the least Offence afterwards: Yet did that vile Wretch attempt once more to kill me, as shall be related in its due place.
After I was settled in the hammock, Mr. Griffin, keeping his promise, walked by me with his broad sword in hand to protect me from any insults.[218] Some time later, around two in the morning, the pirate Boatswain—who had tried to kill me when I was captured—came aboard very drunk. When he heard I was in a hammock, he approached me with his cutlass. My brave classmate asked him what he wanted, and he responded, “To slice your liver, because you’re a vile dog for telling my crew to fire on their boat; and I wouldn’t hand over my watch when the Quarter-master first asked for it.” Hearing that, I told Mr. Griffin, “That’s false; I immediately sent it with a messenger, who only asked what time it was, thinking the Quarter-master expected it.” Then Griffin warned the Boatswain to keep his distance or he’d split his head open with his sword. However, that bloodthirsty villain came closer to kill me, but Mr. Griffin struck at him with his sword, narrowly missing, and then the Boatswain ran away. So I lay undisturbed until dawn. By then, the effects of the liquor had worn off from most of the pirates as they slept.[219] Mr. Griffin complained to the quarter-master and crew about the Boatswain’s cruel intentions toward me, arguing that “they should strictly uphold the rule they established not to allow any mistreatment of their prisoners after mercy was granted.” Upon hearing this, many of them voted for his punishment by whipping, even though he was a favorite of several others. But even though I secretly wished him hanged, I thought it wise to defend him, saying, “I believe his drunkenness was the reason for his behavior toward me.” So he received a general order not to offend me again. Yet that vile wretch attempted to kill me one more time, as I will explain later.
I come now to relate, How Mr. Simon Jones, my first Mate, and ten of my Men entred with the Pirates. The Morning after we were taken, he came to me, and said, “His Circumstances were bad at home: Moreover, he had a Wife whom[220] he could not love; and for these Reasons he had entred with the Pirates, and signed their Articles.” I was greatly surprized at this Declaration, and told him, “I was very sorry to hear it, for I believ’d he would repent when too late; and as he had taken this Resolution rashly, without communicating it to me, all I could say now would be to no Purpose; neither would it be proper for me, for the future, to have any Discourse with him in private.” I saw this poor Man afterwards despised by his Brethren in Iniquity; and have since been informed, he died a few Months after they left the River Sieraleon. However, I must do him the Justice to own, He never shewed any Disrespect to me; and the ten People he persuaded to enter with him, remained very civil to me, and of their own accord, always manned the side for me, whenever I went on board the Ship they belonged to.
I’m now going to share how Mr. Simon Jones, my first mate, and ten of my crew joined the pirates. The morning after we were captured, he came to me and said, “My situation at home is bad. Plus, I have a wife I can’t love; for these reasons, I’ve decided to join the pirates and signed their articles.” I was really surprised by this news and told him, “I’m very sorry to hear that because I believe you’ll regret it when it's too late. Since you made this choice impulsively without discussing it with me, anything I say now won’t help, and it wouldn’t be appropriate for me to have private conversations with you in the future.” I later saw this poor man looked down upon by his fellow wrongdoers, and I’ve been told he died a few months after they left the River Sieraleon. Still, I must acknowledge that he never disrespected me, and the ten people he convinced to join him were always very polite to me, voluntarily giving me their support whenever I boarded the ship they were on.
Several of these unhappy People soon after repented, and desired me to intercede for them, that they might be cleared[221] again; for they durst not themselves mention it to the Quarter-master, it being death by their Articles: But it was too nice a matter for me to deal in; and therefore I refused them.
Several of these unhappy people soon regretted their actions and asked me to help them, so they could be cleared again; they were too afraid to bring it up with the Quarter-master themselves, as it was punishable by death according to their rules. But it was too delicate of a situation for me to handle, so I turned them down.
Some days after this, one of these poor Men, whose name was Thomas Wilder, discovered things to me, of which I only had a suspicion before. After cursing Mr. Jones for persuading him to enter with the Pirates, he said to me, “That several times in the Night-watch, before we came to Sieraleon, he had heard him say, That he hoped we should meet with Pirates when we came to that River; which he then thought to be spoken only in jest; but now he found it too true.” As I seemed not to believe this, he called another of our People, who confirmed what he had told me. “Then I asked them the Reason why the Chest of Arms was put out of the place where it usually stood in the Steerage; and where it was hid at the time we were taken?” They answered, “I might remember, that the Morning[222] we made Land, I ordered the Steerage to be clean’d; to do which all the Chests there were carried between Decks; and after the Steerage was clean’d, all the Chests were brought back again in their places, except the Chest of Arms, which was left behind by the Mate’s Order: That when I called to the People in the Steerage to fire on the Pirate-boat, supposing Mr. Jones had delivered them Arms according to my Order, many of the Men would have broken the Chest open, but he prevented them, by declaring, This was an opportunity he had wished for; and that if they fired a Musquet, they would be all cut to pieces.” And they further assured me, that to induce them to enter with the Pirates, he had declared to them, That I had promised him to enter my self. Putting all this together with what several of the Pirates told me afterwards, namely, That he had been the chief occasion of their keeping my Ship, it was a wonder that I escaped so well, having such a base Wretch for my principal Officer.
A few days later, one of these unfortunate men, named Thomas Wilder, revealed things to me that I had only suspected before. After cursing Mr. Jones for convincing him to join the Pirates, he said, “Several times during the night watch, before we reached Sieraleon, I heard him say, That he hoped we would encounter Pirates when we arrived at that river; at the time, I thought he was joking, but now I see it’s sadly true.” When I seemed skeptical, he called over another crew member who confirmed what he had just told me. “So I asked them why the Chest of Arms was moved from its usual spot in the Steerage, and where it was hidden when we were captured.” They explained, “You might remember that the morning we landed, I ordered the Steerage to be cleaned; all the chests were moved between decks for that. After cleaning the Steerage, all the chests were returned to their places except the Chest of Arms, which the Mate ordered to be left behind. When I called the men in the Steerage to fire on the Pirate boat, thinking Mr. Jones had given them weapons as I ordered, many men wanted to break open the chest, but he stopped them, saying, This was an opportunity he had hoped for; and that if they fired a musket, they would all be killed.” They also assured me that to persuade them to join the Pirates, he claimed that I had promised him I would join myself. Bringing all this together with what several Pirates told me later, namely, That he was the main reason they kept my ship, it’s a wonder I escaped at all with such a treacherous wretch as my main officer.
But to resume the thread of my Story. As soon as the Fumes of the Liquor were gone out of the Pirates Heads, they all went on board the Prize, as they called my Ship, about eight a clock in the morning, it being the second day of April. Mr. Jones, who had been my first Mate, went with them; and he having confirmed them in their intention of keeping the Ship for their own use, all hands went to work to clear the Ship, by throwing over board Bales of Woollen Goods; Cases of India Goods; with many other things of great Value: So that before night they had destroyed between three and four thousand Pounds worth of the Cargoe. For they had little regard to these things, Money and Necessaries being what they chiefly wanted. The sight of this much grieved me, but I was obliged in prudence to be silent. For my Schoolfellow told me, I was still under the displeasure of many of them, on account of my ordering my People to fire on their Boat when they took me.
But to continue with my story. As soon as the effects of the liquor wore off, the pirates all boarded my ship, which they called the prize, around eight o'clock in the morning on the second day of April. Mr. Jones, who was my first mate, went with them, and after confirming their plans to keep the ship for themselves, everyone got to work clearing the ship by throwing overboard bales of woolen goods, cases of India goods, and many other valuable items. By nightfall, they had destroyed between three and four thousand pounds worth of cargo. They didn’t care much for these things, as money and necessary supplies were what they primarily wanted. Watching this happen upset me greatly, but I had to remain silent for my own safety. My schoolmate warned me that many of them were still angry with me because I had ordered my crew to fire on their boat when they captured me.
There were then residing at Sieraleon, several Englishmen who traded on their own accounts; And among the rest, one Captain Henry Glynn, who was since Governor for the Royal African Company at Gambia, and died there. This Gentleman was an honest generous Person, and of so much Integrity, that tho’ he had suffered by the Pirates when they first landed, yet he would never accept of any Goods from them, which they had often press’d him to receive for his own use. This Conduct, with an engaging deportment, so gained him the Good-will of the Pirates, that they were ready to oblige him in whatever he requested. Captain Glynn and my self having formerly been acquainted, as soon as he heard of my being taken, he engaged Captain Davis and Le Boose, the Commanders of the two other Pirate Ships, who were then on Shore at his House, to come on board with him to see me. I was very agreeably surprized with his coming that Afternoon, and both the Pirate Captains that came with him saluted me civilly.[225] Captain Davis told me, “He knew me,” tho’ I never could recollect where I had seen him; and I found, he did not care to tell, where he had seen me.
There were several Englishmen living in Sieraleon who were trading on their own. Among them was Captain Henry Glynn, who later became the Governor for the Royal African Company at Gambia and eventually passed away there. This gentleman was an honest and generous person, known for his integrity. Even though he had suffered at the hands of pirates when they first arrived, he refused to accept any goods from them, despite their repeated offers for him to take something for himself. His behavior and charming demeanor earned him the respect and goodwill of the pirates, who were always willing to help him with whatever he asked for. Captain Glynn and I had been acquaintances before; as soon as he heard I was captured, he brought Captain Davis and Le Boose, the commanders of the other two pirate ships who were visiting his house, on board with him to see me. I was pleasantly surprised by his visit that afternoon, and both pirate captains greeted me politely. [225] Captain Davis mentioned, “He knew me,” although I couldn’t remember where I had seen him; he seemed reluctant to share where we had crossed paths.
Soon after this, Captain Cocklyn with his Quarter-master and others, came from the Prize on board their old Ship, to compliment Captain Davis and the rest that came with him. After the Compliments were over, Captain Davis generously said, “He was ashamed to hear how I had been used by them. That they should remember, their Reasons for going a pirating were to revenge themselves on base Merchants, and cruel Commanders of Ships. That as for the Owner of the Prize, he had not his Fellow in London for Generosity and Goodness to poor Sailors, as he had formerly heard from others, and now from Captain Glynn: That as for my part, no one of my People, even those that had entered with them, gave me the least ill Character: But by their respect since shewn me, it was plain they loved me. That he indeed had heard the occasion of[226] my ill usage, and of the ill-will some still bore me, was, because I had ordered my People to defend the Ship: Which he blamed them exceedingly for; saying, If he had had the good fortune to have taken me, and I had defended my Ship against him, he should have doubly valued me for it: That as he was not in Partnership with them, he would say no more at present; but that he hoped they would now use me kindly, and give me some Necessaries, with what remained undestroyed of my private Adventure.” This was by no means relished by this pack of Miscreants; for in their Hearts they hated Captain Davis, because he kept his Ship’s Company in good order, tho’ they were almost double their Number; and being a brave generous Man, they dreaded his Resentment. However Cocklyn, and the chief of his People putting a good face on the matter, invited him and Captain Glynn on board the Prize; and they two desiring I might accompany them, it was readily granted.
Soon after this, Captain Cocklyn along with his Quarter-master and others, came from the Prize onto their old Ship to pay their respects to Captain Davis and the rest who came with him. Once the pleasantries were done, Captain Davis generously said, “I’m embarrassed to hear how you’ve treated me. Remember, you went into piracy to take revenge on dishonest Merchants and cruel Ship Commanders. As for the Owner of the Prize, he is unmatched in London for his generosity and kindness to poor sailors, as I had heard from others and now from Captain Glynn: And as for me, none of my crew, even those who joined you, spoke poorly of me. From the respect they have shown me since, it’s clear they care for me. I heard the reason for my mistreatment and the lingering dislike some have for me is that I ordered my crew to defend the Ship: which I think they are to blame for; saying, if he had been fortunate enough to capture me while I was defending my Ship against him, he would have respected me even more for it. He wasn’t in partnership with them, so he wouldn't say more at present; but he hoped they would treat me well now and provide me with some essentials along with whatever was left of my private venture.” This didn’t sit well with this group of Miscreants; they secretly hated Captain Davis because he kept his crew in good order, even though they were nearly outnumbered. Being a brave and generous Man, they feared his anger. However, Cocklyn and the heads of his crew put on a brave face and invited him and Captain Glynn aboard the Prize; and they asked if I could join them, which was readily agreed to.
Soon after we were on board, we all went into the great Cabin, where we found nothing but Destruction. Two Scrutores I had there were broke to Pieces, and all the fine Goods and Necessaries in them were all gone. Moreover two large Chests that had Books in them were empty; and I was afterwards informed, they had been all thrown overboard; for one of the Pirates, upon opening them, swore, “There was Jaw-work enough (as he called it) to serve a Nation, and proposed they might be cast into the Sea; for he feared, there might be some Books amongst them, that might breed Mischief enough; and prevent some of their Comrades from going on in their Voyage to Hell, whither they were all bound.” Upon which the Books were all flung out of the Cabin-windows into the River.
Soon after we got on board, we all entered the big cabin, where we found nothing but destruction. Two scrutores I had there were smashed to pieces, and all the nice goods and necessities inside them were gone. Also, two large chests that contained books were empty; I later learned that they had all been thrown overboard. One of the pirates, after opening them, swore, “There’s enough jaw-work (as he called it) to serve a nation,” and suggested they might be tossed into the sea because he feared there could be some books among them that could cause enough trouble and prevent some of their comrades from continuing on their journey to hell, where they were all headed. So, all the books were thrown out of the cabin windows into the river.
After the Company were all sat down in the Cabin, they were treated with all sorts of Liquors, and other things, that had once been mine: By this means the chief Pirates being put into a good humour,[228] my Friend captain Glynn took the opportunity of begging of the Quarter-master several Necessaries for me: Which being readily granted, they were tied up in Bundles, and Captain Glynn designed to take them on Shore with him to his House for me. But an unlucky accident happened, which made me lose them all again.
After everyone in the Company sat down in the Cabin, they enjoyed all kinds of drinks and other items that used to belong to me. This got the main Pirates in a good mood, and my friend Captain Glynn took the chance to ask the Quarter-master for several essentials for me. Since they agreed right away, the items were packed into bundles, and Captain Glynn planned to take them ashore to his house for me. But an unfortunate accident occurred, causing me to lose everything again.[228]
For some of Captain Davis’s People coming on board at that time; one of them, a pert young fellow of eighteen, broke a Chest open to plunder it. The Quarter-master hearing of it, goes out of the Cabin, and asks the reason of his so doing; the young Man replied, “As they were all Pirates, he thought he did what was right.” On that the Quarter-master strikes at him with his broad Sword, but the young Man running away, escaped the Blow, and fled for protection into the great Cabin to his Master Captain Davis. The Quarter-master pursues him in a great Passion; and there not being room amongst so many of us, to make a stroke at him, he made a thrust[229] with his Sword, and slit the Ball of one of the young Man’s Thumbs, and slightly wounded at the same time Captain Davis on the back of one of his Hands. Davis upon that was all on Fire, and vowed Revenge, saying, “That tho’ his Man had offended, he ought to have been first acquainted with it; for no other Person had a right to punish him in his Presence;” and immediately goes on board his own Ship. Where telling the Story to his Ship’s Company, they all resolved forthwith to revenge this great injury done to one of their Comrades, and the Indignity shown their Captain. Upon that they slip one of their Cables, and begun to heave on the other, in order to come and board Cocklyn’s Ship, and destroy such a set of vile Fellows, as they called him and his Crew. When Captain Davis went from the Prize, Cocklyn soon followed, and went on board his own Ship, to get all things in a readiness to defend himself. Captain Glynn and my self only remained behind, and hoped quickly to have seen hot work between[230] them; but Cocklyn having consulted his People, and judging they should be no ways able to cope with Captain Davis, hastily came on board the Prize again, and desired Captain Glynn to go on board Davis with him, in order to make up matters. My Friend would have refused this unpleasant Office, if he durst; but on his not readily complying, Cocklyn grew enraged. I fearing the consequences, persuaded, him to go: Which Cocklyn was so well pleased with, that he often spoke of it afterwards to my advantage.
For some of Captain Davis’s crew coming on board at that moment, one of them, a cocky young guy of eighteen, broke open a chest to steal from it. The Quarter-master, hearing the commotion, stepped out of the cabin and asked why he was doing it. The young man replied, “Since they were all pirates, he thought it was okay.” The Quarter-master then swung his sword at him, but the young man ran away and escaped the blow, seeking refuge in the great cabin with his Captain, Davis. The Quarter-master chased him, furious, and unable to make a proper swing in the cramped space, he lunged with his sword, slicing the tip of the young man's thumb and slightly injuring Captain Davis on the back of his hand. Davis was furious and vowed revenge, saying that although his man had messed up, he should have been informed first; no one else had the right to punish him in his presence. He immediately went back on board his own ship. After telling the story to his crew, they all decided to get back at the injury done to their comrade and the disrespect shown to their Captain. They cut one of their cables and started pulling on the other to come and board Cocklyn’s ship and deal with what they called his vile crew. When Captain Davis left the prize ship, Cocklyn quickly followed and went back to his own ship to prepare for defense. Captain Glynn and I stayed behind, hoping to witness a fierce fight between them. However, Cocklyn, after consulting his crew, realized they wouldn't stand a chance against Captain Davis, so he hurried back to the prize ship and asked Captain Glynn to join him in making peace with Davis. My friend would have refused this undesirable task if he could, but when he hesitated, Cocklyn became furious. Fearing the outcome, I persuaded him to go, which Cocklyn appreciated so much that he often mentioned it later as a positive thing for me.
By the time they came on board Davis, his Ship was just heaving up their Anchor, and tho’ Captain Glynn was a well-spoken ingenious Man, he found it very difficult to compromise the Matter: Which at last was done on these Terms; “That Captain Davis and his Ship’s Company, should have their share of Liquors and Necessaries on board the Prize; and, That the Quarter-master, who had wounded the young Man belonging to Davis, should before all his Crew acknowledge his fault, and ask Pardon for the same.”
By the time they boarded Davis, his ship was just raising their anchor, and although Captain Glynn was a well-spoken and clever man, he found it very hard to settle the issue. Eventually, it was agreed on these terms: "That Captain Davis and his crew should receive their share of drinks and supplies on board the prize; and that the quartermaster, who had injured the young man from Davis, should acknowledge his mistake in front of all his crew and ask for forgiveness."
Night now approaching, Captain Glynn was obliged to go on Shore, without calling upon me for the Things he had begged, intending to come next day for them. Being thus left on board the Prize, with only three or four of the Pirates, amongst whom the bloody-minded Boatswain (formerly mentioned) was one; and there being no Boat along the side at that time, I resolved to stay where I was all night, and not hail their Pirate-Ship to send their Boat for me.
Night was approaching, and Captain Glynn had to go ashore without asking me for the things he had requested, planning to come back the next day for them. Being left on board the Prize with just three or four of the pirates, including the violent Boatswain I mentioned earlier, and with no boat available at the moment, I decided to stay put all night and not call for their pirate ship to send a boat for me.
The Pirate-Carpenter was then lying on my Bed in the State-room; so I sat some time by my self in the Cabin, having a Candle by me on a Table. When he awoke, he civilly desired me to go and take some rest; saying, “He feared I had not had any since I was taken.” I returned him thanks, saying, “I would sit up till eight a clock:” Whereupon he came and fat down by me on the Lockers, abaft in the Cabin.
The Pirate-Carpenter was lying on my bed in the state room, so I spent some time alone in the cabin, with a candle on the table beside me. When he woke up, he kindly asked me to go get some rest, saying, "I’m worried you haven't had any since you were captured." I thanked him and said, "I'll stay up until eight o'clock." Then he came and sat down next to me on the lockers at the back of the cabin.
The Boatswain came down soon after this, and being a little in Liquor, began to abuse me. On that the Carpenter told[232] him, “He was a base Villain,” and turned him out of the Cabin. Soon after, a puff of Wind coming in at one of the Cabin Windows, put our Candle out; and the Carpenter and I rising up together, to blow the Candle in again, (but not being able to do it) we accidentally shifted places in the dark, he seating himself just over against the Cabin Door, where I sat before: And having no Tinder-box, we were at a great loss how to light the Candle again.
The Boatswain came down soon after and, having had a few drinks, started to insult me. The Carpenter then told him, “You're a total jerk,” and kicked him out of the Cabin. Shortly after, a gust of wind came through one of the Cabin windows and blew out our candle. The Carpenter and I got up together to try to relight it, but since we couldn't, we accidentally switched places in the dark, with him sitting right across from the Cabin door where I had been before. Without a tinderbox, we were really stuck on how to get the candle lit again.
While we were considering how to do it, the Boatswain came into the Steerage, and finding the Candle out, began to swear and rant, saying, “I had put it out purposely, with design to go into the Powder-room undiscovered, and blow the Ship up.” But the Carpenter called to him, and told him, “It was done by accident, and that I still sat by him on the Locker.” So he came to the Cabin Door, and by the Star-light that came in at the Windows, perceived us sitting; but could not distinguish our Faces. Thinking I sat still in the Place where[233] he had seen me before, he presented a Pistol, and drew the Trigger, swearing, “At that instant, he would blow my Brains out.” By good fortune the Pistol did not go off, but only flash’d in the Pan: By the Light of which the Carpenter observing that he should have been shot instead of me, it so provoked him, that he run in the dark to the Boatswain; and having wrenched the Pistol out of his hand, he beat him, with that and his Fist, to such a Degree, that he almost killed him.
While we were trying to figure out how to handle it, the Boatswain came into the Steerage and, finding the candle out, started swearing and shouting, saying, “I put it out on purpose to sneak into the Powder-room undetected and blow the ship up.” But the Carpenter called out to him and said, “It was an accident, and I'm still sitting right here next to him on the Locker.” So he approached the Cabin Door, and by the starlight coming in through the windows, he saw us sitting there; however, he couldn't make out our faces. Thinking I was still in the spot where[233] he had seen me before, he aimed a pistol and pulled the trigger, swearing, “Right then, I'm going to blow your brains out.” Fortunately, the pistol didn’t fire but only flashed in the pan. With that light, the Carpenter realized he should have been shot instead of me, which infuriated him. He ran in the dark toward the Boatswain and, wrenching the pistol out of his hand, he beat him with it and his fists to such an extent that he almost killed him.
The noise that was made in this Fray being heard on board the Pirate-ship that lay close to us, a Boat was sent from her; and they being informed of the Truth of the matter, the Officer that was in her, thought fit to carry away this wicked Villain, who had three times attempted to murder me.
The commotion from this fight was heard on the pirate ship nearby, so they sent a boat over. Once they learned the truth of the situation, the officer on board decided to take away this evil villain, who had tried to kill me three times.
After this I slept soundly, having been much fatigued; but I was awaked early in the Morning by a great number of Captain Davis’s Crew, who came on board to take part of the Liquors and Necessaries, according[234] to Agreement. It was very surprizing to see the Actions of these People. They and Cocklyn’s Crew (for Le Boose’s were not yet admitted) made such Waste and Destruction, that I am sure a numerous set of such Villains would in a short time, have ruined a great City. They hoisted upon Deck a great many half Hogsheads of Claret, and French Brandy; knock’d their Heads out, and dipp’d Canns and Bowls into them to drink out of: And in their Wantonness threw full Buckets of each sort upon one another. As soon as they had emptied what was on the Deck, they hoisted up more: And in the evening washed the Decks with what remained in the Casks. As to bottled Liquor of many sorts, they made such havock of it, that in a few days they had not one Bottle left: For they would not give themselves the trouble of drawing the Cork out, but nick’d the Bottles, as they called it, that is, struck their necks off with a Cutlace; by which means one in three was generally broke: Neither was there any Cask-liquor left in a short time, but a little French Brandy.
After that, I slept deeply, feeling very tired; but I was woken up early in the morning by a large number of Captain Davis’s crew, who came aboard to take their share of the drinks and supplies, as agreed upon. It was quite surprising to see how these people acted. They and Cocklyn’s crew (since Le Boose’s hadn’t been allowed on yet) caused such waste and destruction that I’m sure a large group of such ruffians could ruin a great city in no time. They brought up many half barrels of Claret and French Brandy; knocked off the tops and dipped mugs and bowls into them to drink; and in their exuberance, they threw full buckets of each kind at each other. As soon as they emptied what was on deck, they brought up more. By evening, they washed the deck with what was left in the barrels. As for bottled drinks of various kinds, they created such havoc that in just a few days, they had no bottles left. They wouldn’t even take the trouble to pull the corks out but instead "nick" the bottles, meaning they would chop off the necks with a cutlass; this typically resulted in one out of three being broken. Soon, there was also hardly any barrel liquor left, except for a little French Brandy.
As to Eatables, such as Cheese, Butter, Sugar, and many other things, they were as soon gone. For the Pirates being all in a drunken Fit, which held as long as the Liquor lasted, no care was taken by any one to prevent this Destruction: Which they repented of when too late.
As for food items like cheese, butter, sugar, and many other things, they were gone just as quickly. The pirates, caught up in a drunken spree that lasted as long as the booze did, didn’t care to stop the destruction. They regretted it when it was already too late.
As for my things, which the Quarter-master had given me at Captain Glynn’s Request, and which were accordingly bundled up; a company of drunken Pirates coming into the Cabin, and stumbling over some Goods that lay on the Floor, they took them, with three of my Bundles, and threw them overboard; swearing, “They had like to have broken their Necks by those things lying in their way.”
As for my stuff, which the Quartermaster had given me at Captain Glynn's request and which was all packed up, a group of drunken pirates came into the cabin and tripped over some goods that were on the floor. They took those items, along with three of my bundles, and tossed them overboard, swearing, “They almost broke their necks because of those things in their way.”
I had then but one Bundle left, in which was a black Suit of Cloaths, and other things which this Gang had spared. They being gone out of the Cabin, a Pirate, who was tolerably sober, came in soon after, and seeing my Bundle, said, “He would see what was in it;” which in prudence I did not oppose. He[236] then took out my black Cloth Cloaths, a good Hat and Wig, and some other Things. Whereupon I told him, “Captain Cocklyn’s Quarter-master had given them to me; and I hoped he would not deprive me of them; for they were of no service to him in so hot a Country, but would be of great use to me, as I should soon return to England.” I had hardly done speaking, when he lifted up his broad Sword, and gave me a Blow on the Shoulder with the flat side of it; whispering at the same time these Words in my Ear, “I give you this Caution, never to dispute the Will of a Pirate: For, supposing I had cleft your Scull asunder for your Impudence, what would you have got by it but Destruction? Indeed you may flatter your self, I should have been put to death for killing a Prisoner in cold Blood; but assure your self my Friends would have brought me off on such an Occasion.” I gave him thanks for his Admonition, and soon after he put on the Clothes, which in less than half an hour after, I saw him take[237] off and throw overboard. For some of the Pirates seeing him dress’d in that manner, had thrown several Buckets of Claret upon him. This Person’s true name was Francis Kennedy. He was afterwards hang’d at Execution-Dock, but he told me at the time he put my Cloaths on, that his name was Sun; asking me, “If I did not know his Father, who was then Commander of a Ship that used the Barbadoes Trade; and that if ever the old Dog fell in his way, he would kill him.” To which I answered, “I knew no such Person.”
I had only one bundle left, which contained a black suit of clothes and other items that this gang had spared. After they left the cabin, a pirate who was somewhat sober came in shortly after and saw my bundle. He said, “I want to see what’s inside,” and wisely, I didn’t argue with him. He then took out my black cloth clothes, a good hat, and a wig, along with some other things. I told him, “Captain Cocklyn’s quartermaster gave them to me, and I hope you won’t take them away since they’re of no use to you in such a hot country, but they would be really helpful for me when I return to England.” I had barely finished speaking when he swung his broad sword and hit me on the shoulder with the flat side, whispering in my ear, “Consider this a warning: never challenge a pirate’s will. If I had split your skull for your impudence, what would you have gained but destruction? You might think I’d be punished for killing a prisoner in cold blood, but trust me, my friends would have helped me out of trouble.” I thanked him for the advice, and shortly after, he put on the clothes, which less than half an hour later, I saw him take off and throw overboard. Some of the pirates had seen him dressed that way and dumped several buckets of claret on him. This guy’s real name was Francis Kennedy. He was later hanged at Execution Dock, but at the time he wore my clothes, he told me his name was Sun and asked if I knew his father, who commanded a ship in the Barbados trade; he added that if he ever came across the old dog, he would kill him. I replied, “I don’t know anyone by that name.”
When night came on, I had nothing left of what had been bundled up, but a Hat and Wig. I must own, that whenever they plundered me, no Affront was offered to my Person; but several brought me Liquor, and Slices of Ham broiled, a Biscuit being my Plate; saying, “They pitied my Condition.” The Hat and Wig I had left, being hung on Pins in the Cabin, a person half drunk came in about eight a clock at night, and put them on; telling me, “He was a great[238] Merchant on Shore, and that his name was Hogbin:” But supposing him to be a Pirate, I said little to him. By this time there was a great Quietness in the Ship, most of the Pirates being dead drunk. After a little Conversation, as Mr. Hogbin was going out of the Cabin with my Hat and Wig on, he met Cocklyn’s Quarter-master; who knowing him not to be one of the Crew, asked him, “How he came by the things he had on?” To which the Fellow not returning a direct answer, the Quarter-master beat him very severely for taking things he had no Right to. Then coming to me, he asked in a kind manner, “How I had fared in the hurly burly of that Day?” When I told him, “I had lost all the Necessaries he had given me the Day before,” he express’d much concern, and said, “He would take care the next day to recover what he could for me.” But he did not prove so good as his word.
As night fell, I had nothing left from what had been taken from me except a hat and wig. I have to admit, whenever they robbed me, they didn't insult me directly; instead, some brought me drinks and slices of broiled ham, using a biscuit as my plate, saying, “They felt sorry for my situation.” The hat and wig I had left were hanging on hooks in the cabin when a half-drunk guy came in around eight o'clock at night and put them on, telling me, “He was a great merchant on shore, and his name was Hogbin.” But thinking he was a pirate, I said little to him. By this time, the ship was very quiet, as most of the pirates were dead drunk. After chatting a bit, as Mr. Hogbin was leaving the cabin wearing my hat and wig, he ran into Cocklyn’s quartermaster, who, not recognizing him as part of the crew, asked how he got the things he was wearing. The guy didn’t give a clear answer, so the quartermaster beat him pretty badly for taking what wasn’t his. Then he came to me and kindly asked, “How I had fared in the chaos of that day?” When I told him, “I had lost all the supplies you gave me the day before,” he expressed a lot of concern and said, “He would make sure to recover what he could for me the next day.” But he didn't keep his promise.
Being quite weary of such Company, and understanding, the three Pirate Captains were on Shore at my Friend Captain Glynn’s House, I asked leave of the Quarter-master to go to them; which he readily granted. On this I got into a Cannoe, and as we rowed towards the Shore, we had like to have been overset, through the drunkenness of one of the Pirates that was with us. If Providence had not prevented this Accident, we should undoubtedly have all been lost; for the Tide ran very strong, and several voracious Sharks were then near us.
Being really tired of that company, and knowing that the three pirate captains were on shore at my friend Captain Glynn's house, I asked the quartermaster for permission to join them, which he easily granted. So, I got into a canoe, and as we rowed toward the shore, we almost capsized because one of the pirates with us was drunk. If luck hadn't intervened, we all would have been lost, as the tide was very strong and several hungry sharks were nearby.
When I came to Captain Glynn’s, he and the Pirate Captains received me in a very civil manner; and upon my telling them, “How I had lost all my Necessaries that had been given me;” the Captains promised, That the next day they would do what they could, to recover some of them again for me. Then I[240] begged a Shirt of my Friend Captain Glynn; for I had been three days without shifting, which is very uneasy in so hot a Country, where people sweat so much.
When I arrived at Captain Glynn's, he and the Pirate Captains welcomed me in a very polite way. When I told them about how I had lost all my essentials that had been given to me, the Captains promised that they would do their best the next day to help me recover some of them. Then I[240] asked my friend Captain Glynn for a shirt, since I hadn't changed in three days, which is rather uncomfortable in such a hot country where people sweat a lot.
Being greatly refresh’d with that clean Shirt, and having stayed all night with him, where I had more rest than I before had for a good while; next day I went on board, in company with the Pirate-Captains. Captain Davis desired Cocklyn to order all his People on the Quarter-deck, and made a Speech to them in my behalf; which they relishing better than that he had formerly made, It was resolved to give me the Ship they designed to leave, in order to go into the Prize, with the Remains of my Cargoe that was undestroyed. And there being a large quantity of Goods likewise remaining in several Prizes, they concluded to give me them also: Which, with my own, were worth several thousand Pounds. One of the leading Pirates proposed to the rest, “That they should take me along with them down the Coast of Guinea; where I might exchange the Goods for Gold:[241] And if in order to make a quick Sale, I sold them at prime cost, I should get Money enough by them: That, no doubt, as they went down the Coast, they should take some French and Portuguese Vessels, and then they might give me as many of their best Slaves, as would fill the Ship: That then he would advise me to go for the Island of St. Thomas in the West Indies, a Free port belonging to the Danes, and sell them there, with the Vessel: And after rewarding my People in a handsom manner, I might return with a large sum of Money to London, and bid the Merchants defiance.”
After feeling really refreshed in that clean shirt and spending the night with him, where I got more rest than I had for a while, the next day I went on board with the Pirate Captains. Captain Davis asked Cocklyn to gather everyone on the quarterdeck and gave a speech on my behalf; they liked it much more than the one he had done before. They decided to give me the ship they planned to leave behind to go after the prize, along with what was left of my cargo that hadn’t been destroyed. There was also a lot of goods remaining in several prizes, so they agreed to include those too: altogether, with my own goods, it was worth several thousand pounds. One of the main pirates suggested to the others that they should take me down the coast of Guinea, where I could trade the goods for gold:[241] and if I wanted to sell quickly, I could sell them at the original price and still make a good amount of money. He was sure that as they traveled down the coast, they would capture some French and Portuguese ships, and then they could give me as many of their best slaves as would fill the ship. He advised me to head to the Island of St. Thomas in the West Indies, a free port owned by the Danes, and sell everything there along with the vessel. After rewarding my crew generously, I could return to London with a lot of money and tell the merchants to take a hike.
This proposal was unanimously approved of by them: But it struck me with a sudden damp, apprehending it would be fatal to me. So I began to insinuate, “It would not be proper for me to accept of such a quantity of other Peoples Goods, as they had so generously voted for me:” And going on to give my reasons, I was immediately interrupted by several of the Pirates, who began[242] to be very angry, that I did not readily accept of what had been proposed, so much for my advantage, as they thought; for many of them were so ignorant, as to think their Gift would have been legal.
This proposal was unanimously approved by them. But it hit me suddenly, realizing it would be disastrous for me. So I started to suggest, “It wouldn’t be right for me to accept such a large amount of other people's goods that they so generously voted for me.” As I continued to explain my reasons, I was immediately interrupted by several of the pirates, who became quite angry that I didn’t immediately accept what they thought was a benefit for me. Many of them were so clueless that they believed their gift would be legal.
On this, Captain Davis said, “I know this Man, and can easily guess his thoughts concerning this matter; for he thinks, if he should act in the manner you have proposed, he shall ever after lose his Reputation. Now I am for allowing every body to go to the Devil in their own way; so desire you will give him the remains of his own Cargoe, with what is left of his private Adventure, and let him do with it what he thinks fitting.”
On this, Captain Davis said, “I know this guy, and I can easily figure out what he's thinking about this situation; he believes that if he acts the way you suggested, he'll lose his reputation for good. Personally, I think everyone should mess up in their own way; so I ask that you give him the rest of his cargo, along with whatever is left of his personal venture, and let him decide how to handle it.”
This was readily granted, and they advised me to take Le Boose’s Brigantine, which he had then just quitted, (having fitted one of the Prizes for a Pirate-ship for him and his Crew) and carry her along the side of my Ship, in order to save the Goods then left undestroyed in her; allowing me some of my own People to do it. By this means we saved a considerable[243] part of the Cargoe, but of my private Adventure not above thirty Pounds Sterling: for that chiefly consisting in Necessaries and Liquors, with fine Goods, was soon destroyed by them: One instance of which out of many I shall give. The Pirates took several Pieces of fine Holland, and opening them, spread them on the Deck; and being almost drunk, lay down on them: Then others came and threw Buckets of Claret upon them, which rousing them up, and the Hollands being thereby stained, they flung the Pieces overboard.
This was quickly agreed to, and they suggested I take Le Boose's Brigantine, which he had just left (having outfitted one of the Prizes for a Pirate ship for him and his Crew) and bring it alongside my Ship to save the Goods that were still intact. They allowed me to bring along some of my own crew to help with this. By doing this, we managed to save a significant[243] portion of the Cargo, but I only recovered about thirty Pounds Sterling from my own venture. Most of that was in Supplies and Liquors, along with fine Goods, which were quickly ruined by them. One example of many I could share is this: The Pirates took several pieces of fine Holland, opened them up, and spread them across the Deck; then, being almost drunk, they lay down on them. Others came along and dumped buckets of Claret on them, which woke them up, and since the Hollands were stained, they tossed the pieces overboard.
Captain Davis likewise further obtained for me, that I might lye on board the Two Friends Captain Elliot of Barbadoes; whom they had taken and forced to be their Store Ship; and that I might go on Shore when I pleased, to my Friend Captain Glynn’s house, on condition I should return whenever they sent for me.
Captain Davis also arranged for me to stay on board the Two Friends, which was under Captain Elliot from Barbadoes; they had captured him and made him their supply ship. I was allowed to go ashore whenever I wanted to visit my friend Captain Glynn’s house, on the condition that I would come back whenever they called for me.
And now, the Tide being turned, they were as kind to me, as they had been at first severe. So we got the Brigantine along the side of the Prize, and as Bale-goods[244] and Cases came to hand, we got them into her; only now and then we lost some, by the ill-nature of two or three leading Pirates: For if we could not receive the Goods so fast as they expected, with the few People I had of my own then with me, they would let them drop overboard.
And now that the tide had turned, they were as nice to me as they had once been harsh. So we lined the brigantine up next to the prize, and as bales and cases came our way, we loaded them onto her. However, every once in a while, we lost some because of the bad behavior of two or three lead pirates. If we couldn’t take in the goods fast enough for their liking, given the few people I had with me at that time, they would just let them drop overboard.
The same they did by a quantity of Irish Beef, the first day after I was taken; for they despised it, having found so much English, in the several Prizes they had met with in the River. This sight moved me to intreat Captain Cocklyn to give me the Irish Beef they were going to throw overboard; for the use of my poor People that had not entered with them. But I being then under the high Displeasure of him and his Crew, he brutishly replied, “There is Horse-beans enough in the Prize to serve you and your People six Months.” To which I answered, “It was coarse diet.” But finding this put him into a passion, I held my Tongue, and the Beef was all cast into the Sea.
The same thing happened with a bunch of Irish beef the day after I was taken; they looked down on it since they had found so much English meat in the various prizes they had captured in the river. This made me ask Captain Cocklyn to give me the Irish beef they were about to throw overboard for my poor people who hadn’t joined them. However, since I was then in his bad graces, he rudely replied, “There are enough horse beans in the prize to feed you and your people for six months.” I responded, “That’s a poor diet.” But seeing this made him angry, I kept quiet, and all the beef was thrown into the sea.
In this place I think it proper to acquaint the Reader, What danger all the Prisoners were in by a false Report brought on board the Prize Ships that afternoon. For it was confidently averred by some Negroes, “That one of their Crew was murdered, by two Captains, whose names were Bennet and Thompson, who had been obliged to fly into the Woods from the rage of the Pirates.” And they added, “That these two Gentlemen coming to the House of one Mr. Jones, (who lived a great way up the River) to seek for Provisions, they there met with the person whom they had killed.” Upon this report the Pirates resolved to revenge themselves on us who were their prisoners: “Which obliged me to argue with them, and observe how great a cruelty it would be, to punish us who were wholly innocent, for the faults of others.” Moreover I said, “The report might be false, it coming from the Shore-Negroes; and I hoped at least they would defer their resentment against us, till they had a more certain[246] account of the matter.” This calmed their Rage a little, when, to our great Joy, the Person that was reported to be killed, came on board soon after; and told his Comrades, that he had met with Captain Bennet and Thompson at Mr. Jones’s House, who threatned him; from which the report arose that they had killed him; but that they had not otherwise misused him: So on this their Passion was entirely calmed.
In this part, I think it's important to inform the reader about the danger all the prisoners faced due to a false report brought aboard the prize ships that afternoon. Some locals confidently claimed that one of their crew members had been murdered by two captains named Bennet and Thompson, who had been forced to flee into the woods to escape the pirates. They added that these two gentlemen had gone to the home of a Mr. Jones, who lived quite a distance up the river, to look for supplies, where they encountered the person they supposedly killed. Because of this report, the pirates decided to take revenge on us, their prisoners. This forced me to argue with them and point out how cruel it would be to punish us—who were completely innocent—for the actions of others. I also mentioned that the report might be false since it came from the locals on the shore, and I hoped they would at least hold off on their anger until they had more accurate information about the situation. This somewhat eased their rage, and to our great relief, the person who was reported dead came on board shortly after. He told his comrades that he had met Captain Bennet and Thompson at Mr. Jones’s house, where they had threatened him, which led to the rumor that they had killed him; however, they had not harmed him otherwise. With this news, their anger completely subsided.
As I have mentioned these two Captains, Bennet and Thompson, I shall give an account of their Misfortunes, which I had afterwards from their own Mouths. Captain John Bennet, being bound from Antegoa to the Coast of Guinea, was taken at Cape de Verd Islands by Davis. Who, after plundering him, restored him his Ship; and he went into the River Sieraleon, where Captain Thompson was arrived before him. Upon Cocklyn the Pirate’s coming into the River, they carried their Ships a good way up, to a place called Brent’s-Island, being the Settlement of the Royal African Company; where one Mr.[247] Plunket was Governour. Having got their Ships very near the Shore, they made a Battery thereon, and having landed Ammunition, resolved with their People to defend themselves to the utmost: thinking at that time they would remain faithful. Le Boose being arrived in his Brigantine, and hearing that several Ships were up the River, he resolved to have one of them for his use; so he went up to attack them, and they bravely defended themselves against him: But, soon after, Cocklyn coming with his Ship to the assistance of Le Boose, their People begun to faulter; and these gallant Captains were, for saving their Lives, obliged, with Mr. Plunket, and several of their Officers, to fly into the Woods: Where, for many Weeks, they remained, having nothing to subsist on but Rice, with now and then some Oysters, which they got by night from the River side: neither durst they appear near the place where the Pirates were (as long as they remained there) for they had vowed to cut them to pieces, if ever they fell into their hands. Moreover, their Ships were[248] burnt; and Le Boose took for his own use, one Captain Lamb’s Ship, which at that time lay farther up the River. I thought proper to relate this, in order to set the story in a better light, tho’ it happened some Weeks before I was taken.
As I mentioned these two Captains, Bennet and Thompson, I’ll share their misfortunes, which I later heard from them directly. Captain John Bennet, while traveling from Antegoa to the Coast of Guinea, was captured at the Cape de Verd Islands by Davis. After robbing him, he returned his ship, and Bennet went into the River Sieraleon, where Captain Thompson had already arrived. When Cocklyn the Pirate came into the river, they moved their ships further upstream to a place called Brent’s-Island, which was the settlement of the Royal African Company, governed by Mr.[247] Plunket. After bringing their ships close to shore, they built a battery there and landed ammunition, determined to defend themselves with their crew, believing they would remain loyal. When Le Boose arrived in his brigantine and heard that several ships were up the river, he decided to take one for himself and went to attack them. They bravely defended themselves against him; however, soon after, Cocklyn arrived with his ship to assist Le Boose, causing their crew to start to falter. To save their lives, these brave Captains, along with Mr. Plunket and several of their officers, had to flee into the woods. They stayed there for many weeks, with nothing to eat but rice and occasionally some oysters they collected at night from the riverbank. They couldn't risk appearing near where the pirates were (as long as they remained there) because they had sworn to kill them if they ever got the chance. Moreover, their ships were[248] burned, and Le Boose took Captain Lamb’s ship, which was further up the river at that time. I thought it was important to share this to provide clearer context, even though it happened weeks before my own capture.
But now, to return to my Subject. I was relating, how we were employed in saving what Goods we could. This took us up four days; and I slept every night on board their Tender commanded by Captain Elliot, who was very kind to me, and had a great ascendant over the leading Pirates: so that he had seldom the Company of the common sort, having orders to drive them away, whenever they came on board him. And I have often been amazed, to hear and see what he has done to some of them when they were impudent; beating them, and saying, “He was sure he should see them hang’d in due time at Execution-dock.” However, by this means we were generally very easy on board him, which was no little satisfaction to me in my Circumstances.
But now, back to my topic. I was talking about how we were busy saving whatever goods we could. This took us about four days, and I slept every night on their Tender commanded by Captain Elliot, who was really kind to me and had a lot of influence over the lead pirates. Because of that, he rarely had to deal with the regular crew, since he was ordered to drive them away whenever they came on board. I’ve often been amazed by what he did to some of them when they got disrespectful; he would beat them and say, “I’m sure I’ll see you hanged in due time at Execution-dock.” Still, this meant we usually felt pretty safe on board with him, which was quite a relief for me given my situation.
About this time the Quarter-master who took me, fell sick of a Fever; which, increasing, he sent to speak with me: And having desired all present, except my self to withdraw, he told me, “That at the time I was taken, he designed to have killed me, when he presented the Pistol to my breast; begging I would forgive him for his cruel Intention:” Which I readily doing, he further said, “That he had been a most wicked Wretch, having been guilty of all manner of abominable Crimes; and that now believing he should die, his Conscience sadly tormented him, fearing he should be punished, as he deserved, in Hell-fire, which so often in their vile discourse he had made light of.” Upon hearing that, “I exhorted him to sincere Repentance; telling him, the Christian Religion assured us of God’s Mercies, if we are truly penitent; and I instanced the goodness of God to my self, in that he was graciously pleased to preserve me, the night I was taken, from being murdered by him and others; which great[250] Mercies I believed were shown me, because I put my Hope and Trust in Almighty God; and exhorted him to do the same.” But he replied, with a sad countenance. “O, Sir, my heart is hardened; however, I will endeavour to follow your good counsel.” As he was going on, expressing his sorrow for his former course of Life, some of the Pirates broke in upon us, to ask him, “How he did?” So he called his Boy, and, as a mark of his Good-will towards me, ordered him to take the Key of his Chest, and let me take out what Necessaries I would. Accordingly I took that opportunity of providing my self with Shirts, Stockings, and several other things. As I was taking them out, a Pirate coming from the Deck, and knowing nothing of the Quarter-master’s order, called out aloud; “see how that Dog is thieving there: He does it as cleverly as any Rogue of us all.” But being told, “It was with the Quarter-master’s leave,” he came and helped me to bundle the things up, and I sent them on board the[251] Tender. These were the first Necessaries which I could call my own, since my Misfortune.
Around this time, the Quartermaster who brought me here got sick with a fever. As his condition worsened, he asked to speak with me. Once he had everyone else leave the room except for me, he confessed, “At the time I captured you, I intended to kill you when I put the pistol to your chest. I'm asking you to forgive me for my cruel intentions.” I readily forgave him, and he continued, “I’ve been a wicked person, guilty of all kinds of terrible crimes. Now that I believe I’m going to die, my conscience is tormented, fearing I’ll be punished in hellfire, which I often made light of in my conversations.” Hearing this, I encouraged him to genuinely repent, telling him that the Christian faith assures us of God’s mercy if we are truly sorrowful. I shared my own experience of God’s goodness, explaining how He graciously spared me from being murdered by him and others the night I was captured. I believed these great mercies were shown to me because I put my hope and trust in Almighty God, and I urged him to do the same. He replied with a somber expression, “Oh, Sir, my heart is hardened; but I will try to follow your good advice.” As he continued to express his regret for his past life, some pirates interrupted us to ask him how he was doing. He summoned his boy and, as a sign of goodwill toward me, instructed him to get the key to his chest and let me take whatever necessities I needed. I took this opportunity to gather shirts, stockings, and several other items. While I was collecting them, a pirate came in from the deck, unaware of the Quartermaster’s order, and shouted, “Look at that dog stealing over there! He’s as crafty as any rogue among us.” Upon being informed that I had the Quartermaster’s permission, he came over and helped me pack everything up, and I sent the items on board the Tender. These were the first belongings I could call my own since my misfortune.
The Quarter-master that evening falling into a Delirium, died before morning in terrible Agonies; cursing his Maker in so shocking a manner, that it made a great Impression on several new entered Men: and they afterwards came privately to me, begging, “that I would advise them how to get off from so vile a Course of Life, which led them into Destruction both of Body and Soul. Some of them proposed to fly into the Woods, and remain there till their Ships were gone, if I would promise to protect them afterwards; but this being too nice a matter for me to meddle with at that Juncture, I declined it; Exhorting them in general, Not to be guilty of Murder, or any other Cruelty to those they should take. For if ever they should, by a general consent, resolve to embrace the King’s Pardon, it would be a great Advantage to them, to have the unfortunate[252] People they had taken give them a good Character in that respect.”
The quartermaster that evening fell into a delirium and died before morning, suffering terribly and cursing his maker in such a shocking way that it left a strong impression on several newly arrived men. They later came to me privately, asking for advice on how to escape this vile way of life that was leading them to ruin both body and soul. Some suggested that they could hide in the woods until their ships left, if I would promise to protect them afterward; but since this was too delicate a situation for me to get involved in at that moment, I declined. I advised them in general terms not to commit murder or any other cruelty against those they might capture. For if they ever decided, by mutual agreement, to accept the king’s pardon, it would be greatly beneficial for them to have the unfortunate people they had captured giving them a good reference in that regard.
Having mentioned the King’s Pardon, I shall here relate what I before omitted, with relation to his late Majesty’s Proclamation, for a Pardon to Pirates, that should surrender themselves at any of the British Plantations, by the first of July 1719. This Proclamation I had on board, with a Declaration of War against Spain. The Quarter-master finding them amongst my Papers, and not being able to read, he brought them to me, the next day after I was taken, and “bid me read them aloud to all then present;” which I did: But there being Rewards offered in the Proclamation, to those that should take or destroy Pirates; so much for a Captain; and in proportion for the other Officers and common Pirates; this put them into such a Rage, that I began to apprehend my self in some Danger. But Captain Cocklyn ordering silence to be made, bid me read the other Paper, which was The Declaration of War against Spain. When I had read it, some of them said,[253] “They wished they had known it before they left the West Indies” From thence I took occasion to observe to them, “That if they thought fit to embrace his Majesty’s most gracious Pardon, there was not only time enough for them to return to the West Indies, (there being still three Months to come of the time limited in the Proclamation) but now that War was declared against Spain, they would have an opportunity of inriching themselves in a legal way, by going a privateering, which many of them had privately done.” This seemed to be relished by many: but several old Buccaneers, who had been guilty of Murder and other barbarous Crimes, being no ways inclined to it, they used the King’s Proclamation with great contempt, and tore it in pieces. I thought my self well off, that no Resentment or ill-usage was shown me on this occasion.
Having mentioned the King’s Pardon, I will now share what I previously omitted regarding his late Majesty’s Proclamation for a Pardon to Pirates, who should surrender themselves at any of the British Plantations by the first of July 1719. I had this Proclamation on board, along with a Declaration of War against Spain. The Quarter-master found them among my papers and, unable to read, brought them to me the day after I was captured, asking me to read them aloud to everyone present. I did so. However, there were rewards mentioned in the Proclamation for those who captured or destroyed pirates— a significant amount for a Captain and smaller amounts for the other officers and common pirates. This infuriated them, and I started to feel I was in some danger. But Captain Cocklyn called for silence and asked me to read the other document, which was The Declaration of War against Spain. After I read it, some of them said, “They wished they had known it before they left the West Indies.” This prompted me to point out that if they thought it wise to accept the King’s gracious Pardon, there was still plenty of time for them to return to the West Indies (with three months remaining until the deadline in the Proclamation) and now that war had been declared against Spain, they would have the chance to enrich themselves legally by going privateering, which many of them had secretly done before. This seemed to resonate with many; however, several old Buccaneers, guilty of murder and other brutal crimes, were not interested in this option and treated the King’s Proclamation with great contempt, tearing it to shreds. I felt fortunate that no resentment or mistreatment was directed towards me during this incident.
Amongst the several Pirates, that came to consult me, “How they should get off,” There was one Ambrose Curtis, who was in a bad state of Health, and[254] generally walked the Deck in a Silk Night-gown. This person finding me shy in answering his Questions, he told me, “Tho’ I had forgot him, yet he had not me; for he was eleven years ago at Sea with my Father, who had used him severely for being an unlucky Boy: That I might remember, my Father died in Virginia, and I commanded the Ship afterwards, and brought her home to England; having been very kind to him, except in one thing, which was, That he having confessed to me, he was a Servant, and run away from his Master, I refused to pay him his Wages, till he brought a person who gave me Security that I should not pay them twice; and then he had his Wages to a farthing:” Adding, “he had told this to several leading Pirates, who had persuaded him to revenge himself on me; but as I had been kind to him, and in his Conscience he believed I was in the right, to demand Security when I paid him his Wages, so he bore no ill-will to me on that[255] account; and when my necessaries came to be sold at the Mast, he would buy some of them for me;” in which he proved as good as his word.
Among the various pirates who came to consult me about how to escape, there was one, Ambrose Curtis, who was not in great health and usually walked the deck in a silk nightgown. When he noticed I was hesitant to answer his questions, he mentioned, “Even though you may have forgotten me, I haven't forgotten you. Eleven years ago, I was at sea with your father, who was pretty rough on me for being an unlucky boy. Just so you remember, my father passed away in Virginia, and I took command of the ship afterwards and brought her back to England. I was mostly kind to him, except for one thing. He admitted to me that he was a servant who had run away from his master, and I refused to pay him his wages until he brought someone who could guarantee that I wouldn’t end up paying twice. Once that was sorted, he got his wages down to the last penny.” He added that he had shared this with several prominent pirates who encouraged him to take revenge on me, but because I had been kind to him and in his conscience he believed I was right to ask for security before paying him, he held no grudge against me. When my supplies were being sold off at the mast, he bought some of them for me, which he followed through on.
But as to his Questions about getting off, I replied as I had done to others; “Assuring him, if ever it came to be in my power to serve him, I would not spare for Money nor Pains to do it:” But this poor fellow died, before the Pirates left Sieraleon.
But regarding his questions about escaping, I responded as I had to others: “I assure you, if I ever have the chance to help you, I won't hold back on money or effort to do so.” But this poor guy died before the pirates left Sieraleon.
I hope the Reader will pardon me for mentioning several things, which are not so coherent as I could wish; as also several little Incidents. The reason why I mention them is, because I think they display the true humours and ways of these Miscreants.
I hope the reader will forgive me for bringing up a few things that aren't as cohesive as I'd like, along with some minor incidents. The reason I mention them is that I believe they show the true character and behaviors of these miscreants.
Amongst my Adventure of Goods, I had in a Box three second-hand embroidered Coats. One day the three Pirate Captains, coming on board the Prize together, enquired for them, saying, “They understood by my Book such Clothes were in my Ship.” I told them, “They were in a Box under the bed place in the[256] State-room. So they ordered them to be taken out, and immediately put them on.” But the longest Coat falling to Cocklyn’s share, who was a very short Man, it almost reached as low as his Ancles. This very much displeased him, and he would fain have changed with Le Boose, or Davis: But they refused, telling him, “As they were going on Shore amongst the Negroe-Ladies, who did not know the white Mens fashions, it was no matter. Moreover, as his Coat was Scarlet embroidered with Silver, they believed he would have the preference of them, (whose Coats were not so showy) in the opinion of their Mistresses.” This making him easy, they all went on Shore together.
Among my collection of goods, I had a box containing three second-hand embroidered coats. One day, the three pirate captains came on board the prize together and asked about them, saying, “We heard from your book that these clothes are on your ship.” I told them, “They’re in a box under the bed in the [256] state room.” So they ordered them to be brought out and put them on right away. However, the longest coat went to Cocklyn, who was a really short man, and it nearly reached his ankles. This made him very unhappy, and he wanted to swap it with Le Boose or Davis. But they refused, telling him, “Since we’re going ashore among the Negroe ladies, who don’t know the white men's fashion, it doesn’t matter. Plus, since your coat is scarlet and embroidered with silver, we think you’ll stand out more than them, whose coats aren’t as flashy, in the eyes of their ladies.” This reassured him, and they all went ashore together.
It is a Rule amongst the Pirates, not to allow Women to be on board their Ships, when in the Harbour. And if they should take a Prize at Sea, that has any Women on board, no one dares, on pain of death, to force them against their Inclinations. This being a good political[257] Rule to prevent disturbances amongst them, it is strictly observed. So now being in a Harbour, they went on Shore to the Negroe-women, who were very fond of their Company, for the sake of the great Presents they gave them. Nay, some white Men that lived there, did not scruple to lend their black Wives to the Pirates, purely on account of the great Rewards they gave.
It’s a rule among pirates not to let women be on their ships while in port. If they capture a ship at sea that has any women on board, no one dares to force them against their will, under threat of death. This rule is important for maintaining peace among the crew, so it’s strictly followed. Now that they were in port, they went ashore to meet the Black women, who were very eager for their company because of the generous gifts they received. In fact, some white men who lived there had no qualms about lending their Black wives to the pirates just for the sake of the large rewards they offered.
The Pirate Captains having taken these Cloaths without leave from the Quarter-master, it gave great Offence to all the Crew; who alledg’d, “If they suffered such things, the Captains would for the future assume a Power, to take whatever they liked for themselves.” So, upon their returning on board next Morning, the Coats were taken from them, and put into the common Chest, to be sold at the Mast. And it having been reported, “That I had a hand in advising the Captains to put on these Coats,” it gained me the ill-will in particular of one Williams, who was Quarter-master of Le Boose’s Ship. He[258] seeing me in the Tender’s Boat, going on board a French Ship lately taken, where he then was, he swore, “That if I came there, he would cut me to pieces, for the advice I had given the Captains.” But Captain Elliot, who was then in the Boat, whispered me, saying, “Don’t be afraid of him, for it is his usual way of talking. But be sure call him Captain, as soon as you get on board.” It seems this Villain had been Commander of a Pirate Sloop; who, with a Brigantine, two years before, took Captain Laurence Prince in the Whidaw Galley near Jamaica; and being now Quarter-master, which he did not like, he loved to have the Title of Captain given him. So when I came into the French Ship, I adressed my self to him, saying, “Captain Williams, pray hear me upon the Point you are so offended at.” Upon that he gave me a slight Blow on the Shoulder, with the flat of his Cutlace, swearing at the same time, “he had not the heart to hurt me;” When I had told him how the affair had really happen’d, which he had[259] been so angry about, he gave me a Keg of Wine, and was my Friend ever after.
The Pirate Captains took these clothes without permission from the Quartermaster, which really upset the entire crew. They argued, “If we let this slide, the Captains will think they can take whatever they want for themselves.” So, when the Captains returned on board the next morning, the coats were taken from them and put in the common chest to be sold at the mast. It was reported that I had advised the Captains to wear those coats, which earned me the particular dislike of one Williams, who was the Quartermaster on Le Boose's ship. He[258] saw me in the Tender's boat heading to a recently captured French ship, where he was at the time, and he swore, “If you come here, I’ll cut you to pieces for the advice you gave the Captains.” But Captain Elliot, who was in the boat with me, whispered, “Don’t be scared of him; that’s just how he talks. Just make sure to call him Captain as soon as you get on board.” It turns out this guy had been the commander of a pirate sloop, who, along with a brigantine, captured Captain Laurence Prince on the Whidaw Galley near Jamaica two years ago. Now, being a Quartermaster—which he didn’t like—he wanted to be called Captain. So when I got onto the French ship, I addressed him, saying, “Captain Williams, please listen to me about the issue that has you so upset.” He then gave me a light tap on the shoulder with the flat of his cutlass, swearing at the same time, “I just don’t have the heart to hurt you.” After I explained what really happened—the issue he was so angry about—he gave me a keg of wine and became my friend from that point on.
The French Ship just now mentioned, fell into their hands about a fortnight after I was taken by them, in this manner. It was not bound to Sieraleon, but having not had an Observation for several days, because the Sun was near their Zenith, they made land unexpectedly; and not knowing certainly whereabouts they were, but seeing several Ships in the River at an Anchor, they came boldly towards them.
The French ship I just mentioned fell into their hands about two weeks after I was captured by them, like this. It wasn't headed to Sieraleon, but after not having any observations for several days because the sun was close to its zenith, they reached land unexpectedly. Not knowing exactly where they were but seeing several ships anchored in the river, they approached confidently.
I was then on board Captain Cocklyn’s old Ship; for they had not quite fitted mine for their use, not having at that time any Guns mounted; so I saw the great fear and confusion that was amongst them. My Mate, who had entered with them, said, “He believed, by the Ship’s coming in so boldly, it was the Launceston Man of War of forty Guns, whom we had left in Holland. For he had heard me say, she was to follow us to the Coast of Guinea.”
I was then on board Captain Cocklyn’s old ship because they hadn't fully outfitted mine for their use, as it didn't have any guns mounted at that time. So, I witnessed the great fear and confusion among them. My mate, who had joined them, said, “He believed that the ship coming in so boldly was the Launceston, a man of war with forty guns, which we had left in Holland. He had heard me say she was supposed to follow us to the coast of Guinea.”
Happy would it have been for us and many more, if it had been so. For had[260] that, or even a smaller Ship of twenty Guns, with the King’s Commission, come in at that time, or any other, whilst I was in their hands, I am persuaded they would have easily destroyed them. For the new-entered-men had little Courage; and the far greater part both of old and new Pirates, were so much in drink, that there could have been no Order or Conduct amongst them in an Engagement. So that it would have been very easy to have subdued them, and prevented that terrible Destruction, which happened to above one hundred Sail of Ships, that fell afterwards into their Hands, in their going down the Coast of Guinea: Together with those Damages that happened a good while after in the East Indies, by some of this Gang; and the great Ravage made by Roberts (who rose out of Davis’s Ashes) the second time, on the Coast of Guinea, till he was happily destroyed by Sir Chaloner Ogle in the Swallow Man of War. But the reason why no timely care was taken to prevent so great a Destruction, is not proper for me to mention in this place.
It would have been so much better for us and many others if that had happened. If a larger ship with twenty guns, authorized by the King, had come in at that time, or really at any time while I was in their control, I believe they would have easily taken them out. The newcomers were not very brave, and most of the old and new pirates were so drunk that there wouldn’t have been any order or discipline during a fight. It would have been very easy to defeat them and stop the terrible destruction that later happened to over a hundred ships that fell into their control while sailing down the coast of Guinea. This also includes the damage that occurred later in the East Indies by some members of this group, plus the significant destruction caused by Roberts (who emerged from Davis's ashes) the second time along the coast of Guinea, until he was fortunately defeated by Sir Chaloner Ogle in the Swallow Man of War. However, it’s not appropriate for me to explain why no timely action was taken to prevent such a massive destruction here.
As I had no business to be on board the Pirate Ship in time of Action, I asked Captain Cocklyn’s leave to go on board their Tender, which he readily granted. Just as I was going, several of my People who had entered with him, said, “They would go along with me, for they had never seen a Gun fired in anger.” Cocklyn hearing that, told them, “That now they should learn to smell Gunpowder,” and caned them heartily.
Since I had no reason to be on the Pirate Ship during combat, I asked Captain Cocklyn for permission to go on their Tender, which he quickly granted. Just as I was leaving, several of my crew who had come aboard with him said they wanted to join me because they had never witnessed a gun fired in battle. Cocklyn overhearing this, told them, “Now you’ll learn to smell gunpowder,” and gave them a good whack with his cane.
So I went on board Captain Elliot, where I soon saw the French Ship taken. For coming so unexpectedly into the Pirates hands, they made no Resistance: And because the Captain did not strike on their first firing, they put a Rope about his Neck, and hoisted him up and down several times to the Main-yard-arm, till he was almost dead. Captain Le Boose coming at that instant, luckily saved his Life: And highly resenting this their cruel usage to his Countryman, he protested, “he would remain no longer in Partnership with such barbarous Villains.”[262] So, to pacify him, they left the Frenchmen with the Ship in his care; and after the Cargoe was destroyed, they cut the Ship’s Masts by the board, and run her on Shore, for she was very old, and not fit for their purpose.
So I boarded Captain Elliot, where I quickly saw the French ship being captured. Because they came so unexpectedly into the hands of the pirates, they offered no resistance. Since the captain didn’t surrender after their first shot, they tied a rope around his neck and hoisted him up and down several times from the main yardarm until he was nearly dead. Just then, Captain Le Boose arrived and fortunately saved his life. Furious about the cruel treatment of his fellow countryman, he declared, “I will not stay in partnership with such barbaric villains.”[262] To calm him down, they left the Frenchmen with the ship under his care; and after they destroyed the cargo, they cut the ship’s masts and ran her ashore because she was very old and not useful for their needs.
After the affair of the French Ship was over, I was employed for several days, in landing out of the Brigantine the Goods that had been given me, out of my own Ship’s Cargoe, and carrying them to my Friend Captain Glynn’s House; in which both he and I worked very hard. For my own People that did not enter with the Pirates, were mostly obliged to work on board the Prize, in fitting her for them; and the Natives who served Captain Glynn at his House, were grown so insolent by the large quantity of Goods given them by the Pirates, that they would do nothing but what they pleased. However, at last, with much trouble we got them housed.
After the French ship situation was over, I spent several days unloading goods from the Brigantine that had come from my own ship's cargo and bringing them to my friend Captain Glynn's house, where both of us worked really hard. Most of my crew who didn’t join the pirates had to work on the prize ship, getting her ready for them; and the locals who helped Captain Glynn at his house had become so arrogant with all the goods they received from the pirates that they only did whatever they felt like. Still, after much effort, we finally managed to get everything sorted and stored.
By this time, which was about the 20th of April, the Ship they had taken from me was compleatly fitted, and the[263] next day was appointed to name her, to which Ceremony I was invited. When I came on board, the Pirate Captains told me, “It was not out of Disrespect they had sent for me, but to partake of the good Cheer provided on this occasion:” So they desired I would be chearful, and go with them into the great Cabin. When I came there, Bumpers of Punch were put into our Hands, and on Captain Cocklyn’s saying aloud, God bless the Windham Galley, we drank our Liquor, broke the Glasses, and the Guns fired.
By this time, around the 20th of April, the ship they had taken from me was fully equipped, and the[263] next day was set for its naming ceremony, to which I was invited. When I boarded, the pirate captains told me, “It wasn't out of disrespect that we summoned you, but to share in the good food provided for this occasion.” So, they asked me to be cheerful and join them in the main cabin. Once there, we were handed mugs of punch, and when Captain Cocklyn raised his voice to say, God bless the Windham Galley, we drank our drinks, smashed the glasses, and the guns fired.
The Ship being Galley-built, with only two flush Decks, the Cover of the Scuttle of the Powder-room was in the great Cabin, and happened at that time to be open. One of the aftermost Guns blowing at the Touch-hole, set fire to some Cartouch-boxes, that had Cartridges in them for small Arms, the Shot and Fire of which flew about us, and made a great smother. When it was over, Captain Davis observed, there had been great Danger to us from the Scuttle’s being open; there being under, in a Room,[264] above twenty thousand weight of Gunpowder. Cocklyn replied, “He wished it had taken fire, for it would have been a noble blast, to have gone to Hell with.”
The ship was built like a galley, with only two flush decks, and the cover of the powder room's scuttle was open in the main cabin at that time. One of the guns at the back misfired at the touch-hole, igniting some cartridge boxes that contained small arms ammunition, causing shots and flames to fly around us and creating a big cloud of smoke. Once it was over, Captain Davis noted that we had been in significant danger because the scuttle was open, especially since there was over twenty thousand weight of gunpowder stored in a room below us. Cocklyn responded, “I wish it had gone up in flames; it would have been an incredible explosion to take us to Hell with.”
Then all going upon Deck, three Prizes that remained undestroyed, were ordered to be burned; upon hearing that, I privately represented to Captain Davis, “How hard it would be upon us who were Prisoners, to remain in that Country, without Necessaries, and without Food to subsist on: Besides, there was no manner of Prospect of our getting away quickly: That to the many Obligations I owed him, I hoped he would add one more, and, by his Interest, at least save one of the Vessels, for us to return to England in: That as he had several times hinted to me, how much he disliked that course of Life, hoping he should have an opportunity of leaving it in a short time; so I wished he would put it in my power, to report to his Advantage, the good deed I then requested of him; for, in my[265] Opinion, next to Murder and Cruelty, too often practised by Pirates, nothing could make them more odious to the World, than their destroying, out of mere Wantonness, so many Ships and Cargoes, as had been done by Cocklyn and Le Boose’s Crews; in which I knew he had no hand: And if he would be pleased to procure my entire Liberty, at the same time that he pleaded for one of the Vessels for us, it would be a double Obligation on me to Gratitude, in case it ever fell in my power to serve him.”
Then everyone went on deck, and three ships that were still intact were ordered to be burned. Hearing this, I privately expressed to Captain Davis, “It would be so difficult for us as prisoners to stay in this country without supplies and food to sustain us. Besides, there was no real chance of us getting away quickly. Considering all the favors I owe him, I hoped he would throw in one more and, with his influence, at least save one of the vessels for us to return to England on. He had often hinted to me how much he disliked this way of life, hoping he would have a chance to leave it soon; so I wished he would enable me to report on his behalf the good deed I was asking for. In my[265] opinion, next to murder and the cruelty often shown by pirates, nothing could make them more detestable in the eyes of the world than destroying so many ships and cargoes out of sheer wantonness, as Cocklyn and Le Boose's crews had done, in which I knew he had no part. And if he could arrange for my complete freedom at the same time he argued for one of the vessels for us, it would double my gratitude, in case I ever had the chance to help him.”
This he readily promised, and by his Management the Ships were saved from being burned, and they made a Bonfire only of the old Rising Sun, being the Ship they had quitted for mine: And now obtaining, through Captain Davis’s means, my intire Liberty, I went on Shore to my friend Captain Glynn’s House again.
This he quickly promised, and thanks to his management, the ships were saved from being burned. They only made a bonfire of the old Rising Sun, which was the ship they had left for mine. Now, having gained my full freedom through Captain Davis’s efforts, I went ashore to my friend Captain Glynn’s house again.
Two days after this Captain Elliot sent his Boat for me, desiring I would forthwith come on board his Ship, because he wanted very much to speak with me. I had too many obligations to this Gentleman[266] to refuse going, (tho’ I had a sort of an aversion.) Upon coming on board, he privately represented to me, “That I knew he had been obliged against his will by the Pirates, to receive into his Ship a great quantity of other People’s Goods; for which he might hereafter be called to an account; therefore he desired I would give him a Certificate, testifying the Truth of it.” Knowing this to be true, I readily complied; for he was a very honest Man, as appeared soon after. For the Pirates compelling him to go out of the River with them, as their Tender, he took the first opportunity of getting from them, which he did in a Tornado, or sudden Gust of Wind, that arose in the Night; and having the good fortune to succeed in his attempt, he made a good Voyage for his Owners, with Slaves to Barbadoes; where he fell sick and died.
Two days after this, Captain Elliot sent his boat for me, asking me to come on board his ship immediately because he really wanted to talk to me. I had too many obligations to this gentleman[266] to refuse, even though I felt somewhat reluctant. When I got on board, he privately told me, “You know I was forced by the pirates against my will to take a large amount of other people’s goods onto my ship, and I might have to answer for that later; so I’d like you to give me a certificate confirming this.” Knowing it was true, I agreed without hesitation because he was very honest, as became clear soon after. The pirates had made him leave the river with them as their Tender, but he seized the first opportunity to escape, which he did during a tornado, or sudden gust of wind, that came up at night. Luckily, he successfully managed to get away and made a good voyage for his owners, bringing slaves to Barbadoes; however, he fell ill and died there.
While I was in his Ship, the three Pirate Captains called along the side. Not expecting to see me there, they seemed very glad of it, and invited me to go and[267] sup with them on board Captain Davis. This I declined, being desirous of going on Shore to Captain Glynn’s. But Captain Davis insisting on it, I thought it prudent to comply; that I might not lose that Gentleman’s Good-will, who had been so kind to me.
While I was on his ship, the three pirate captains came alongside. They didn't expect to see me there, and they seemed really happy about it. They invited me to join them for dinner on Captain Davis's ship. I turned it down because I wanted to go ashore to see Captain Glynn. But since Captain Davis insisted, I thought it was wise to agree so I wouldn't lose the goodwill of that gentleman who had been so nice to me.
After we had been some time on board his Ship, Supper was brought up about eight a clock in the Evening; and the Musick was ordered to play, amongst which was a Trumpeter, that had been forced to enter out of one of the Prizes. About the middle of Supper, we heard upon Deck an outcry of Fire, and instantly a Person came to us, and said, “The Main-hatch-way was all in a Flame;” so we all went upon Deck.
After we had been on his ship for a while, dinner was served around eight o'clock in the evening, and the music was set to play, including a trumpeter who had been forced to join from one of the captured ships. In the middle of dinner, we heard a shout of fire on deck, and immediately someone came to us and said, “The main hatchway is completely on fire;” so we all went on deck.
At that time, besides the Pirates Ship’s Crew, who were mostly drunk, there was on board at least fifty Prisoners; and several Boats along the side, into which many People jumped, and put off. I being then on the Quarter-deck, with the Captains, observed this to them; but they all in confusion said, “We know[268] not what to do in the matter:” Upon that I told them, “If the sober People were allowed to go away with the Boats, no one would endeavour to save the Ship; and we that were left should be lost, (for the other Ships were above a Mile from us, and the Tide of Flood then run so strong, that their Boats could not row against it to save us:)” So I proposed to them, “to fire the Quarter-deck Guns at the Boats that had just put off, to oblige them to come on board again;” which being instantly done, it so frightned the People in them, that they forthwith came back; and all that were able, and not drunk, lent their helping hand to put out the Fire; which by this time was come to a great head in the Ship’s hold.
At that time, besides the Pirate Ship's crew, who were mostly drunk, there were at least fifty prisoners on board. Several boats were along the side, where many people jumped in and paddled away. I was on the quarterdeck with the captains and pointed this out to them, but they all, in confusion, said, “We don’t know what to do about this.” So I told them, “If the sober people are allowed to leave with the boats, no one will try to save the ship, and we who are left will be lost (since the other ships were over a mile away, and the tide was so strong that their boats couldn’t row against it to rescue us).” I then suggested, “Let’s fire the quarterdeck guns at the boats that just left to force them to return,” which was done immediately. This frightened the people in the boats so much that they quickly came back, and everyone who was able and not drunk pitched in to help put out the fire, which by then had become very serious in the ship’s hold.
After this I went down into the Steerage, where I saw one Goulding, who was Gunner’s Mate, and a brisk active Fellow, put his head up the After-hatchway, calling for Blankets and Water; “which if not brought immediately, (he said) the Bulk-head of the Powder-room[269] would be fired, and the Ship soon blown up.” Observing the Stupidity of the People about me, who stood looking on one another, I caught up several Blankets and Rugs which lay scattered about, and flung them to him, and so did others by my example. Then I run out of the Steerage upon Deck, where meeting with some People that were sober, I got them to go over the side, and draw up Buckets of Water; And others handing them to Goulding, who had by this time placed the Blankets and Rugs against the Bulk-head of the Powder-Room, he flung this Water on them, and thereby prevented the Flames from catching the Powder, and consequently from blowing up the Ship, which must otherwise have happened: For there was then on board at least thirty thousand pounds of Gunpowder, which had been taken out of several Prizes, it being a Commodity much in request amongst the Negroes.
After this, I went down into the Steerage, where I saw a guy named Goulding, who was the Gunner’s Mate and a really active guy, sticking his head up through the After-hatchway, asking for Blankets and Water. He said if they weren’t brought right away, the Bulk-head of the Powder-room[269] would catch fire, and the Ship would blow up soon. Seeing how foolish the people around me were, just standing there looking at one another, I grabbed several Blankets and Rugs that were scattered around and threw them to him, and others followed my lead. Then I ran out of the Steerage onto the Deck, where I found some sober people and got them to go over the side and haul up Buckets of Water. Others passed the buckets to Goulding, who by this time had piled the Blankets and Rugs against the Bulk-head of the Powder-Room. He threw the water on them, preventing the flames from igniting the Powder, which would have blown up the Ship. This disaster would have happened because there were at least thirty thousand pounds of Gunpowder on board, taken from several Prizes, as it was a highly sought-after commodity among the Negroes.
There was still great Confusion amongst us, occasioned by the darkness of the[270] Night, and the many drunken People, who were not sensible of the great Danger we were in: Moreover, the People in the Hold gave us as yet no Hopes of their getting the Mastery of the Fire. So I went again on the Quarter-deck, and considered with my self, if the fire could not be conquered, as I could not swim, I should have no chance of being saved: and even those that could, would, I knew, be exposed to be torn to pieces by voracious Sharks, which abound in that River: So I took one of the Quarter-deck Gratings, and lowered it by a Rope over the Ship’s-side, designing to get on that, if I should be forced to quit the Ship. For tho’ the Boats had been once obliged to come back, yet it being a dark Night, some People, unperceived, had slipped again away with them, and were quite gone away.
There was still a lot of confusion among us, caused by the darkness of the[270] night and the many drunk people who didn’t realize the serious danger we were in. Also, the people in the hold hadn’t given us any hope of controlling the fire. So I went back up to the quarterdeck and thought to myself that if the fire couldn’t be dealt with, since I couldn’t swim, I wouldn’t have any chance of being saved. Even those who could swim would likely be at risk of being attacked by the hungry sharks that were common in that river. So I took one of the grates from the quarterdeck and lowered it by a rope over the side of the ship, planning to get on it if I had to leave the ship. Although the boats had once had to return, some people had slipped away with them in the dark without being noticed and were completely gone.
Whilst I stood musing with my self on the Quarter-deck, I heard a loud shout upon the Main-deck, with a Huzza, “For a brave blast to go to Hell with,” which was repeated several times. This[271] not only much surprized me, but also many of the new entered Pirates; who were struck with a Pannick Fright, believing the Ship was just blowing up; so that several of them came running on the Quarter-deck, and accidentally threw me down, it being very dark. As soon as I got upon my Legs again, I heard these poor wretches say, in a lamentable Voice, one to another; “Oh! that we could be so foolish as to enter into this vile course of Life! The Ship will be immediately blown up, and we shall suffer for our Villanies in Hell Fire.” So that when the old hardened Rogues on the Main-deck, wish’d for a blast to go to Hell with, the other poor wretches were at the same time under the greatest Consternation at the thoughts of it.
While I was lost in thought on the quarter-deck, I heard a loud shout from the main deck, followed by cheers of, “For a brave blast to go to Hell with,” which echoed several times. This[271] surprised me greatly, as well as many of the new pirates, who were gripped by a panic, thinking the ship was about to explode. Several of them came rushing onto the quarter-deck, and in the darkness, accidentally knocked me down. As soon as I managed to get back on my feet, I heard these poor souls lamenting to each other, “Oh! How foolish we are to enter this miserable life! The ship will blow up any moment, and we’ll pay for our sins in Hell Fire.” So, while the old hardened rogues on the main deck called for a blast to go to Hell, the other frightened souls were gripped by the worst fear at the thought of it.
The Apprehension of the Ship’s being just ready to blow up, was so universal, that above fifty People got on the Bolt-sprit, and Sprit-sail-yard, thinking they should have there a better chance for their Lives: But they much deceived themselves, for had so great a quantity of[272] Powder as was at that time on board, been fired, it would have blown them up to Atoms.
The fear that the ship was about to explode was so widespread that more than fifty people climbed onto the bowsprit and the spritsail yard, thinking they’d have a better chance of surviving there. But they were very mistaken, because if the huge amount of [272] powder onboard had ignited, it would have blown them into bits.
There was one Taylor, Master of this Pirate Ship, as brisk and couragious a Man as ever I saw; (who afterwards commanded the Cassandra, an English East India Ship, and carried her to New Spain, where he and his Crew separated.) This Person, with fifteen more, spared no pains to extinguish the Fire in the Hold; and tho’ they were scalded in a sad manner by the Flames, yet they never shrunk till it was conquered; which was not till near ten a clock at night, when they came upon Deck, declaring the Danger was over: So the Surgeons were called to dress their burns. This was joyful News to us all on Deck, for we little expected to escape.
There was a guy named Taylor, the captain of this Pirate Ship, as lively and brave a man as I’ve ever seen; (who later commanded the Cassandra, an English East India ship, and took her to New Spain, where he and his crew parted ways.) This guy, along with fifteen others, worked tirelessly to put out the fire in the hold; and even though they were badly scalded by the flames, they never backed down until it was finally put out, which didn't happen until almost ten o'clock at night, when they came up on deck announcing that the danger was over. So the surgeons were called to treat their burns. This was great news for all of us on deck, as we never expected to come out of this unscathed.
I shall now relate how this Fire happened, from which our Deliverance was almost miraculous. About half an hour after eight a clock in the evening, a Negroe Man went into the Hold, to pump some Rum out of a Cask; and imprudently[273] holding his Candle too near the Bung-hole, a Spark fell into the Hogs-head, and set the Rum on fire. This immediately fired another Cask of the same Liquor, whose Bung had been, through carelessness, left open: And both the Heads of the Hogsheads immediately flying out, with a report equal to that of a small Cannon, the fire run about the Hold. There were twenty Casks of Rum, with as many Barrels of Pitch and Tar, very near the place where the Rum lay that was fired; yet it pleased God none of these took fire, otherwise it would have been impossible for us to escape.
I will now share how this fire started, from which our escape was almost miraculous. About half an hour after eight in the evening, a Black man went into the hold to pump some rum out of a cask; and carelessly holding his candle too close to the bung hole, a spark fell into the hogshead and set the rum on fire. This immediately ignited another cask of the same liquor, which had been carelessly left open. Both heads of the hogsheads flew out with a sound like a small cannon, and the fire spread throughout the hold. There were twenty casks of rum, along with as many barrels of pitch and tar, very close to where the ignited rum was; yet, by the grace of God, none of these caught fire, or else it would have been impossible for us to escape.
After this was over, I was obliged to stay on board till Morning, all the Boats being run away with. In that time Golding, the Gunner’s Mate, told the Pirate’s Crew several things to my Advantage: “How I had handed the Blankets to him, and ordered Water to be thrown on them; which saved the Bulk-head, where the Powder lay, from being fired, and consequently the Ship from being blown up.” So now I was more than[274] ever in their favour: For several of them desired me to come on board the Windham Galley, the day Things were sold there at the Mart, and then they would be kind to me. Likewise Captain Davis press’d me to come, asking me, “Whether the Gold Watch that was taken from me was a good one?” To which I answering, “It was very good, at that time.” He then said, “He would buy it for his own use at any rate.”
After this was over, I had to stay on board until morning since all the boats had been taken. During that time, Golding, the Gunner’s Mate, told the Pirate’s Crew several things that worked to my advantage: “How I had handed him the blankets and ordered water to be poured on them, which saved the bulkhead where the powder was stored from catching fire, and therefore saved the ship from blowing up.” Now I was more than ever in their good graces: several of them asked me to come on board the Windham Galley the day things were sold at the Mart, and they promised to be kind to me. Captain Davis also urged me to come, asking, “Was the gold watch that was taken from you a good one?” I replied, “It was very good at that time.” He then said, “He would buy it for his own use no matter what.”
While he and I were talking thus, one of the Mates came half drunk, on the Quarter-deck, saying to him; “I propose in behalf of the Ship’s Company, that this Man shall be obliged to go down the Coast of Guinea with us; for I am told we cannot have a better Pilot.” This was a great surprize to me; but my generous Friend Davis soon put me out of pain. For he told him, “They wanted no Pilot:” and the fellow still insisting on my going, Captain Davis caned him off the Quarter-deck, and I heard no more of it: For soon after I went on Shore to my Friend Captain Glynn’s House.
While he and I were talking like that, one of the mates came up, half drunk, on the quarter-deck, saying to him, “I’m proposing on behalf of the ship’s crew that this man should be forced to go down the coast of Guinea with us, because I’ve heard we can’t get a better pilot.” This was quite a surprise to me, but my kind friend Davis quickly put me at ease. He told him, “They don’t need a pilot.” The guy kept insisting that I go, but Captain Davis kicked him off the quarter-deck, and I didn’t hear anything more about it. Shortly after that, I went ashore to my friend Captain Glynn’s house.
Two days after this, a small Vessel came into the River, and was taken by them: It was called the Dispatch Captain Wilson, belonging to the Royal African Company. Mr. Simon Jones, formerly my first Mate, who had entered with the Pirates, (as I have before related) told them, on this occasion, “That he had once commanded a Ship, which was hired and freighted by the African Company; and that he had been very unjustly used by them; so he desired the Dispatch might be burned, that he might be revenged of them.” This being immediately consented to, and forthwith ordered to be executed, one John Stubbs, a witty brisk fellow, stood up, and desired to be heard first; saying, “Pray, Gentlemen, hold a little, and I will prove to you, if this Ship is burnt, you will thereby greatly serve the Company’s Interest.” This drawing every one’s attention, they bid him go on: Then he said, “The Vessel has been out these two years on her Voyage, being old and crazy, and almost eaten to[276] pieces by the Worms; besides, her Stores are worth little, and as to her Cargoe, it consists only of a little Redwood and Melegette-pepper; so if she should be burned, the Company will lose little; but the poor People that now belong to her, and have been so long a Voyage, will lose all their Wages, which, I am sure, is three times the Value of the Vessel, and of her trifling Cargoe; so that the Company will be highly obliged to you for destroying her.” The rest of the Crew being convinced by these Reasons, the Vessel was spared, and delivered again to Captain Wilson and his People, who afterwards came safe to England in it.
Two days later, a small ship came into the river, and they captured it. It was called the Dispatch, captained by Wilson, and belonged to the Royal African Company. Mr. Simon Jones, who used to be my first mate and had joined the pirates (as I mentioned before), told them, “I once commanded a ship that was hired and loaded by the African Company; they treated me very unfairly, so I want the Dispatch to be burned as revenge.” They immediately agreed and ordered it to be done, but then John Stubbs, a witty and energetic guy, stood up and asked to speak first. He said, “Please, gentlemen, hold on for a moment, and I’ll show you that if this ship is burned, you will actually be helping the Company.” Everyone paid attention and told him to go ahead: He continued, “The vessel has been out on its voyage for two years; it’s old, falling apart, and almost eaten to pieces by worms. Plus, its supplies aren’t worth much, and as for its cargo, it's just a little redwood and Melegette pepper. So if it burns, the Company won’t lose much; but the poor crew that has been on board for so long will lose all their wages, which I’m sure is worth three times what the ship and its worthless cargo are worth. So the Company will actually owe you a favor for getting rid of it.” The rest of the crew, convinced by his arguments, decided to spare the ship, and it was returned to Captain Wilson and his crew, who later returned safely to England in it.
The 29th of April, such of the Pirates as were my Friends, sent me word on Shore, “That the Sale of Necessaries was to begin that day in the afternoon, in the Windham-Galley, Captain Cocklyn.” So I went on board in a large Cannoe, belonging to two Men that lived ashore, who went at the same time with me. At the Sale, several of the Pirates[277] bought many Necessaries that had been mine, and gave them to me. Likewise, Mr. James Griffin, my Schoolfellow, was so civil as to beg from those that were not so kind to me, as he hoped they would have been. The two white Men that went with me in the Cannoe, minded their own business so well, that they got several great Bundles of Clothes and Goods, which they put into the Cannoe with mine.
On April 29th, some of the Pirates who were my friends sent me a message on shore saying, “The sale of supplies is starting this afternoon on the Windham-Galley, Captain Cocklyn.” So I boarded a large canoe belonging to two men who lived nearby, and they went with me. At the sale, several Pirates bought many of my supplies and gave them back to me. Also, Mr. James Griffin, my schoolmate, was kind enough to ask those who weren’t so generous to me for help, hoping they would cooperate. The two white men who came with me in the canoe focused on their own interests so well that they ended up with several big bundles of clothes and goods, which they loaded into the canoe along with mine.
By this time several Pirates being half drunk with Brandy, looked over the side, and seeing so many Bundles in the Cannoe, which they supposed to be all mine, they swore, “I was insatiable, and that it would be a good deed to throw them overboard.” This my kind Schoolfellow hearing, he came and told me of it; advising me, to go immediately on Shore; which I accordingly did; and it proved very happy for me. For soon after my Watch was put up to sale, and many bidding for it, some of them out of Spite to Captain Davis, it was run up to one hundred Pounds, which he paid down. One of the Pirates being greatly[278] vexed at it, said, “He believed the Cases of the Watch were not good Gold;” and calling for a Touch-stone, he tried them on it. The Touch looking of a copperish Colour, (as indeed all Gold-cases of Watches do on the touch, by reason of the quantity of Alloy put in to harden them) this pretence served the turn of this Villain; who thereupon exclaimed against me, saying, “I was a greater Rogue than any of them, who openly professed Piracy; since I was so sly, as to bring a base Metal Watch, and endeavour to put it off for a gold one.”
At this point, several pirates, who were half-drunk from brandy, looked over the side and saw a lot of bundles in the canoe, which they assumed were all mine. They yelled that I was greedy and that it would be a good deed to throw them overboard. My kind schoolmate overheard this and came to warn me, advising me to go ashore right away, which I did, and it turned out to be very fortunate for me. Soon after, my watch was put up for sale, and with many people bidding for it—some just to annoy Captain Davis—the price reached one hundred pounds, which he paid on the spot. One of the pirates, really annoyed by it, said he believed the cases of the watch weren’t made of good gold, and he called for a touchstone to test them. The touchstone turned up a copperish color (as all gold watch cases do when tested, due to the amount of alloy mixed in to make them harder), which gave this villain a reason to attack me. He shouted that I was a bigger rogue than any of them who openly practiced piracy, since I was cunning enough to bring a cheap metal watch and try to pass it off as gold.
This Speech procured me the Anger of many, who knew no better; they believing every word of what he said to be true. And tho’ Captain Davis laugh’d at it, yet several swore, “If I had not been gone on Shore, they would have whipped me:” And as their Drunkenness increased, they talked of sending for me to be punished for so great a Villany, as they called it. But my Schoolfellow, apprehending they would really offer me some Violence, was so kind as to send me[279] word of what had pass’d, by a white Man living on Shore, who was then on board; advising me to go into the Woods, for they should sail quickly out of the River.
This speech made a lot of people angry with me, who didn't know any better; they believed every word he said was true. Even though Captain Davis laughed it off, several people swore, “If I hadn’t gone ashore, they would have punished me.” As their drunkenness increased, they talked about sending for me to be punished for what they called such a great crime. But my schoolmate, worried that they might actually hurt me, kindly sent me word about what had happened through a white man living on shore who was then on board, advising me to head into the woods since they would be leaving the river soon.
The next morning early, which was the last day of April, as I was just going to follow his advice, I was agreeably surprized with the arrival of one Mr. James Bleau, my Surgeon, whom they designed to take by force with them. This honest Man had been very much cast down at it, and had often desired me to intercede for his liberty. Accordingly I had done it, representing, “That he grieved himself so much, that if he did not die quickly, yet he would be of no use to them:” But this had no effect. However, at last, a fortunate accident cleared him, when he least expected it; for that very evening, after I was come on Shore, the Surgeon of the French Ship entered with them; whereupon they gave Mr. Bleau his Liberty the next morning.
The next morning early, which was the last day of April, as I was just about to follow his advice, I was pleasantly surprised by the arrival of Mr. James Bleau, my Surgeon, whom they intended to take by force. This honest man had been very down about it and had often asked me to help secure his freedom. So I did, explaining, “He’s so upset that if he doesn’t die soon, he’ll be of no use to you.” But this didn’t make any difference. However, in a twist of fate, he was freed when he least expected it; that very evening, after I had come ashore, the Surgeon from the French ship joined them, and they granted Mr. Bleau his freedom the next morning.
Mr. Bleau brought us the agreeable News, that the three Pirate Ships, with their Tender, were under sail, going out[280] of the River. This gave us all on Shore the highest Satisfaction; for I had been then in their hands a Month, and many others much longer. Mr. Bleau, whom I have here mentioned, lives now at Woodford-Row on Epping-Forest, where he follows his Business.
Mr. Bleau brought us the great news that the three pirate ships, along with their Tender, were setting sail out of the river. This made everyone on shore incredibly happy; I had been in their hands for a month, and many others had been there even longer. Mr. Bleau, as I mentioned, now lives at Woodford-Row on Epping-Forest, where he continues his work.
I shall now inform the Reader, what became of my kind Schoolfellow Griffin, and my generous Friend Davis. The first took an opportunity of getting out of the hands of the Pirates, by taking away a Boat from the Stern of the Ship he was in, when off the Road of Annamaboe, on the Coast of Guinea. He was driven on Shore there, unperceived in the night time; and from thence went to Cape Coast Castle, belonging to the Royal African Company; from which place he went Passenger to Barbadoes, in an English Ship, where he was taken with a violent Fever and died.
I’m going to tell you what happened to my school friend, Griffin, and my good friend, Davis. Griffin managed to escape from the pirates by grabbing a boat from the back of the ship he was on, while they were near Annamaboe, on the coast of Guinea. He landed there unnoticed during the night and then made his way to Cape Coast Castle, which is owned by the Royal African Company. From there, he took a ship to Barbados, but he caught a severe fever and died.
As to Davis, having discovered, a few days after they left the River Sierraleon, a Conspiracy, to deprive him of his Command, which was carried on by one Taylor,[281] that was Master of the Ship under him, he timely prevented it: But he and some others left their Ship, and went on board the Windam Galley, Captain Cocklyn, by whom he found Taylor had been set on to displace him. This causing him to leave their Partnership, he took a few days after one Captain Plumb in the Princess of London, whose second Mate Roberts, so famous afterwards for his Villanies, entered with him; and Davis’s Crew, after plundering the Ship, restored her to Captain Plumb again. After this, Captain Davis went for the Island Princess, belonging to the Portuguese, which lies in the Bay of Guinea. Here the Pirates gave out, “They were a King’s Ship;” but the People soon discovered what they were by their lavishness, in purchasing fresh Provisions with Goods; but the Governour winked at it, on account of the great Gains he, and others of the chief of his People made by them. But at last some putting him in mind, “That if this Affair should come to the King of Portugal’s ear, it might prove[282] his ruin;” he plotted how to destroy Davis and his Crew, in order to colour over what he had so basely permitted, in allowing them a free trade, after discovering they were Pirates.
As for Davis, he found out just a few days after they left the River Sierraleon that there was a conspiracy to take away his command, orchestrated by one Taylor, who was the master of the ship under him. He managed to stop it in time. However, he and a few others left their ship and boarded the Windam Galley, captained by Cocklyn, where he learned that Taylor had been set up to replace him. This led him to end their partnership, and shortly after, he joined Captain Plumb on the Princess of London, whose second mate Roberts, who later became notorious for his crimes, came aboard with him. Davis’s crew plundered the ship but later returned it to Captain Plumb. After that, Captain Davis headed to the Island Princess, owned by the Portuguese, located in the Bay of Guinea. The pirates claimed to be a king’s ship, but the locals quickly figured out who they really were when they saw them spending freely on fresh provisions. However, the governor overlooked it because of the significant profits he and other influential people were making from them. Eventually, someone reminded him that if word got to the King of Portugal, it could lead to his downfall. He then plotted to destroy Davis and his crew to cover up his previous negligence in allowing them to trade freely after discovering they were pirates.
Captain Davis being one day on Shore with the Governor, he told him, “They designed to sail from the Island in three days, and that he would come, and take his leave of him the day before.” Accordingly he went on a Sunday morning, taking with him his first Surgeon, the Trumpeter, and some others, besides the Boat’s Crew. At their coming into the Governor’s House, they saw no body to receive them; so they went on, till they came into a long Gallery fronting the Street. Here the Governor’s Major Domo presently came to them, saying, “His Master was at his Country-House, but he had sent a Messenger to him, when they saw Captain Davis coming on Shore; and no doubt he would soon be in Town.” But the Surgeon observing, that many People had got together in the Street, with Arms in their[283] hands, he said to his Captain, “I am sure we shall see no Governor to day,” and advised him immediately to go away. So Davis and the Surgeon went out of the House; whereupon the Major-Domo called to the People in the Street, to fire at them. The Surgeon and two more were kill’d on the Spot, and the Trumpeter was wounded in the Arm, who seeing two Capuchin Friers (from whom I had this Account at the Island Princess) fled to them. One of them took him in his Arms to save him, but a Portuguese came, and shot him dead without any regard to the Frier’s Protection. Captain Davis, tho’ he had four Shots in divers parts of his Body, yet continued running towards the Boat: But being closely pursued, a fifth Shot made him fall, and the Portuguese being amazed at his great Strength and Courage, cut his Throat, that they might be sure of him.
Captain Davis was on shore one day with the Governor when he mentioned that they planned to sail from the island in three days. He said he would come by and say goodbye the day before. So, on a Sunday morning, he set out with his first surgeon, the trumpeter, and a few others, along with the boat crew. When they arrived at the Governor’s house, no one was there to greet them, so they continued until they reached a long gallery facing the street. There, the Governor’s Major Domo approached them and said, “His Master is at his country house, but he sent a messenger to let him know Captain Davis was coming ashore; he should be back in town soon.” However, the surgeon noticed that many people had gathered in the street, armed, and said to his captain, “I’m sure we won’t see the Governor today,” advising him to leave immediately. Davis and the surgeon exited the house, at which point the Major-Domo shouted to the people in the street to shoot at them. The surgeon and two others were killed instantly, and the trumpeter was wounded in the arm. Seeing two Capuchin friars (from whom I got this account at the island Princess), he ran to them for safety. One of the friars picked him up to protect him, but a Portuguese soldier came and shot him dead without regard for the friar’s protection. Captain Davis, despite having four shots in various parts of his body, kept running toward the boat. However, he was closely pursued, and a fifth shot caused him to fall. The Portuguese, amazed by his immense strength and bravery, cut his throat to ensure he was dead.
The Boat’s Crew hearing the firing, put off in good time at some distance from the Shore; and seeing the Portuguese advancing to fire at them, they rowed[284] on board their Ship; where relating what had happened, as they supposed, to their Captain, and to the rest left on Shore, it set the Pirates all in a flame; and they directly chose Roberts for their Commander, vowing a severe revenge on the Portuguese.
The boat's crew heard the gunfire and left at a safe distance from the shore. When they saw the Portuguese coming to shoot at them, they rowed[284] back to their ship. Once they explained what happened, as they thought, to their captain and the others left on shore, it fired up the pirates. They quickly chose Roberts as their commander, swearing to take ruthless revenge on the Portuguese.
The Water was so shallow, that they could not get their Ship near the Town; so they prepared a Raft, on which they mounted several pieces of Cannon, with which they fired at the place: But the Inhabitants having quitted it, and all the Houses being of Timber, they did little damage to the Town. Neither durst they land to burn the Place, for fear of the great Number of People, whom they perceived in the Bushes with small Arms: So, they returned to their Ship, and the next day sailed out of the Harbour.
The water was so shallow that they couldn't bring their ship close to the town. Instead, they built a raft and loaded it with several cannons, which they used to fire at the location. However, since the inhabitants had left and all the houses were made of wood, they didn't cause much damage to the town. They also didn't dare land to set the place on fire for fear of the large number of people they noticed in the bushes with small arms. So, they went back to their ship and the next day sailed out of the harbor.
Thus fell Captain Davis, who (allowing for the Course of Life he had been unhappily engaged in) was a most generous humane Person. And thus Roberts arose, who proved the reverse of him, and did afterwards a great deal of mischief in the West Indies, and on the[285] Coast of Guinea; till he and his Crew were happily suppress’d by Sir Chaloner Ogle, in the Swallow Man of War, and in the Engagement, Roberts, and several of his People were killed. But as there is An Account of the Pirates published, in which the principal Actions of Roberts are related, I shall say nothing more of him here; but go on to relate what is not mentioned in the aforesaid Book.
Thus fell Captain Davis, who, despite the unfortunate path he had traveled, was a truly generous and kind person. In contrast, Roberts emerged, who turned out to be his opposite and caused a great deal of trouble in the West Indies and along the [285] Coast of Guinea; until he and his crew were fortunately stopped by Sir Chaloner Ogle in the Swallow Man of War, during which Roberts and several of his men were killed. However, since there is An Account of the Pirates published that covers the main actions of Roberts, I won’t say anything more about him here; instead, I will go on to discuss what is not mentioned in that book.
As soon as it was commonly known, that the Pirates were sailed from Sierraleon, Captain Bennet and Thompson, with several others that had been obliged to keep in the Woods, as I have formerly related, came to Captain Glynn’s House. There we all consulted about preparing the Bristol Snow, which the Pirates had spared at my Intreaty, so as to make it fit for us to return to England in. There was with us one Captain David Creichton, in the Elizabeth of London, laden with dying Wood; whom the Pirates had taken not long before me. Him they plundered, and would have destroyed, but by the Interest of Mr. James Griffin, who had been chief[286] Mate with the Captain’s Brother, the Ship was spared. In this Ship Captain Creichton took as many People as he possibly could, in order to spare our Provisions, and sailed a few days after the Pirates left the River Sierraleon, for London: We that were left behind, sent notice by him to our Owners of the great Misfortunes that had befallen us.
As soon as it became widely known that the pirates had set sail from Sierraleon, Captain Bennet and Thompson, along with several others who had been forced to hide in the woods, as I previously mentioned, came to Captain Glynn’s house. We all discussed getting the Bristol Snow ready, which the pirates had spared at my request, so we could use it to return to England. With us was Captain David Creichton, of the Elizabeth from London, carrying valuable wood; he had been captured by the pirates shortly before I was. They had plundered him and almost destroyed his ship, but thanks to the influence of Mr. James Griffin, who had been the chief mate with the captain’s brother, the ship was spared. Captain Creichton took as many people on board as he could to conserve our supplies and set sail a few days after the pirates left the river Sierraleon, headed for London. We who were left behind sent word with him to our owners about the terrible misfortunes that had happened to us.
Then applying our selves to fit the Bristol-Snow, whom a worthy Person, one Captain John Morris, commanded, we found we should be in very great want of Provisions, considering how many poor People desired to go home with us. Upon that Captain Glynn sent a small Sloop belonging to him, to fetch Provisions from the River Sherberow, where the destroying Pirates had not been. From thence she returned in a few days, with a good quantity; and one Captain Nisbet having found under his Ship’s Ballast in the Hold, several Casks of Beef; which had not come to the knowledge of the Pirates (otherwise it would no doubt have been destroyed, as most part of his Cargoe was)[287] he was so kind as to spare me as much of this Beef as he possibly could; and I drew a Bill on my Owner for the value of it.
Then we focused on fitting the Bristol-Snow, which was commanded by a respectable person, Captain John Morris. We realized we would be lacking in supplies, especially considering how many poor people wanted to return home with us. Because of this, Captain Glynn sent a small sloop he owned to get provisions from the River Sherberow, where the destructive pirates had not been. A few days later, the sloop returned with a decent amount of supplies. Additionally, Captain Nisbet discovered several casks of beef under his ship's ballast in the hold, which the pirates hadn't found (or else it would surely have been destroyed, like most of his cargo was). He kindly spared me as much of this beef as he could, and I wrote a bill to my owner for its value.[287]
Moreover, we found in the French Ship that had been taken, and afterwards run on Shore by the Pirates, a large quantity of good Biscuit, so that now we were sufficiently provided in all respects.
Moreover, we found in the French ship that had been captured and later run aground by the pirates a large amount of good biscuits, so now we were well-stocked in every way.
Lastly, knowing that large quantities of Goods had been given by the Pirates, to all the white Men residing on Shore upon their own accounts, we all went in a Body to demand them. Messieurs Mead and Pearce, who were in Partnership, very readily and honourably delivered up all they were possessed of: But others did not follow their Example; for they only shewed us what Goods they thought proper, of which I allowed them one third part for salvage.
Lastly, knowing that a lot of goods had been given by the pirates to all the white men living on shore for their own benefit, we all went together to demand them. Messieurs Mead and Pearce, who were partners, quickly and honorably gave up everything they had. But others didn't follow their example; instead, they only showed us the goods they thought were appropriate, and I allowed them one-third for salvage.
So I shipp’d what I had recovered from them, with the other Goods the Pirates had given me formerly out of Captain Morris’s Vessel; and then we embarked in her, being above sixty Passengers, besides six Masters of Ships, whose Vessels had been[288] destroyed, or fitted for the use of the Pirates. We left the River Sierraleon the 10th day of May, and, after a tedious Passage, occasioned by the Ship’s bad sailing, we came safe to Bristol, the first of August 1719.
So I shipped what I had recovered from them, along with the other goods the pirates had previously given me from Captain Morris’s vessel; and then we boarded that ship, with over sixty passengers, in addition to six ship captains whose vessels had been[288] destroyed or taken over by the pirates. We left the River Sierraleon on the 10th of May, and after a long journey, due to the ship's poor sailing, we arrived safely in Bristol on the 1st of August 1719.
On my landing at the Key, Mr. Casamajor, Merchant of that City, came to me, and delivered me a Letter from my Owner, the late Humphrey Morrice Esq; who had received mine by Captain Creichton, with the account of my Misfortune, a few days before we arrived at Bristol. Mr. Morrice, in his Letter, was pleased to comfort me under so severe a Trial, as I had undergone, assuring me, “He would immediately give me the Command of another Ship; (which accordingly he most generously did soon after) and that he had ordered Mr. Casamajor, his Correspondent, to supply me with Money, to distribute amongst my poor Sailors, who had returned with me to Bristol; in order to enable them to go to their several Habitations,” which was in several Parts of England.
When I arrived at the Key, Mr. Casamajor, a merchant from that city, greeted me and handed me a letter from my employer, the late Humphrey Morrice Esq. He had received my letter through Captain Creichton, detailing my misfortune, just a few days before we got to Bristol. In his letter, Mr. Morrice was kind enough to comfort me during such a tough time, assuring me, “He would immediately give me command of another ship; (which he generously did shortly after) and that he had instructed Mr. Casamajor, his contact, to provide me with money to share with my poor sailors who returned with me to Bristol; to help them get back to their homes,” which were spread across various parts of England.
Laus DEO.
Laus Deo.
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
TRANSCRIBER'S NOTE
One occurrence of Dahomès (page 31) was changed to the predominant Dahomes.
Four occurrences of Dahome (pages 2, 14, 56, 148) were changed to
the predominant Dahomè.
One occurrence of Dahomès (page 31) was changed to the predominant Dahomes.
Four occurrences of Dahome (pages 2, 14, 56, 148) were changed to the predominant Dahomè.
Except for those changes noted below, all misspellings in the text, and inconsistent or archaic usage, have been left unchanged.
Except for the changes mentioned below, all misspellings in the text, as well as inconsistent or outdated usage, have been left as is.
Pg 29: ‘keep the the Multitude’ replaced by ‘keep the Multitude’.
Pg 95: ‘He then ask-me’ replaced by ‘He then asked me’.
Pg 101: ‘the Linguist old me’ replaced by ‘the Linguist told me’.
Pg 219: ‘amonst most of’ replaced by ‘amongst most of’.
Pg 238: ‘Quar-master; who’ replaced by ‘Quarter-master; who’.
Pg 29: ‘keep the the Multitude’ replaced by ‘keep the Multitude’.
Pg 95: ‘He then ask-me’ replaced by ‘He then asked me’.
Pg 101: ‘the Linguist old me’ replaced by ‘the Linguist told me’.
Pg 219: ‘amonst most of’ replaced by ‘amongst most of’.
Pg 238: ‘Quar-master; who’ replaced by ‘Quarter-master; who’.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!